JP2008113839A - Point management system and point management device - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a point management device 50 allowing a member, who does not have an information terminal (a personal computer 6 or a cellular phone 7) or who is not good at operating the information terminal, to register as a point member. <P>SOLUTION: The point management device registers a member card ID identified by first member identifying information (member card ID or member ID) included in a first registration request when the point management device receives the first registration request transmitted from a shop terminal (a card unit 20 or a kiosk terminal 30) set in a game parlor. The point management device combines the points corresponding to the member card IDs for different shops together only when the shop corresponding to the member card ID to integrate and the shop corresponding to the member card ID to be integrated belong to the same group. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2008,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a point management device that manages the number of points owned by a member in association with member identification information that can individually identify members registered at each store, and a point management system that includes the point management device. .

  Conventionally, as shown in Patent Document 1, a member ID that is member identification information that allows a member who has registered as a store member in each store to individually identify the member in his / her information terminal (PC or mobile phone) When a registration operation is performed by inputting the registration ID, etc., a registration request including the input member ID is transmitted to the integrated management apparatus. In the integrated management apparatus, the member ID included in the transmitted registration request is Those registered as email members are known.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-102079 (FIG. 19, paragraphs 0195 to 0197)

  However, in the integrated management device shown in Patent Document 1, a store member who does not own an information terminal or a store member who is not good at operating an information terminal cannot transmit the registration request. It was impossible to register as a certain e-mail member, and it was impossible to give all store members an opportunity to enjoy the benefits of a point member fairly.

  The present invention was made based on such a background, and its purpose is to register as a point member even if a store member does not own an information terminal or a store member who is not good at operating information terminals. An object of the present invention is to provide a point management device that can be used, and a point management system including the point management device.

  The present invention adopts the following means in order to solve the above problems. The reference numerals used in the description of the best mode for carrying out the invention and the drawings to be described later are appended in parentheses for reference, but the constituent elements of the present invention are not limited to the appended description.

  First, the invention according to claim 1 is specified from the recording information of a recording medium (member card) issued to a member who has registered as a store member at each store (game hall), and the member can be individually identified. A point management system (1) comprising a point management device (50) having point management means (point member information DB) for managing the number of points owned by the member in association with member identification information (member card ID). First member specifying information (member card ID, member ID) capable of specifying the member identification information is magnetically or electrically recorded on the recording medium, and the member identification information can be specified. 2 Member identification information (member card ID, member ID) is recorded so as to be visible, is installed at each store, receives the recording medium, and is recorded on the received recording medium A recording medium receiving means (card R / W 25, card reader 33) for reading the first member specifying information and a first registration request including the first member specifying information read by the recording medium receiving means to the point management device And a store terminal (card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30) having first registration request transmitting means (unit control unit 22, control unit 32) for transmitting, and the point management device is transmitted from the store terminal. Based on the received first registration request, the member identification information specified from the first member specifying information included in the received first registration request is registered in the point management means, and the member In the information terminal (PC6, mobile phone 7) possessed by the member, the member inputs the second member identification information and performs a registration operation. Member identification information specified from the second member specifying information included in the received second registration request based on the received second registration request including the input second member specifying information. Registration means (control unit 52) for registering the information in the point management means, group setting means (display 54 and input device 55) for setting a group to which a plurality of stores belong, and the second member specifying information from the information terminal. Store identification information (store ID) capable of individually identifying stores corresponding to the integration source member identification information, which is member identification information identified from the received second member identification information based on the received second member identification information, A group applicable store determination unit (control unit 52) for determining whether or not the store identification information of a store belonging to the group set by the setting unit, and the group applicable store determination On the condition that it is determined by the means that it is store identification information of a store belonging to a group, the integration target member identification information which is other member identification information desired to be integrated with the integration source member identification information can be specified. 2) an integrated reception page transmitting means (control unit 52) for transmitting an integrated reception page for receiving input of member specific information to the information terminal; and a second member input from the information terminal on the integrated reception page Based on the reception of the specific information, the store identification information of the store corresponding to the integration target member identification information specified from the received second member identification information is a group of stores corresponding to the integration source member identification information. The same group store determination means (control unit 52) for determining whether or not the same group store belongs to the same group store, and the same group store determination means Member identification information association processing for performing member identification information association processing for associating the integration source member identification information with the integration target member identification information on the condition that it is determined to be store identification information of a store. The means (control unit 52), the point summing unit (control unit 52) for adding up the number of points corresponding to each member identification information associated by the member identification information association processing, and the point summing unit The point management system further includes point use processing means (control unit 52) for performing processing for allowing the member to use the total number of points for enjoying a predetermined service.

  The invention according to claim 2 is the point management system (1) according to claim 1, wherein the point management device (50) specifies the second member from the information terminal (PC6, mobile phone 7). Login member identification information which is member identification information (member card ID) identified from the second member identification information included in the received information disclosure request based on receiving an information disclosure request (login request) including information On the condition that the same member determining means (control unit 52) for determining whether or not there is member identification information associated with (login ID) and that the same member determining means determines that there is no member identification information, the login A member-dedicated page dedicated to the member including at least the number of points corresponding to the member identification information is transmitted to the information terminal and determined to be present by the same member determining means. A member-dedicated page transmission unit (control unit 52) for transmitting the member-dedicated page including at least the total number of points combined by the point summation unit (control unit 52) to the information terminal, The point management system further comprising:

  The invention according to claim 3 is the point management system (1) according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the point management device (50) performs the registration operation in response to the second registration request. The e-mail address acquisition means (control unit 52) for acquiring the e-mail address of the member from the information terminal (PC6, mobile phone 7), and the received second e-mail address acquired by the e-mail address acquisition means. Member management means (point member information DB) for managing in association with member identification information (member card ID) specified from the second member specifying information included in the registration request, and notification contents (questionnaire) notified to the member Information, event information, winning information) and information that can identify the member identification information of the member to be notified (questionnaire member attribute information, event target) Notification information setting means (display 54 and input device 55, transfer device communication unit 51b, control unit 52) for setting member attribute information and member card ID of the elected member, and the notification information setting unit. An e-mail address extracting unit (control unit 52) that extracts an e-mail address managed by the member managing unit in association with the member identification information to be notified specified from information, and set by the notification information setting unit An e-mail transmitting means (control unit 52) for transmitting an e-mail containing notification information for providing the notified notification contents to the e-mail address extracted by the e-mail address extracting means; and the store terminal (card unit) 20, based on receiving the confirmation request (login request) including the first member identification information from the kiosk terminal 30) It is determined whether or not the member identification information identified from the first member identification information included in the received confirmation request is the notification target member identification information identified from the information set by the notification information setting means. Notification target determination means (control unit 52) and notification information return means for returning the notification information to the store terminal on the condition that the notification target determination means determines that it is member identification information to be notified. (Point control system) characterized by further having (control part 52).

  The invention according to claim 4 is the point management system (1) according to claim 3, wherein the point management device (50) receives the confirmation request from the store terminal (card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30). Based on the reception of the (login request), the member management means (point member information DB) is associated with the member identification information (member card ID) specified from the first member specifying information included in the received confirmation request. ) Further includes an e-mail address management determination unit (control unit 52) for determining whether or not the e-mail address is managed, and the notification information return unit (control unit 52) includes the e-mail address management determination unit. The notification information is not returned to the store terminal on the condition that it is determined that the e-mail address is managed by Point is a management system.

  The invention according to claim 5 is specified from the recording information of a recording medium (member card) issued to a member who has registered as a store member at each store (game hall), and can individually identify the member. A point management device (50) having point management means (point member information DB) for managing the number of points owned by the member in association with member identification information (member card ID), wherein the recording medium includes: First member identification information (member card ID, member ID) that can identify the member identification information is magnetically or electrically recorded, and second member identification information (member card ID) that can identify the member identification information. , Member ID) is recorded in a visible manner, and the member accepts the recording medium at a store terminal (card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30) installed in each store. The first member included in the received first registration request based on the fact that the first registration request including the first member specifying information read from the received recording medium is received from the store terminal. The member identification information specified from the specific information is registered in the point management means, and the member inputs the second member specifying information in the information terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7) possessed by the member and performs a registration operation. The second member specifying information included in the received second registration request based on receiving the second registration request including the input second member specifying information transmitted from the information terminal. Registration means (control unit 52) for registering the member identification information specified from the point management means, and group setting means (display 5) for setting a group to which a plurality of stores belong. And the input device 55) and corresponding to the integration source member identification information which is the member identification information identified from the received second member identification information based on the reception of the second member identification information from the information terminal. Group applicable store determination means (control unit 52) for determining whether or not store identification information (store ID) capable of individually identifying a store is store identification information of a store belonging to the group set by the group setting means. And the integration target member identification which is other member identification information desired to be integrated with the integration source member identification information on the condition that it is determined by the group corresponding store determination means that it is the store identification information of the store belonging to the group Integrated reception page transmitting means (control unit) for transmitting an integrated reception page for receiving input of the second member specifying information capable of specifying information to the information terminal 52) and corresponding to the integration target member identification information identified from the received second member identification information based on the reception of the second member identification information input on the integration reception page from the information terminal The same group store determination means (control unit 52) for determining whether or not the store identification information of the store is the store identification information of the same group store belonging to the group of stores corresponding to the integration source member identification information; Performing member identification information association processing for associating the integration source member identification information and the integration target member identification information on condition that the same group store determination means determines that the store identification information is the same group store. The member identification information association processing means (control unit 52) and the number of points corresponding to each member identification information associated by the member identification information association processing are added together. Point summing means (control section 52), and point use processing means (control section 52) for performing processing for allowing the member to use the summed point number summed by the point summing means to enjoy a predetermined service. And a point management device.

  The invention according to claim 6 is the point management device (50) according to claim 5, wherein the information includes the second member specifying information (member card ID) from the information terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7). Login member identification information (login ID) which is member identification information (member card ID) specified from the second member specifying information included in the received information disclosure request based on the reception of the disclosure request (login request) The same member determination means (control unit 52) for determining whether or not there is member identification information associated with the login member identification information, provided that the same member determination means determines that there is no member identification information. On condition that the member-dedicated page dedicated to the member including at least the corresponding number of points is transmitted to the information terminal and is determined to be present by the same member determining means. And a member-dedicated page transmission unit (control unit 52) for transmitting the member-dedicated page including at least the total number of points combined by the point summation unit (control unit 52) to the information terminal. Is a point management device characterized by the above.

  The invention according to claim 7 is the point management device (50) according to claim 5 or 6, wherein an e-mail address of a member who performs the registration operation in response to the second registration request is the information terminal. (PC6, mobile phone 7) e-mail address acquisition means (control unit 52) acquired from the e-mail address acquisition means, the second member identification included in the received second registration request Member management means (point member information DB) for managing in association with member identification information (member card ID) specified from the information, and notification contents (questionnaire information, event information, winning information) notified to the member, , Information that can identify the member identification information of the member to be notified (attribute information of questionnaire target member, attribute information of event target member, member car of the winning member ID) is set as notification information setting means (display 54 and input device 55, transfer device communication unit 51b, control unit 52), and the notification target member specified from the information set by the notification information setting means An e-mail address extracting unit (control unit 52) that extracts an e-mail address managed by the member management unit in association with identification information, and a notification for providing the notification content set by the notification information setting unit From the store terminal (card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30) to the first e-mail transmitting means (control unit 52) for transmitting an e-mail including information to the e-mail address extracted by the e-mail address extracting means Based on the receipt of the confirmation request (login request) including the member identification information, the first confirmation request included in the received confirmation request Notification target determining means (control unit 52) for determining whether or not the member identification information specified from the member specifying information is the member identification information to be notified specified from the information set by the notification information setting means; And a notification information return means (control unit 52) for returning the notification information to the store terminal on the condition that the notification target determination means determines that the identification information is member identification information to be notified. This is a point management device characterized by that.

  Furthermore, the invention according to claim 8 is the point management device (50) according to claim 7, wherein the confirmation request (login request) is received from the store terminal (card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30). Based on the member identification information (member card ID) identified from the first member identification information included in the received confirmation request, the member management means (point member information DB) manages the email address. An e-mail address management determination unit (control unit 52) for determining whether or not the notification information reply unit (control unit 52) manages the e-mail address by the e-mail address management determination unit. The point management apparatus is characterized in that the notification information is not returned to the store terminal on the condition that it is determined as follows.

  First, according to the point management system according to claim 1, when the second registration request is transmitted from the information terminal possessed by the member in the point management device, the member identification information is registered and installed in the store. Even if the first registration request is transmitted from the store terminal, the member identification information is registered. Therefore, even a store member who does not own the information terminal or a store member who is not good at operating the information terminal can be a point member. Member identification information can be registered, giving all store members an opportunity to enjoy the benefits of a point member fairly. Also, in the point management device, the number of points is added only to the same group store set by the group setting means, and the member can use the added number of points. Totals can be used to improve customer attraction at group stores.

  According to the point management system of claim 2, in the point management device, the member identification information identified from the second member identification information included in the received information disclosure request is any of the associated member identification information. Even so, since the member-dedicated page dedicated to the member is transmitted, the convenience of the member can be improved.

  Further, according to the point management system according to claim 3, in the point management device, notification information can be quickly notified by e-mail to the point member who has registered from the information terminal, and from the store terminal. Notification can be sent back to the store terminal even for point members who have registered and whose e-mail address is not registered.

  According to the point management system according to claim 4, in the point management device, notification information is not returned to the store terminal for the point member whose email address is registered. Useless duplicate transmission of the notification information to the receiving point member is prevented.

  Further, according to the point management device of the fifth aspect, when the second registration request is transmitted from the information terminal possessed by the member, the member identification information is registered and the first from the store terminal installed in the store. Even if a registration request is sent, member identification information is registered, so even if a store member does not own an information terminal or a store member who is not good at operating information terminals, register the member identification information as a point member As a result, it is possible to give all store members the opportunity to enjoy the benefits of a point member fairly. In addition, since the point number is added only to the same group store set as a group by the group setting means and the member can use the combined point number, the total of the point number is added to the group store. It can be used to improve customer attraction.

  Further, according to the point management device according to claim 6, regardless of the associated member identification information, the member identification information identified from the second member identification information included in the received information disclosure request is Since the member-dedicated page dedicated to the member is transmitted, the convenience of the member can be improved.

  In addition, according to the point management apparatus according to claim 7, to the point member who has registered from the information terminal, the notification information can be quickly notified by e-mail, and the e-mail is registered from the store terminal. Notification can be sent back to the store terminal even for point members whose addresses are not registered.

  Furthermore, according to the point management device according to claim 8, since the notification information is not returned to the store terminal for the point member whose e-mail address is registered, the point member who has already received the notification information by e-mail This prevents unnecessary redundant transmission of the notification information.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, the point management device 50 according to the present invention sends a registration request including recording information of a recording medium (member card) issued to a member who has registered as a member at each store (game hall). A member that can be individually identified by the member received from the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30) operated by the member and specified from the recording information of the recording medium included in the registration request Identification information (member card ID) is registered as a point member, and in particular includes first member specifying information that is magnetically or electrically recorded on the recording medium and that can specify the member identification information. Based on the reception of the registration request from the store terminal (card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30) as the operation terminal, the first member specifying information included in the received first registration request. The second registration request including the second member specifying information that can be specified by the member identification information that can be specified visually and recorded on the recording medium is recorded on the operation terminal. The member identification information specified from the second member specifying information included in the received second registration request is registered based on the information received from a certain information terminal (PC6, mobile phone 7). The point management device 50 manages the number of points owned by the member of the member identification information in association with the registered member identification information.

  In addition, the point management device 50 responds to the received store information request based on having received a store information request (registration request A) including store specifying information (member card ID) that can specify a store from the operation terminal. Store information (event information) related to the store specified from the included store specifying information is provided to the operation terminal, and particularly as shown in D112 or D114 of FIG. 4 and D213 or D216 of FIG. When a store belongs to a preset group, group store information capable of recognizing other stores (group stores) belonging to the group is provided to the operation terminal.

  In addition, the point management device 50 adds a member identification information association process for associating a plurality of the member identification information and a point number corresponding to each member identification information associated by the member identification information association process. The summation process is performed as a member integration process, and a process for allowing the member to use the summed number of points for enjoying a predetermined service is performed, particularly corresponding to each member identification information. The member identification information association processing is performed only when the stores are the same group store.

  Furthermore, the point management device 50 is associated with the registered member identification information when a new recording medium is reissued instead of the recording medium on which the registered member identification information is already registered. The new member identification information recorded on the new recording medium is received, and in particular, a handover request including the new member identification information together with the registered member identification information is received from the operation terminal. Based on the above, the handover process is performed.

  In the point management device 50 and the point management system 1 including the point management device 50, the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 to 47 and the first embodiment are members as shown in FIGS. The second embodiment differs in the integration process and the handover process. Here, regarding the member integration processing, in the first embodiment, the member integration processing is performed on the condition that all the membership card IDs to be integrated have already been registered as point members. Member integration processing is performed on the condition that one of the membership card IDs to be registered has already been registered as a point member. Regarding the takeover process, in the first embodiment, the takeover process is performed on the condition that the new member card ID of the takeover destination is not registered as a point member. In the second embodiment, the new member card ID of the takeover destination is changed. The takeover process is performed regardless of whether or not it is registered as a point member.

  In the following, the point management system 1 including the point management device 50 according to the first embodiment will be described first, and then the point management system 1 including the point management device 50 according to the second embodiment will be described with respect to the first embodiment. Only the different points will be described, and finally a modified example will be described.

  In the following, as shown in FIG. 1, an example will be described in which a store is a game arcade and transaction processing at the store is ball lending processing. Here, the game hall includes a plurality of first game halls (game hall A, game hall B,...) And a plurality of second game halls (game hall X, game hall Y,...). The venue is identified by a store ID, which is store identification information capable of individually identifying each game hall (store). The store ID here is an alphabet assigned to each game hall. For example, in the case of a game hall A (also referred to as “A store”), “A” and game hall X (also referred to as “X store”). If so, it is “X”. In addition, the number of 1st game halls and 2nd game halls is not specifically limited.

  In the following, the reader / writer is abbreviated as “R / W”, the database as “DB”, and the step as “S”. Further, in the following, in the point member information DB shown in FIG. 23A described later, the member card ID, password, and attribute information (at least gender and date of birth) are registered as point members. It is referred to as “already registered (or registered)”, and the fact that they are not registered is referred to as “unregistered”.

[1. Point management system 1 including point management apparatus 50 according to the first embodiment]
First, the configuration of the point management system 1 including the point management apparatus 50 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 1, the point management system 1 includes a card unit 20 provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 in the first game hall (A, B,...), And a kiosk terminal installed in the first game hall. 30, a system management device 40 that is installed in the first game hall and can communicate with the card unit 20, a first member management device 100 that can communicate with the card unit 20 and the system management device 40, and a second game hall (X , Y,...), A card unit 20 provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 10, a kiosk terminal 30 installed in the second game hall, and a system management installed in the second game hall and capable of communicating with the card unit 20. The device 40 is installed in a card company outside the game hall, and is connected to the system management device 40 of each first game hall, the system management device 40 of each second game hall, and the transfer device 70. And Shin possible point management device 50 consists.

  The point management device 50 includes a personal computer (PC) 6 and a mobile phone 7 which are information terminals owned by a member, a card unit 20 and a kiosk terminal 30 which are store terminals installed in a game hall, and the Internet. Communication is possible. The information terminal and the store terminal are also operation terminals that can be operated by a member (that is, an owner of a membership card that is a recording medium). The point management device 50 can also communicate with an encoding information management device 60 installed in the member card encoding mechanism. A second member management device 200 capable of communicating with the card unit 20 is installed in the second game hall.

  The card company that operates the point management system 1 can identify the value of the valuable value for gaming that can be used for gaming (value of first member card ID, remaining card amount, second member card ID, remaining card amount). Is an organization that manages the recording medium (the first member card 4 and the second member card 5). The card company which is the operating organization of the point management system 1 is the first member game registered as a member in the first game hall (A, B,...) As a member of the member management system (first system) operated by the card company. The first member player specifying information (first member ID) for individually specifying the first member player in the card company, and the valuable value specifying information (first member card ID). , Card balance) recorded on the first recording medium (first member card 4), and another member management system (second system) operated by an operating organization (other company) different from the point management system 1 Other members for the purpose of individually identifying the second member player at the operating organization of the other member management system. System member player identification information (other system member ID) and information for individually identifying the second recording medium (second member card 5) in the operating organization of the point management system 1, and the valuable value It is an organization that operates the point management system 1 that manages the second recording medium in which the second recording medium identification information (second member card ID, card balance) that is the specific information is recorded.

  Here, the card unit 20, the kiosk terminal 30, the system management device 40, and the first member management device 100 installed in the first game hall, the card unit 20, the kiosk terminal 30 installed in the second game hall, and The system management device 40, the transfer device 70 installed in the management center, the point management device 50 installed in the card company, and the encoding information management device 60 installed in the member card encoding mechanism are the point management system 1 and members. It is installed and managed by a card company which is an operating organization that operates a management system (first system). On the other hand, the second member management device 200 installed in the second game hall is installed and managed by another company (not shown) that is an operating organization that operates a member management system (second system) different from the point management system 1. Is.

  In this point management system 1, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 8, a bill 2, a coin 3, a first member card 4, a second member card 5, a PC 6, and a mobile phone 7 are used. Hereinafter, when the first member card 4 and the second member card 5 are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as “member cards”.

  The banknote 2 is an example of money, and here, as shown in FIG. 8B, four types of 1000 yen banknote, 2000 yen banknote, 5000 yen banknote, and 10000 yen banknote are used. The coin 3 is also an example of money, and here, two types of coins, 500 yen coins and 100 yen coins, are used. However, when the membership card is accepted in the card unit 20 (that is, when the deposit processing described later is performed), all denominations of money can be used, but the membership card is not accepted in the card unit 20. When the visitor ball lending process described later is performed, only 1000 yen bills, 500 yen coins, and 100 yen coins can be used.

  The first member card 4 is an example of a recording medium, and as shown in FIG. 2 (a), can be used for transaction processing (here, ball rental processing) at a store (here, a game hall), Recording medium identification information (first member card ID) capable of individually identifying the recording medium is recorded. The first member card 4 as a recording medium is issued to a member who has registered as a store member at each store (here, the first amusement hall), and member identification information (first record) for identifying the member individually. First member specifying information (first member card ID and first member ID) that can specify a member card ID) is magnetically or electrically recorded, and second member specifying information that can specify the member identification information (First member card ID and first member ID) are recorded so as to be visible. Furthermore, the first member card 4 is an example of a first recording medium, and is a member of a member management system (here, the first system) operated by the same operating organization (here, a card company) as the point management system 1. A first member issued to a first member player who has registered as a member in one amusement hall (A, B,...), And for individually identifying the first member player at the operating organization of the point management system 1 Player identification information (first member ID) and valuable value identification information (here, the first member card ID) that can specify the magnitude of the valuable value for gaming (here, the remaining card amount) that can be used for gaming on the gaming machine , Card balance).

  The first member card 4 is a rectangular thin plastic plate, and the first member card ID and the first member ID, which are second member identification information, are recorded in a display area 4a formed on the surface so as to be visible. The first member card ID, which is the first member identification information, and the first member ID and the remaining amount of the card are electrically recorded on the IC chip 4b mounted inside (printed here). This is an IC / magnetic hybrid card in which the first member ID, which is the first member identification information, is magnetically recorded by the magnetic stripe 4c formed in the above.

  Here, the first member ID is issued to the first amusement hall where the member management system (first system) operated by the card company is introduced, as shown in FIG. A combination of a number (here, a three-digit number in the 100s) and a number (here, a unique five-digit number) for individually identifying the first member player registered as a member at the first game hall It is ID which consists of. In the first game hall and the card company, the first member player can be individually specified by the first member ID.

  The first member card ID is the store ID (A, B,...) Of the first game hall that issued the first member card 4 and the first member player registered as a member at the first game hall. It is an ID consisting of a combination of numbers for identification (here, unique five-digit numbers). That is, since the store ID of the store that issued the first member card 4 is included in the predetermined location (here, the first character) of the first member card ID, the first member card ID can identify the store. Information. This first member card ID is used to individually identify the first recording medium (first member card 4) and the member possessing the first recording medium in the card company that is the operating organization of the point management system 1. Acts as information. Further, since the first member card ID is managed in the balance management DB (FIG. 13A) of the system management device 40 in association with the card balance, which is the magnitude of the game value, the value of the game value is recorded. It acts as valuable value specifying information whose size can be specified.

  The first member card ID and the first member ID are managed in a one-to-one correspondence in the point management device 50 as shown in the encoding information DB of FIG. 24 (a). The first member card ID can be specified from the one member ID. That is, the first member card ID and the first member ID are the first member specifying information and the second member specifying information that can specify the first member card ID that is the member identification information, and are the information terminal such as the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7. , The first member card ID recorded in the display area 4a as the second member specifying information is input, and in the card unit 20 which is a store terminal, the first member specifying information is recorded in the IC chip 4b. The first member card ID is read, and the first member card ID recorded in the display area 4a is input as the second member specifying information. In the kiosk terminal 30 which is a store terminal, the first member card ID is magnetic as the first member specifying information. The first member ID recorded in the stripe 4c is read.

  Note that the remaining card amount recorded in the first member card 4 is the magnitude of the game valuable value that can be used for the game, and is also valuable value specifying information that can specify the remaining card amount itself. That is, the first member card ID and the remaining card amount stored in the first member card 4 are valuable value specifying information.

  The first membership card 4 is issued as follows. First, the first member management apparatus 100 accepts the personal identification number desired by the player and the player's attribute information (here, name, address, gender, date of birth, and e-mail address) and performs membership registration. The first member ID recorded in advance on the first member card 4 is read from one of the first member cards 4 delivered to the first game hall from the card company, and the read The first member ID and the accepted personal identification number and attribute information are stored in association with a first member information DB shown in FIG. 13B described later, and transmitted to the point management device 50. The first member card 4 is issued to the player. The personal identification number transmitted to the point management device 50 is stored in the encoding information DB shown in FIG. 24A described later in association with the first member ID and the first member card ID. (Name, address, gender, date of birth, and e-mail address) are discarded without being specifically used.

  If the member loses or damages the first member card 4, a new first member card 4 (new member card) is reissued instead of the first member card 4 (old member card). In this case, first, the store clerk of the amusement hall searches the first member information DB (FIG. 13B) of the first member management apparatus 100, and the first member of the old member card corresponding to the attribute information of the member. The ID is specified, and the specified first member ID is transmitted to the card company. Next, the operator of the card company that has received the first member ID searches the encoding information DB (FIG. 24A) of the point management device 50 and searches for the first of the old member card corresponding to the first member ID. The member card ID is specified, and the specified first member card ID is returned to the game hall. Then, the store clerk who has received the first member card ID hands over a piece of paper describing the first member card ID to the member. The first member card ID of the old member card written on this piece of paper is the card unit 20 when the member transmits a takeover request from the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30 as shown in D221 of FIG. Alternatively, it is input at the kiosk terminal 30.

  The second member card 5 is also an example of a recording medium, and as shown in FIG. 2 (b), can be used for transaction processing (here, ball rental processing) at a store (here, a game hall), Recording medium identification information (second member card ID) capable of individually identifying the recording medium is recorded. The second member card 5 as a recording medium is issued to a member registered as a store member at each store (here, the second amusement hall), and member identification information (second First member specifying information (second member card ID and other system member ID) that can specify a member card ID) is magnetically or electrically recorded, and second member specifying information that can specify the member identification information (Second member card ID and other system member ID) are recorded so as to be visible. Furthermore, the second member card 5 is an example of a second recording medium, and is a second member as a member of another member management system (second system) operated by an operating organization (here, another company) different from the point management system 1. Other issued for the second member player registered as a member in the game hall (game hall X, Y,...) And for individually identifying the second member player in the operating organization of the other member management system. System member player specifying information (other system member ID) and information for individually identifying the second recording medium in the operating organization of the point management system 1, and the second recording medium which is the valuable value specifying information Identification information (second member card ID, remaining card amount) is recorded.

  The second member card 5 is a thin plastic plate having a rectangular shape, and the second member card ID and the other system member ID, which are the second member identification information, are recorded in a display area 5a formed on the surface so as to be visible. The IC chip 5b mounted on the inside electrically records the second member card ID, which is the first member identification information, the other system member ID, and the card balance, and the magnetic formed on the upper part. This is an IC / magnetic hybrid card in which the other system member ID which is the first member specifying information is magnetically recorded by the stripe 5c.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 24 (a) and the like described later, the other system member ID is for the second game hall in which a member management system (second system) operated by another company different from the card company is introduced. A number indicating that it has been issued (here, a three-digit number in the 200s) and a number for uniquely identifying the second member player registered as a member at the second game hall (here, a unique five-digit number) ID) consisting of a combination of numbers. In the second game hall and the other companies, the second member players can be individually specified by the other system member ID.

  In addition, the second member card ID includes the store ID (X, Y,...) Of the second game hall that issued the second member card 5 and the second member player registered as a member at the second game hall. It is an ID consisting of a combination of numbers for identification (here, unique five-digit numbers). That is, since the store ID of the store that issued the second member card 5 is included in the predetermined location (here, the first character) of the second member card ID, the second member card ID can specify the store. Information. This second member card ID is used to individually identify the second recording medium (second member card 5) and the member possessing the second recording medium in the card company that is the operating organization of the point management system 1. Acts as information. Further, since the second membership card ID is managed in the balance management DB (FIG. 13A) of the system management device 40 in association with the card balance, which is the magnitude of the game value, the game value of the game is stored. It acts as valuable value specifying information whose size can be specified.

  These second member card IDs and other system member IDs are managed in a one-to-one correspondence by the point management device 50 as shown in the encoding information DB of FIG. 24 (a). The second member card ID can be specified from the system member ID. That is, the second member card ID and the other system member ID are the first member specifying information and the second member specifying information that can specify the second member card ID that is the member identification information, and are the information terminal such as the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7. , The second member card ID recorded in the display area 5a as the second member specifying information and the last four digits of the other system member ID are input, and the card unit 20 as the store terminal receives the first member specifying information. The second member card ID recorded in the IC chip 5b is read, and the last four digits of the second member card ID and other system member ID recorded in the display area 5a are input as the second member specifying information. In the kiosk terminal 30 which is a store terminal, the other system member ID recorded in the magnetic stripe 5c is read as the first member specifying information. .

  Note that the remaining card amount recorded in the second member card 5 is the magnitude of the game valuable value that can be used for the game, and is also valuable value specifying information that can specify the remaining card amount itself. That is, since the second member card ID and the remaining card amount stored in the second member card 5 are both valuable value specifying information, the information of both the second member card ID and the remaining card amount is used as the information. The second recording medium identification information may be used.

  The second membership card 5 is issued as follows. First, when the second member management apparatus 200 receives the player's attribute information (here, the personal identification number, name, address, gender, date of birth, and e-mail address) and performs membership registration, The other system member ID recorded in advance on the second member card 5 is read from one of the second member cards 5 delivered to the two game halls, and the read other system member ID and the acceptance The attribute information thus obtained is stored in association with a second member information DB shown in FIG. 13C, which will be described later, and the second member card 5 is issued to the player.

  If the member loses or breaks the second member card 5, a new second member card 5 (new member card) is reissued in place of the second member card 5 (old member card). In this case, first, the store clerk of the amusement hall searches the second member information DB (FIG. 13C) of the second member management apparatus 200, and other system members other than the old member card corresponding to the member attribute information. The ID is specified, and the specified other system member ID is transmitted to the card company. Next, the operator of the card company that has received the other system member ID searches the encoding information DB (FIG. 24A) of the point management device 50, and stores the second old member card corresponding to the other system member ID. The member card ID is specified, and the specified second member card ID is returned to the game hall. Then, the store clerk who has received the second member card ID hands over a piece of paper describing the second member card ID to the member. The second member card ID of the old member card written on this piece of paper is the card unit 20 when the member transmits a takeover request from the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30 as shown in D221 of FIG. Alternatively, it is input at the kiosk terminal 30.

  As described above, the first member specifying information is magnetically or electrically recorded on the member card, and the second member specifying information is recorded on the member card so as to be visible. The first member specifying information and the second member specifying information are distinguished depending on how the information is recorded, and the information itself may be the same. In the following, when the first member card ID and the second member card ID are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as “member card ID” and the first member ID and the other system member ID are not distinguished. Is simply referred to as “member ID”.

  Returning to FIG. 1, the PC 6 and the mobile phone 7 are examples of an operation terminal operated by a member and an information terminal possessed by the member, and are generally provided with an e-mail transmission / reception function, an Internet connection function, and the like.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5, various requests and information transmitted from the PC 6 and the mobile phone 7 to the point management device 50 via the Internet will be described. Each of the screens shown in FIGS. 3 to 5 is a screen that is distributed from the point management device 50 and displayed on the display of the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7.

  Specifically, first, as shown in D101 of FIG. 3, the member of the store who has seen the poster regarding the registration of the point member posted in each store uses an operation key (not shown) provided on the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7. When an e-mail (a so-called empty mail in which no title or content is input here) is transmitted to the e-mail address posted on the poster as shown in D102, the e-mail is transmitted to the Internet. The point management device 50 sends an e-mail including the URL for initial screen access to the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7.

  In the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 that has received the e-mail, the contents of the e-mail are displayed on the display as shown in D103. In D103, when the member operates the operation key and clicks the displayed URL, an initial screen access request is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet, and the point management device 50 transmits the request. The initial screen shown in D104 is distributed to the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 and displayed on the display. In D104, “new registration” button, “member” button, “notice” button, and “site guidance” button are displayed as buttons for selecting a menu.

  In D104, when the member operates the operation key and operates the “notification” button, the fact that the operation has been performed is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet. A notification screen (not shown) showing a notification from the card company that operates the point management system 1 is distributed to the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 and displayed on the display. In D104, when the member operates the operation key and operates the “site guidance” button, the fact that the operation has been performed is transmitted to the point management apparatus 50 via the Internet, and the point management apparatus A site guidance screen (not shown) is distributed from 50 to the PC 6 or mobile phone 7 and displayed on the display. From this site guide screen, a URL for accessing each screen of terms of service, privacy policy, frequently asked questions, or inquiries is linked. When the URL is clicked, the point management device 50 causes the PC 6 Alternatively, the link destination screen is distributed to the mobile phone 7 and displayed on the display.

  In D104, when the member operates the operation key and operates the “new registration” button, the fact that the operation has been performed is transmitted to the point management apparatus 50 via the Internet, and the point management apparatus The screen shown in D110 of FIG. 4 is distributed from 50 to the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 and displayed on the display. In D110, a “first member card” button and a “second member card” button are displayed as buttons for selecting the type of member card to be registered as a point member.

  In D110, when the member who owns the first member card 4 operates the operation key and operates the “first member card” button, the fact that the operation has been performed is point management via the Internet. The screen is transmitted to the device 50, and the screen shown in D111 is distributed from the point management device 50 to the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 and displayed on the display. In D111, for the first member card 4 to be registered, an input field for a first member card ID and an initial password is displayed. Here, the initial password is registered when the first member card 4 is issued (that is, when the member is registered at the store) and stored in the first member information DB shown in FIG. Number.

  In D111, the member who owns the first member card 4 operates the operation key, and the first member card ID that is the second member specifying information displayed in the display area 4a of the first member card 4 is displayed. When the “register” button is operated by inputting the initial personal identification number, the input first member card ID is temporarily stored, and the first member card ID, which is the second member specifying information, And the second registration request A including the input initial password is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet, and is indicated by D112 from the point management device 50 to the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7. The screen is distributed and displayed on the display.

  In this D112, the stored first member card ID is displayed, and the personal identification number desired to be registered (may be different from the initial personal identification number) and the date of birth and gender as attribute information are input. A column is displayed, and an e-mail address that is a transmission source of the empty mail transmitted in D102 is displayed.

  In D112, the store (store A here) specified from the stored first member card ID belongs to the group (that is, the store ID of the store is registered in the group DB shown in FIG. 24B). The store name of the store and another group store belonging to the group (here, ◎◎ group) and located in the same area (for example, Tokyo) as the store (B store here) ) Is displayed to accept selection of a store for which store information (in this case, an e-mail including event information) is desired to be provided. Although not shown, when the store specified from the stored first member card ID does not belong to a group (that is, the store ID of the store is registered in the store DB shown in FIG. 24C). Is displayed in order to accept selection of a store for which provision of store information is desired.

  On the other hand, when the member who owns the second member card 5 operates the operation key and operates the “second member card” button in D110, the fact that the operation has been performed is indicated via the Internet. The screen is transmitted to the point management device 50, and the screen shown in D113 is distributed from the point management device 50 to the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 and displayed on the display. In D113, for the second member card 5 to be registered, a second member card ID and the last four digits input field of the other system member ID are displayed. The reason for requesting the last 4 digits instead of all the digits of the other system member ID is that the entry of all digits is difficult for the member and there is a high possibility that the entry will be wrong, but the last 4 digits coincide. This is because the probability of checking is quite low, and is sufficient as the number of digits to be checked.

  In D113, the member who owns the second member card 5 operates the operation key, and the second member card ID, which is the second member specifying information displayed in the display area 5a of the second member card 5, is displayed. When the last 4 digits of the other system member ID are input and the “Register” button is operated, the input second member card ID is temporarily stored and the second member specifying information is the second member. A second registration request A including the card ID and the last four digits of the entered other system member ID is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet, and the PC 6 or mobile phone is transmitted from the point management device 50 to the point management device 50. 7, the screen shown in D114 is distributed and displayed on the display.

  In this D114, the stored second member card ID is displayed, the password desired to be registered (may be different from the password registered when the second member card 5 is issued), and attributes The date of birth, which is information, and a gender input field are displayed, and the e-mail address which is the transmission source of the empty mail transmitted in D102 is displayed.

  In D114, the store (X store in this case) specified from the stored second member card ID belongs to the group (that is, the store ID of the store is registered in the group DB shown in FIG. 24B). The store name of the store, and another group store belonging to the group (here, ◎◎ group) and located in the same area (for example, Kanagawa Prefecture) as the store (here, C store) ) Is displayed to accept selection of a store for which store information (in this case, an e-mail including event information) is desired to be provided. Although not shown, when the store specified from the stored second member card ID does not belong to a group (that is, the store ID of the store is registered in the store DB shown in FIG. 24C). Is displayed in order to accept selection of a store for which provision of store information is desired.

  In D112 or D114, the member operates the operation key to input the personal identification number desired to be registered, the date of birth and the sex as attribute information, and among the displayed store names, When the check box corresponding to the store name desired to be provided is checked and the “Register” button is operated, the displayed member card ID (that is, the first member card ID or the second member card which is the second member specifying information) ID), the entered personal identification number and attribute information, the displayed e-mail address, and the store ID of the store corresponding to the checked check box (that is, the store ID of the store where store information is desired to be provided) Is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet. Here, the second registration request B is also reply information including information (store ID) that can specify a store for which store information is desired to be provided.

  Hereinafter, a combination of the second registration request A and the second registration request B is simply referred to as a “second registration request”. Here, the second registration request is a store information request including store specifying information (here, the first member card ID or the second member card ID) that can specify the store, and the e-mail address of the member and the store specifying information. Is a store information request including member identification information (here, the first member card ID or the second member card ID).

  The second registration requests A and B transmitted from the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 include the second member specifying information that the member inputs by visually observing the member card (the first member card 4 or the second member card 5). It is. The attribute information included in the second registration request B is not personal information that can identify an individual, such as a name, but is attribute information that cannot identify an individual, and here is sex and date of birth. In this way, by requesting registration of only attribute information that cannot identify an individual, a member who does not like registration of personal information can reduce resistance when registering as a point member, and the questionnaire and event information described later Can be effectively extracted from the point management device 50.

  Returning to FIG. 3, when the member operates the operation key and operates the “member” button in D104, the fact that the operation has been performed is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet. The log-in screen shown in D150 is distributed from the point management device 50 to the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 and displayed on the display. In D150, for the membership card registered as a point member, an entry field for the registered membership card ID and password is displayed.

  At D150, the point member operates the operation key to input the registered member card ID and the registered password displayed in the display area of the member card registered as the point member, ”Button, the entered membership card ID and password are temporarily stored, and a login request including the membership card ID and password is sent to the point management device 50 via the Internet. Sent. Here, the login request is a part of an information disclosure request described later, and is also a confirmation request. The member card ID (hereinafter referred to as “login ID”) included in this login request is any member card registered as a point member in the point member information DB shown in FIG. ID may be sufficient. Specifically, Mr. Taro XX can log in with any member card ID of A00001 or X00003.

  If the URL of the login screen is registered in the bookmark (favorite) in the state where the member card ID and the password are input on the login screen shown in D150 on the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7, the input member card The ID and PIN are stored in the cookie. When the registered bookmark is selected, the login screen of D150 is displayed with the membership card ID and password stored in the cookie being input. When the “login” button is operated, the login screen is displayed. A login request including the registered membership card ID (ie, login ID) and password is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet.

  The point management device 50 that has received the login request distributes the member-dedicated page shown in D151 to the PC 6 and the mobile phone 7 and displays them on the display. In D151, the login ID and the point associated with the login ID in the point member information DB shown in FIG. 23A to be described later are displayed, a “use point” button, and “update registered information”. Button, "Group store list" button, "Integrated registration" button, and "Transfer card" button are displayed, and the group store additional information display area, questionnaire display area, event information display area, and winning information display area are displayed. Is done. Here, the display contents of each display area will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In D151, when the point member operates the operation key and operates the “use point” button, a point use request is issued. When the “update registered information” button is operated, a registration information update request is issued, or “group store list” is displayed. When the “” button is operated, a group store list request is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet. The contents transmitted from the point management apparatus 50 in response to these requests and displayed will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In D151, when the point member operates the operation key and operates the “integrated registration” button, an integrated registration processing request is transmitted to the point management apparatus 50 via the Internet. The integrated reception page indicated by D160 to D161 in FIG. 5 is distributed to the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 and temporarily stored. First, the integrated reception page of D160 is displayed on the display.

  In D160, the group name of the group to which the store with the store ID specified from the login ID belongs is displayed, and among the group stores of the group, the store with the store ID specified from the login ID and the login ID Stores with store IDs identified from other registered member card IDs registered in association with (hereinafter referred to as “integrated stores”) are displayed as “stores that have already integrated points”, In addition, stores that are not registered in association with the login ID (hereinafter referred to as “unintegrated stores”) are displayed as “other stores capable of point integration”, and further accept integration of the unintegrated stores. The "Integrate" button is displayed. Thereby, since the point member can grasp at a glance the integrated store where the integration is completed and the unintegrated store where the integration is not completed, it becomes a judgment material when integrating. If the membership card IDs of all group stores are registered in association with the login ID, the unintegrated store and the “integrated” button are not displayed, and the message “all stores that can be integrated has been integrated” is displayed. Is displayed.

  Specifically, in the point member information DB shown in FIG. 23A described later, a member card ID of A00001 and a member card ID of X00003 are registered in association with each other for Mr. Taro XX. In the group DB shown in 24 (b), in the situation where A store, B store, C store, and X store are registered as ◎◎ groups, A00001 is input as the login ID on the login screen shown in D150 of FIG. When the “integrated registration” button is operated on the member-dedicated page shown in D151, the A store and the X store are displayed as the integrated stores as shown in D160 of FIG. Stores B and C are displayed as unintegrated stores.

  In D160, when the point member operates the operation key and operates the “integration” button, the temporarily stored integration reception page of D161 is displayed on the display. In D161, for each of the unintegrated stores, an input field for a member card ID registered as a point member and a password is displayed. In D161, the member operates the operation key, and the registered member card ID (in this case, B00777) displayed in the display area of the member card registered as a point member for one or a plurality of unintegrated stores. When the “integration” button is operated by inputting the personal identification number and the personal identification number, the integration including the inputted membership card ID and personal identification number together with the store ID of the unintegrated store (store B in this case) in which the membership card ID is inputted. The ID information is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet. Here, the store ID included in the integrated ID information is selection information that can identify the same group store (that is, an unintegrated store) selected on the integrated reception page.

  When member integration processing (that is, member identification information association processing and point summation processing) described later is performed in the point management device 50 that has received the integrated ID information, the point management device 50 sends the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 to the point management device 50. Then, the integrated registration completion screen shown in D162 is distributed and displayed on the display. In D162, the fact that the integrated registration has been completed and the points after integration are displayed.

  In the first embodiment, as described above, member integration processing is performed on condition that all member card IDs to be integrated are already registered member card IDs registered as point members. From the telephone 7, a member integration request including a plurality of member specifying information (here, the registered member card ID itself) that can specify each of a plurality of registered member card IDs is sent via the Internet to the point management device 50. Sent to. In this example, the login request including the registered member card ID (that is, the login ID) entered on the screen shown in D150 of FIG. 3 and the registered password, and the registered registration entered on the screen shown in D161 of FIG. A member integration request is a combination of the member card ID, the registered personal identification number, and the integrated ID information including the store ID of the unintegrated store. The member specifying information included in the member integration request transmitted from the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 is the second member specifying information input by the member by viewing the display area. The member integration request is also a summation request including a member card ID that is a plurality of recording medium identification information.

  Returning to FIG. 3, when the point member operates the operation key and operates the “hand over card” button in D 151, the hand over processing request is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet. The takeover screen shown in D170 of FIG. 5 is distributed from the point management device 50 to the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 and displayed on the display.

  In this D170, the stored login ID is displayed as a registered old member card ID (ie, a member card ID recorded on an old member card which is a lost or damaged member card) as a point takeover source. And the stored registered password is displayed, and the unregistered new membership card ID (that is, the membership card ID recorded in the reissued new membership card) as the transfer destination of the points. , And an initial password entry field is displayed.

  In D170, when the point member operates the operation key, inputs the new member card ID displayed in the display area of the new member card and the initial password, and operates the "takeover" button, in D170 The point management device 50 receives a takeover request including the displayed and input contents (that is, the registered old member card ID and registered password, and the unregistered new member card ID and initial password) via the Internet. Sent to. That is, from the PC 6 and the mobile phone 7, the old member card ID (hereinafter also referred to as “takeover source ID”) that is the registered member identification information and the new member card ID (hereinafter referred to as “takeover ID”) that is the new member identification information. The takeover request including the request is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet.

  Returning to FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 is an example of a gaming machine, and is provided corresponding to the card unit 20, and plays a game by driving a pachinko ball as a gaming medium into the gaming area. This is a so-called CR-type pachinko machine in which signals relating to the lending of pachinko balls are exchanged with the corresponding card unit 20 to perform ball lending processing (visitor ball lending processing and membership card ball lending processing described later). . The pachinko machine 10 is installed according to the model of the pachinko machine 10 and the like on a game island (not shown) arranged in the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (a), the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a game area, an upper plate, a lower plate, a launching handle, and the like on the front surface thereof, a remaining frequency indicator 14, a ball lending button 15, and a card return. 6 and 7, the game control board 11, the payout control board 12, the ball payout device 13 and the like are provided therein, and these components are shown in FIGS. 6 and 7. Are connected as shown.

  The game control board 11 controls the gaming state in the pachinko machine 10. The payout control board 12 is communicably connected to a ball lending communication unit 21b described later of the card unit 20 and controls communication between the pachinko machine 10 and the card unit 20. Thereby, when the ball lending process is performed, signals related to the lending of the pachinko balls are exchanged between the pachinko machine 10 and the card unit 20. The payout control board 12 is connected to the ball payout device 13 and controls the ball payout device 13. Further, the payout control board 12 is also connected to a remaining frequency indicator 14, a ball lending button 15, and a card return button 16. The ball payout device 13 pays out a pachinko ball lent to a player through ball lending processing and a pachinko ball (so-called prize ball) given to the player as a result of the game.

  The remaining number indicator 14 is recorded in the membership card (first membership card 4 in the first game hall, second membership card 5 in the second gaming hall) received by the card R / W 25 of the card unit 20. This is a display for displaying the remaining number corresponding to the remaining card amount. Here, the remaining frequency is the card remaining amount converted at a predetermined ratio (for example, 100 yen = 1 frequency). In this remaining frequency indicator 14, the remaining frequency is displayed by inputting a frequency display signal indicating the remaining frequency from the ball loan communication unit 21b.

  The ball lending button 15 is a button for accepting a ball lending operation for using the remaining card amount recorded on the member card accepted by the card R / W 25 of the card unit 20. When the ball lending button 15 is operated, a lending input signal is input to the ball lending communication unit 21b, and the unit control unit 22 of the card unit 20 detects that the ball lending button 15 is operated by detecting the input. recognize.

  The card return button 16 is for accepting a discharge operation for discharging the member card received by the card R / W 25 of the card unit 20 to the outside of the gaming apparatus. When the card return button 16 is operated, a return input signal is input to the ball lending communication unit 21b, and the unit control unit 22 of the card unit 20 detects that the card return button 16 is operated by detecting the input. The card R / W control unit 26 recognizes and controls the discharge of the member card accepted by the card R / W 25, and the member card is discharged from the card insertion slot 25a and returned to the player. .

  In the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko balls paid out from the ball payout device 13 are supplied to the upper plate, and are driven into the game area by operating the firing handle, thereby playing a game. Then, when the hit pachinko ball wins a winning opening formed in the game area, the pachinko ball is paid out from the ball payout device 13 as a prize ball based on a payout signal issued from the payout control board 12, Supplied to the upper or lower plate. Further, the pachinko machine 10 outputs game information such as a start signal indicating that the inserted pachinko ball has won a start winning opening and a big hit signal indicating that a big hit has occurred.

  Hereinafter, each component of the point management system 1 will be described.

  First, referring to FIGS. 6 to 8, each device (card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30, system management device 40, and first member management device 100) installed in the first game hall, and the second game hall Each device (card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30, system management device 40, and second member management device 200) installed in will be described.

  In the first game hall shown in FIG. 6, the card unit 20 is interactive with the system management device 40 and the first member management device 100 via a hub (not shown), a repeater (not shown), a communication cable, and the like. Each of the connected devices is assigned a local IP address to form a local area network (LAN). In addition, the system management device 40 and the first member management device 100 are connected via a separate communication cable so that relatively high-speed data communication can be performed.

  In the second game hall shown in FIG. 7, the card unit 20 is connected to both the system management device 40 and the second member management device 200 via a hub (not shown), a repeater (not shown), a communication cable, and the like. The local IP address is assigned to each connected device to form a local area network (LAN).

  The system management device 40 installed in the first game hall and the second game hall can perform two-way data communication with the transfer device 70 installed in the management center via a communication line (here, a dedicated line). In the management center, the transfer device 70 can grasp the sales by the first member card 4 in each first game hall, the error status of the system management device 40 and the card unit 20, and the like. ing.

  Next, the card unit 20 installed in the first game hall will be described. This card unit 20 is an example of a gaming device, and corresponds to the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall (here, adjacent to the left side of the pachinko machine 10) as shown in FIGS. 1 and 8A. A ball lending process (visitor ball lending process, membership card ball lending process) described later is performed. The card unit 20 is an example of an operation terminal operated by a member and a store terminal installed in the store. The card unit 20 can be individually identified by the device ID.

  The card unit 20 has a vertically long box shape. As shown in FIG. 8A, the card unit 20 has a bill insertion slot 23a, a coin insertion slot 24a, a coin return button 24b, a touch panel display on the front surface thereof. 27, a coin return port 24f, a card insertion port 25a, etc., as shown in FIG. 8 (b), a bill discriminator 23, a unit control unit 22, a member management device communication unit 21a, and a ball loan communication. A unit 21b, a coin discriminator 24, a card R / W 25, a card R / W control unit 26, etc. are provided, and these components are connected as shown in FIG.

  The member management device communication unit 21a is communicably connected to a unit communication unit 101a (to be described later) of the first member management device 100 via a hub (not shown), a repeater (not shown), a communication cable, and the like. And controls communication between the card unit 20 and the first member management apparatus 100. The first member ID read by the card R / W 25 is transmitted from the card unit 20 to the repeater, and the game transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the repeater in association with the first member ID. By transmitting information (big hit signal, start signal, etc.) to the first member management apparatus 100, the first member ID is assigned to the first member ID in the first member management apparatus 100 as shown in FIG. In association with each other, game information such as the number of jackpots and the number of start times of each first member player can be managed. The ball lending communication unit 21b is connected to the payout control board 12 of the pachinko machine 10 as described above.

  The unit control unit 22 includes a CPU, a RAM, a ROM, an EEPROM, and the like, and a processing program stored in the ROM (or EEPROM) is executed by the CPU using the RAM as a work area, so that the card unit 20 includes. Various operations are performed by controlling the operation of each component, and the function thereof will be described later. The device ID is stored in the EEPROM.

  The bill validator 23 is an example of money accepting means and accepts money. Here, as shown in FIG. 8B, the card R / W 25 does not accept the first member card 4, and In the state where the remaining card amount recorded on the first member card 4 received by the card R / W 25 is zero (that is, not in a state where the member card can be lent here), it is inserted from the bill insertion slot 23a and conveyed. A discriminator that accepts a bill 2 that has been received and identifies which of the four types of bill is the accepted bill 2 (which is not a regular bill unless it is any bill). is there.

  By this identification, if the accepted banknote is a regular banknote 2 (1000 yen banknote, 2000 yen banknote, 5000 yen banknote, 10000 yen banknote), the identification result (payment amount corresponding to the identified banknote 2) is unit controlled. To the unit 22. In addition, the legitimate banknote 2 that has been identified is discharged from the back of the card unit 20 through the banknote passage 23b, and is transported by a banknote transport mechanism (not shown) provided on the game island, and stored in a safe (not shown). To be recovered. In addition, when it identifies that it is not a regular banknote, the accepted banknote 2 is returned from the banknote insertion port 23a.

  The coin discriminator 24 is also an example of a currency accepting unit, and accepts currency. Here, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), the card R / W 25 does not accept the first member card 4, and When the remaining card amount recorded on the first member card 4 accepted by the card R / W 25 is zero (that is, not in a state where the member card can be lent), The coin 3 conveyed through the passage 24b is received, and the received coin 3 is identified as one of the two types of coins (if it is not any coin, it is identified as not a regular coin). ) Identification machine.

  With this identification, if the accepted coin is a regular coin 3 (100 yen coin, 500 yen coin), an identification result (payment amount corresponding to the identified coin 3) is output to the unit controller 22. The regular coin 3 that has been identified is discharged from the back of the card unit 20 to the outside through the coin passage 24c, and is transported by a coin transport mechanism (not shown) provided on the amusement island to a safe (not shown). To be recovered. The coin return button 24e is a button for accepting a return operation of the coin 3 jammed in the coin passage 24b or the coin discriminator 24, and when the coin return button 24e is operated by the player, the jammed coin 3 becomes a coin. It returns to the coin return port 24f through the passage 24d. In addition, when it identifies that it is not a regular coin, the received coin 3 is returned from the coin return port 24f through the coin channel | path 24d.

  The card R / W 25 is an example of a recording medium accepting unit, and accepts a recording medium (here, the first member card 4 issued at its own store) and identifies the first member recorded on the accepted recording medium. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), the first member card 4 inserted from the card insertion slot 25a is received and recorded on the IC chip 4b of the first member card 4. The first member card ID, the first member ID, and the remaining amount of the card, which are the first member specifying information, are used for the member card ball lending process based on the fact that the member card ball lending process has been performed. The remaining card amount after subtracting the usage amount is recorded (written) on the first member card 4. The card R / W 25 includes an IC chip R / W corresponding to the first member card 4.

  The card R / W control unit 26 includes a communication unit that performs data transmission / reception with the first member card 4 received by the card R / W 25, a controller that controls the card R / W 25, and the like. As shown in FIG. 6, the card R / W control unit 26 is connected to the unit control unit 22, and can transmit and receive various data to and from the unit control unit 22.

  The card R / W control unit 26 includes a system management device communication unit 26a. The system management device communication unit 26a is connected to the unit communication unit 41a of the system management device 40 via a hub, a repeater, a communication cable, and the like, and performs data communication between the card unit 20 and the system management device 40. Implementation is possible. The information transmitted from the card R / W control unit 26 includes a device ID stored in the EEPROM of the unit control unit 22 so that the transmission source of the information can be specified.

  Here, when the first member card ID and the remaining card amount are read from the first member card 4 by the card R / W 25, the system management device communication unit 26a reads the first member card ID as shown in FIG. A license request including a 1 member card ID and a remaining card amount is transmitted to the system management device 40 (S32), and a verification result of the first member card ID and the remaining card amount is received from the system management device 40. is there.

  Further, when the visitor ball lending process is performed by the unit control unit 22, the system management device communication unit 26 a uses the amount used for the visitor ball lending process (that is, the amount of money received here) as the system. This is transmitted to the management device 40. The amount transmitted here (the amount used for the visitor ball lending process) is managed by the system management device 40 in association with each device ID.

  Further, when the membership card ball lending process is performed by the unit control unit 22, the system management device communication unit 26a, as shown in FIG. 15 described later, reads the read first member card ID and the member card ball lending. The usage amount, which is the remaining amount of the card used for processing, is transmitted to the system management device 40 (S52).

  When the depositing process is performed by the unit control unit 22, the system management apparatus communication unit 26a, as shown in FIG. 14 to be described later, receives the read first member card ID and the deposit provided for the depositing process. The amount is sent to the system management device 40 (S12).

  The touch panel type display 27 protrudes from the front surface of the card unit 20 and has a message display area 27a for displaying various information and various inputs so as to be suitable for a player playing a game with the corresponding pachinko machine 10. And an operation key display area 27b for operating an operation key that accepts. In the message display area 27a of the display 27, although not shown, the first member management is associated with the first member ID of the first member card 4 while the card R / W 25 accepts the first member card 4. Even if the game information (individual game information) managed by the device 100 can be browsed and the card R / W 25 does not accept the first member card 4, game information other than personal game information or television The image can be viewed.

  Here, the function of the unit controller 22 will be described. First, the unit controller 22 performs visitor ball lending processing using the deposit amount. Specifically, the bill 2 or the coin 3 is received by the bill discriminator 23 or the coin discriminator 24 in a state where the first member card 4 is not received by the card R / W 25, and the money that has been received and identified. Is less than a predetermined amount (here, 1000 yen), the deposit amount is stored in the RAM of the unit control unit 22 as a deposit balance, and a signal related to pachinko ball lending with the pachinko machine 10 is stored. The exchange is performed, and a process of paying out pachinko balls corresponding to the deposit amount from the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Thereby, even a visitor player who does not own the first member card 4 can receive a pachinko ball and play a game with the pachinko machine 10.

  The unit control unit 22 performs membership card ball lending processing using the remaining card amount. Specifically, when the membership card use permission information is received, the membership card can be lent and the ball rental button 15 is operated to input a lending input signal, which is recorded on the first membership card 4. Comparing the remaining card amount with a preset ball lending amount (for example, 500 yen), and if the remaining card amount is equal to or more than the ball lending set amount, the payout control board pays out the pachinko balls corresponding to the ball lending set amount. 12, the payout control board 12 performs the payout of the pachinko balls for the number of times indicated by the ball payout device 13. On the other hand, if the card remaining amount is less than the ball lending set amount, the payout control board 12 is instructed to pay out the pachinko balls having a frequency corresponding to the card remaining amount, and the payout control board 12 has the number of pachinko balls corresponding to the instructed frequency. The payout is performed by the ball payout device 13.

  The unit control unit 22 performs a deposit process for the first member card 4. Specifically, when the banknote 2 or the coin 3 is received by the banknote discriminator 23 or the coin discriminator 24 in a state where the first member card 4 having a card balance of zero is received by the card R / W 25, A process of recording the received and identified money amount on the first member card 4 by the card R / W control unit 26 and the card R / W 25 as a remaining card amount is performed.

  Furthermore, the unit control unit 22 includes a card R / W control unit 26 and a system management device communication unit 26a of the card unit 20, a unit communication unit 41a, a control unit 42, and an external communication described later of the system management device 40. The unit 41d functions as a transmission means for transmitting various requests and information to the point management device 50 via the Internet (hereinafter simply referred to as “via the Internet”). Here, various requests and information transmitted from the unit control unit 22 functioning as the transmission unit will be described with reference to FIGS. Each screen shown in FIGS. 9 to 11 is distributed from the point management device 50 except for D201, and is displayed in the menu display area 27a of the display 27 (hereinafter simply referred to as “displayed on the display”). ) Screen.

  First, on the display 27 of the card unit 20, an initial screen shown in D201 of FIG. In D201, a message that prompts a member who wishes to newly register and a point member to insert a membership card is displayed, and “notification” button, “site guidance” button, And a “member card ID manual input” button is displayed.

  The “notification” button shown in D201 functions in the same manner as the button shown in D104 of FIG. 3. When the “notification” button is operated, the fact that the operation has been performed is indicated via the Internet. The notification screen (not shown) is distributed from the point management device 50 to the card unit 20 and displayed on the display. Also, the “site guidance” button shown in D201 functions in the same manner as the button shown in D104 of FIG. 3. When the “site guidance” button is operated, the fact that the operation has been performed is indicated on the Internet. The site guide screen (not shown) is distributed from the point management device 50 to the card unit 20 and displayed on the display.

  In D201, when the member operates the operation key displayed in the operation key display area 27b (hereinafter simply referred to as “operating the operation key”) and operates the “member card ID manual input” button, The fact that the operation has been performed is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet, and the screen shown in D202 is distributed from the point management device 50 to the card unit 20 and displayed on the display. The In D202, a member card ID input field is displayed.

  In D202, the member who owns the member card (here, the first member card 4) operates the operation key, and the member card ID which is the second member specifying information displayed in the display area of the member card When the “send” button is operated by inputting (here, the first member card ID), a registration confirmation request including the input member card ID is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet. . On the other hand, when the member inserts the member card into the card R / W 25 while the screen of D202 is displayed, the member card ID (here, the first member identification information) read from the IC chip of the member card. A registration confirmation request including the membership card ID) is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet.

  In the point management device 50 that has received the registration confirmation request, it is determined whether or not the membership card ID included in the registration confirmation request is registered in the point member information DB shown in FIG. Whether or not it is stored in the storage column of the member card ID shown) is determined, and if it is determined that it is not registered, the screen shown in D210 of FIG. 9 is distributed from the point management device 50 to the card unit 20 and displayed on the display.

  In D210, an unregistered member card ID included in the registration confirmation request is displayed, and a “new registration” button and a “card takeover” button are displayed.

  In D210, when the member operates the operation key and operates the “new registration” button, the displayed unregistered member card ID is temporarily stored, and the fact that the operation has been performed, The screen shown in D211 is distributed to the card management unit 50 transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet and installed in the first game hall from the point management device 50, and displayed on the display. The In D211, the stored member card ID (that is, the first member card ID) is displayed, and an input field for an initial password is displayed.

  In D211, when the member operates the operation key, inputs the initial password and operates the “Register” button, the first member card ID displayed and the first password including the input initial password are displayed. The registration request A is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet, and the screens shown in D212 to D213 are distributed from the point management device 50 to the card unit 20 and temporarily stored. First, the screen of D212 is displayed on the display.

  In this D212, the stored first member card ID is displayed, and the password desired to be registered (may be different from the initial password) and the date of birth and gender as attribute information are input. A column is displayed, and “Enter” button and “Omit” button are displayed as buttons for selecting whether to input or omit the e-mail address.

  In D212, when the member operates the operation key to input the personal identification number desired to be registered, the date of birth and sex as attribute information, and operates the “Omit” button, the first displayed A first registration request B including the member card ID and the input password and attribute information is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet.

  On the other hand, in D212, when the member operates the operation key to input the personal identification number desired to be registered, the date of birth and the sex as attribute information, and operates the “enter” button, the information is stored. The screen of D213 is displayed on the display. In D213, the stored first member card ID, the personal identification number desired to be registered entered in D212, and the date of birth and gender as attribute information are displayed, and an e-mail address is input. A column is displayed.

  In D213, the store (store A here) specified from the stored first member card ID belongs to the group (that is, the store ID of the store is registered in the group DB shown in FIG. 24B). The store name of the store and another group store belonging to the group (here, ◎◎ group) and located in the same area (for example, Tokyo) as the store (B store here) ) Is displayed to accept selection of a store for which store information (in this case, an e-mail including event information) is desired to be provided. Although not shown, when the store specified from the stored first member card ID does not belong to a group (that is, the store ID of the store is registered in the store DB shown in FIG. 24C). Is displayed in order to accept selection of a store for which provision of store information is desired.

  In D213, the member operates the operation key, inputs an e-mail address, and checks the check box corresponding to the store name for which store information is desired to be provided among the displayed store names. When the “Register” button is operated, the displayed first member card ID, personal identification number, and attribute information, the input e-mail address, and the store ID of the store corresponding to the checked check box (that is, the store information) The first registration request B including the store ID of the store that is desired to be provided is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet. Here, the first registration request B is also reply information including information (store ID) that can specify a store for which store information is desired to be provided.

  That is, the first registration request B includes at least first member specifying information (member card ID), a password to be registered, and member attribute information (gender and date of birth). It further includes an address and a store ID of a store that wishes to provide store information. Hereinafter, a combination of the first registration request A and the first registration request B is simply referred to as a “first registration request”. Here, the first registration request is a store information request including store specifying information (here, a member card ID) that can specify a store, and member identification information (member card ID) as a member's e-mail address and store specifying information. ) Store information request.

  The first registration requests A and B transmitted from the card unit 20 include the first member specifying information read by the card R / W 25. In addition, the attribute information included in the first registration request B is not personal information that can specify an individual, such as a name, but is attribute information that cannot specify an individual, like the attribute information included in the second registration request B. Where gender and date of birth. Accordingly, the unit control unit 22 serves as a first registration request transmission unit that transmits a first registration request including the first member specifying information (here, the member card ID) read by the card R / W 25 to the point management device 50. It functions.

  In D210, when the member operates the operation key and operates the “hand over card” button, the displayed unregistered member card ID is temporarily stored and the fact that the operation has been performed. The takeover screen shown in D221 is transmitted to the card unit 20 transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet and installed in the first game hall from the point management device 50, and is displayed on the display. Is displayed. In D221, there are input fields for the registered old membership card ID (ie, the membership card ID recorded on the old membership card that is a lost or damaged membership card) that is the point takeover source, and the registered personal identification number. And the stored membership card ID is displayed as an unregistered new membership card ID (that is, a membership card ID recorded on the reissued new membership card) as a point transfer destination, In addition, an input field for an initial password is displayed.

  In D221, the member operates the operation key, and when the new member card is reissued, the old member card ID written on the piece of paper handed over from the store clerk at the game hall, the registered PIN, When the password is entered and the "takeover" button is operated, the contents displayed and input in D221 (that is, the registered old membership card ID and registered password, the unregistered new membership card ID and the initial value) A takeover request including a personal identification number is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet. In other words, from the card unit 20, a takeover request including a new member card ID (takeover destination ID) that is new member identification information together with an old member card ID (takeover source ID) that is registered member identification information is sent via the Internet. It is transmitted to the point management device 50.

  Returning to FIG. 9, on the login screen shown at D250, the registered member card ID included in the registration confirmation request is displayed, and an input field for a registered PIN is displayed in association with the member card ID. The In D250, when the point member operates the operation key to input the registered password and operates the “login” button, the displayed member card ID and the input password are temporarily stored. A login request including the membership card ID and password is transmitted to the point management apparatus 50 via the Internet. This login request is the same as the login request transmitted from the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7.

  The point management device 50 that has received the login request distributes the member-dedicated page shown in D251 to the card unit 20 and displays it on the display. In D251, the login ID and the point associated with the login ID in the point member information DB shown in FIG. 23A to be described later are displayed, and the “use point” button and “update registration information” are displayed. A button, a “group store list” button, and an “integrated registration” button are displayed, and a group store additional information display area, a questionnaire display area, an event information display area, and a winning information display area are displayed. Here, the display contents of each display area will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In D251, when the point member operates the operation key and operates the “use point” button, a point use request is issued. When the “update registered information” button is operated, a registration information update request is issued, and “group store list” is displayed. When the “” button is operated, a group store list request is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet. The contents transmitted from the point management apparatus 50 in response to these requests and displayed will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In D251, when the point member operates the operation key and operates the “integrated registration” button, an integrated registration processing request is transmitted to the point management apparatus 50 via the Internet. The integrated reception page indicated by D260 to D261 in FIG. 11 is distributed to the card unit 20 and temporarily stored. First, the integrated reception page of D260 is displayed on the display.

  In this D260, the group name of the group to which the store with the store ID specified from the login ID belongs is displayed, and among the group stores of the group, the integrated store is “a store where points have already been integrated. ”And buttons indicating the unintegrated stores (here,“ B ”button and“ C ”button). Thereby, since the point member can grasp at a glance the integrated store where the integration is completed and the unintegrated store where the integration is not completed, it becomes a judgment material when integrating. If the membership card IDs of all group stores are registered in association with the login ID, the button indicating an unintegrated store is not displayed, and a message “All stores that can be integrated has been integrated” is displayed. The

  In D260, when the point member operates an operation key to operate one of the buttons indicating the unintegrated store (for example, “B” button), the temporarily stored integrated reception page of D261 is displayed on the display. Is displayed. In D261, for the unintegrated store (B store in this case) indicated by the operated button, an input field for a member card ID registered as a point member and a password is displayed. In D261, the member operates the operation key, and the registered member card ID (in this case, B00222) displayed in the display area of the registered member card as a point member for the unintegrated store, When the “integration” button is operated after inputting the password, the integrated ID including the input membership card ID and password, and the store ID of the unintegrated store (store B here) indicated by the button operated in D260. Information is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet.

  In D261, when the “other card” button is operated instead of the “integration” button after the member card ID and the password are input, the integration reception page of D260 is displayed again on the display. In this D260, a button (here, “C” button) indicating an unintegrated store excluding the unintegrated store (B store here) selected in the first D260 among the unintegrated stores is displayed. When the button indicating the unintegrated store is operated at D260, the integration reception page of D261 is displayed again on the display. When the “integration” button is operated after inputting the member card ID and the personal identification number at D261, The membership card ID and password entered in D261, the store ID of the unintegrated store (here, store B) indicated by the button operated in D260 last time, and the membership card ID and password entered in D261 this time , And the integrated ID information including the store ID of the unintegrated store (here, C store) indicated by the button operated in D260 is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet.

  Here, the store ID included in the integrated ID information is selection information that can identify the same group store (that is, an unintegrated store) selected on the integrated reception page. In the point management device 50 that has received the integrated ID information, when member integration processing (that is, member identification information association processing and point summation processing) described later is performed, the point management device 50 applies the card unit 20 to the card unit 20. The integrated registration completion screen shown in D262 is distributed and displayed on the display. In D262, the fact that the integrated registration has been completed and the points after integration are displayed.

  In the first embodiment, as described above, the member integration process is performed on the condition that all the membership card IDs to be integrated are already registered member card IDs registered as point members, and the card unit 20 The member integration request including a plurality of member specifying information (here, the registered member card ID itself) that can specify each of the plurality of registered member card IDs is sent to the point management device 50 via the Internet. Sent. In this example, the login request including the registered member card ID (that is, the login ID) displayed on the screen shown in D250 of FIG. 9 and the registered password entered on the screen, and the D261 shown in FIG. A member integration request is a combination of the already-registered member card ID and the registered password entered on the screen and the integrated ID information including the store ID of the unintegrated store. The member specifying information included in the member integration request transmitted from the card unit 20 is the member card ID read from the IC chip by the card R / W 25 for the login request, and the member displays a display area for the integrated ID information. Is the second member specifying information entered by visual inspection. The member integration request is also a summation request including a member card ID that is a plurality of recording medium identification information.

  Next, the card unit 20 installed in the second game hall will be described. The card unit 20 installed in the second game hall is the same as the card unit 20 installed in the first game hall, but the card unit 20 installed in the first game hall is the following five points. And different.

  First, the card R / W 25 serving as a recording medium receiving means receives the second member card 5 issued at its own store as a recording medium instead of the first member card 4, and receives the received recording. The first member specifying information recorded on the medium is read. Here, as shown in FIG. 8B, the second member card 5 inserted from the card insertion slot 25a is received and the second member is received. Based on the fact that the second member card ID and other system member ID, which are the first member identification information recorded on the IC chip 5b of the card 5, and the remaining amount of the card are read and the member card ball lending process is performed. The remaining card amount after subtracting the used amount used for the membership card ball lending process is recorded (written) on the second membership card 5.

  Also, as a second point, the other system member ID read by the card R / W 25 is transmitted from the member management device communication unit 21a to the repeater, and the pachinko machine 10 is associated with the other system member ID. The game information (a jackpot signal, a start signal, etc.) transmitted from the device to the repeater is transmitted to the second member management device 200, so that as shown in FIG. The member management device 200 can manage game information such as the number of big hits and the number of start times of each second member player in association with the other system member ID.

  As a third point, in the message display area 27a of the display 27, although not shown, the card R / W 25 is associated with another system member ID of the second member card 5 in a state where the second member card 5 is received. The game information (individual game information) managed by the second member management device 200 can be browsed, and even if the card R / W 25 does not accept the second member card 5, Can view game information and TV images.

  As a fourth point, the unit control unit 22 functioning as the transmission means sends a registration confirmation request (D201 in FIG. 9), a login request (D250), and a takeover request (D221 in FIG. 10) to the first member. Instead of the card ID, the second member card ID read from the IC chip 5b of the second member card 5 inserted in the card R / W 25 is transmitted.

  Further, as a fifth point, the unit control unit 22 functioning as the first registration request transmitting unit includes a first registration request including the first member specifying information (second member card ID) and the last four digits of the other system member ID. A and at least the first member identification information (second member card ID), the password to be registered, and the member attribute information (gender and date of birth), and if selected by the member, an e-mail address, and A first registration request B further including a store ID of a store for which store information is desired to be provided is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet. Here, the first registration request is a store information request including store specifying information (here, the second member card ID) capable of specifying a store, and member identification information (here) as a member's e-mail address and store specifying information. Is a store information request including the second member card ID).

  Specifically, when the member operates the operation key and operates the “new registration” button in D210 of FIG. 10, the displayed unregistered member card ID is temporarily stored, and The fact that the operation has been performed is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet, and the screen shown in D214 is displayed from the point management device 50 to the card unit 20 installed in the second game hall. Delivered and displayed on the display. In D214, the stored member card ID (that is, the second member card ID) is displayed, and the lower four digits input field of the other system member ID is displayed.

  In D214, when the member operates the operation key, inputs the last four digits of the other system member ID displayed in the display area 5a of the second member card 5, and operates the “Register” button, the message is displayed. The first registration request A including the second member card ID and the last four digits of the input other system member ID is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet. The screen shown in D215 to D216 is distributed to the card unit 20 and temporarily stored, and the screen of D215 is first displayed on the display.

  In this D215, the stored second member card ID is displayed, the password desired to be registered (may be different from the password registered when the second member card 5 is issued), and the attribute The date of birth, which is information, and gender input fields are displayed, and “Enter” and “Omit” buttons are displayed as buttons for selecting whether to enter or omit an e-mail address. .

  In D215, when the member operates the operation key to input the personal identification number desired to be registered, the date of birth and sex as the attribute information, and operates the "Omit" button, the second displayed A first registration request B including the member card ID and the input password and attribute information is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet.

  On the other hand, in D215, when the member operates the operation key to input the personal identification number desired to be registered, the date of birth and sex as attribute information, and operates the “enter” button, the information is stored. The screen of D216 is displayed on the display. In D216, the stored second member card ID, the password entered in D215 and the date of birth and gender as attribute information are displayed, and the e-mail address is input. A column is displayed.

  In D216, the store (here, X store) specified from the stored second member card ID belongs to the group (that is, the store ID of the store is registered in the group DB shown in FIG. 24B). The store name of the store, and another group store belonging to the group (here, ◎◎ group) and located in the same area (for example, Kanagawa Prefecture) as the store (here, C store) ) Is displayed to accept selection of a store for which store information (in this case, an e-mail including event information) is desired to be provided. Although not shown, when the store specified from the stored second member card ID does not belong to a group (that is, the store ID of the store is registered in the store DB shown in FIG. 24C). Is displayed in order to accept selection of a store for which provision of store information is desired.

  In D216, the member operates the operation key, inputs an e-mail address, and checks the check box corresponding to the store name for which store information is desired to be provided among the displayed store names. When the “Register” button is operated, the displayed second member card ID, personal identification number, and attribute information, the input e-mail address, and the store ID of the store corresponding to the checked check box (that is, the store information) The first registration request B including the store ID of the store that is desired to be provided is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet. Here, the first registration request B is also reply information including information (store ID) that can specify a store for which store information is desired to be provided.

  Next, the kiosk terminal 30 installed in the first game hall and the second game hall will be described. The kiosk terminal 30 is an example of an operation terminal operated by a member and a store terminal installed in a store (game hall), and is a computer having an Internet connection function. The kiosk terminal 30 is provided at a predetermined location (for example, in the vicinity of a prize exchange counter) in the first game hall and the second game hall, and has an L-shaped housing as shown in FIG. 12 (a). The display 34 is provided on the front surface of the vertical portion of the housing, the operation key 35 is provided on the upper surface of the horizontal portion of the housing, the card insertion slot 33a is provided on the front surface, and the external communication unit 31 and the control unit 32 are provided therein. , And a card R / W 143, and these components are connected as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 12B, the external communication unit 31 is communicably connected to the Internet, and performs communication between the kiosk terminal 30 and the point management device 50 connected via the Internet. It is something to control. The control unit 32 includes a CPU, a RAM, a ROM, and the like. When the processing program stored in the ROM is executed by the CPU using the RAM as a work area, the operation of each component included in the kiosk terminal 30 is performed. Various types of processing are performed under control, and their functions will be described later.

  The card reader 33 is an example of a recording medium receiving unit, and receives the recording medium (here, the first member card 4 and the second member card 5), and the first member specifying information recorded on the received recording medium. Here, the first member card 4 is received from the card insertion slot 33a, and the first member is the first member specifying information recorded on the magnetic stripe 4c of the first member card 4. While reading ID, the 2nd member card 5 inserted from the card insertion slot 33a is received, and other system member ID which is 1st member specific information recorded on the magnetic stripe 5c of this 2nd member card 5 is read. Is. This card reader 33 can accept a membership card of the own store or a membership card of another store.

  The display 34 displays various information (for example, a liquid crystal display), and the operation key 35 receives various inputs. On the display 34, the same screens (excluding the screen of D201) shown in FIGS. 9 to 11 similar to those described for the card unit 20 are delivered from the point management device 50 and displayed. The screen of D201 is a screen stored in advance at the kiosk terminal 30.

  The control unit 32 transmits a variety of requests and information to the point management device 50 via the Internet, and the first member identification information (here, the first member ID or the first member) read by the card reader 33. It functions as a first registration request transmitting means for transmitting a first registration request including another system member ID). From the control unit 32, requests and information similar to those described for the card unit 20 are transmitted. However, when the member inserts a member card into the card reader 33 while the screen of D202 is displayed, the member ID (first member ID or other information) which is the first member specifying information read from the magnetic stripe of the member card is displayed. A registration confirmation request including a system member ID) is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet.

  In the point management device 50 that has received the registration confirmation request, it is included in the transmitted registration confirmation request based on the storage contents of the encoding information DB shown in FIG. The member card ID (first member card ID or second member card ID) corresponding to the member ID (first member ID or other system member ID) is specified, and the specified member card ID is returned to the kiosk terminal 30. The member card ID specifying process is performed.

  In the point management device 50, whether or not the member card ID specified by the member card ID specifying process is registered in the point member information DB shown in FIG. 23A described later (that is, the member card shown in the left column). Whether or not it is stored in the ID storage column) is determined, and if it is determined that it is not registered, the screen shown in D210 of FIG. 10 is displayed, and if it is determined that it is registered, FIG. The login screen shown in D250 is distributed from the point management device 50 to the kiosk terminal 30 and displayed on the display 34. In each screen after D210 or after D250, the card unit 20 displays the member card ID read from the IC chip of the member card inserted in the card R / W 25, instead of the kiosk. In the terminal 30, the member card ID returned from the point management device 50 (that is, the member card ID specified by the member card ID specifying process from the member ID as the member specifying information) is displayed.

  Next, the system management device 40 installed in the first game hall and the second game hall will be described. The system management device 40 is provided at a predetermined location (for example, a management office) in the amusement hall. The unit communication unit 41a, the member management device communication unit 41b, which are connected as shown in FIGS. The computer includes an out-of-field communication unit 41c, an external communication unit 41d, a control unit 42, a hard disk 43, a display 44, an input device 45, and the like.

  The unit communication unit 41a is communicably connected to the system management device communication unit 26a of the card unit 20 as described above, and manages communication between the system management device 40 and the card unit 20.

  The member management device communication unit 41b is communicably connected to the system management device communication unit 101b of the first member management device 100 in the first game hall, and the system management device 40 and the first member management device 100 are connected. It is responsible for communication with each other. However, the communication part 41b for member management apparatuses is not connected with the 2nd member management apparatus 200 in the 2nd game hall.

  The out-of-field communication unit 41c includes a digital service unit (DSU) or the like for enabling data communication with a communication device outside the game hall through a dedicated line, and is communicably connected to the transfer device 70 provided in the management center. It manages communication between the system management device 40 and the transfer device 70.

  From this out-of-field communication unit 41c, a fixed report transmission request, an event information transmission request, a questionnaire result transmission request, and a point status transmission request are transmitted via the transfer device 70 as shown in D40 of FIG. It is transmitted to the device 50.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22A, which will be described later, the out-of-field communication unit 41c receives a balance management DB (FIG. 22) managed by the system management device 40 after the game hall is closed (that is, once a day). 13 (a)) is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the transfer device 70.

  The external communication unit 41d is communicably connected to the Internet, and functions as a router that relays communication between each card unit 20 installed in the game arcade and the point management device 50 connected via the Internet. To do.

  The control unit 42 includes a CPU, a RAM, a ROM, and the like. When the processing program stored in the hard disk 43 is executed by the CPU using the RAM as a work area, each component included in the system management device 40 is controlled. Various operations are performed by controlling the operation.

  The hard disk 43 as a storage device stores a remaining amount management DB shown in FIG. In this balance management DB, the remaining card amount corresponding to the value of the game is correlated with the membership card ID of the membership card issued at the game hall, and the member player of the membership card ID today (the game The amount of money used today, which is the value of the valuable value on the business day of the place), is stored. The amount used today is point grant target information generated by transaction processing (ball lending processing) at a store using a recording medium (member card) in which member identification information (member card ID) is recorded. In this balance management DB, when a member card ID and a usage amount are transmitted from each card unit 20, the control unit 42 controls to store today's usage in association with the transmitted member card ID. The transmitted usage amount is added to the amount and updated. The member card ID, the remaining card amount, and the amount used today (that is, the point grant target information) that are stored in the remaining amount management DB are transmitted to the transfer device 70 after the game hall is closed.

  The display 44 is a display device for displaying various information, and is a liquid crystal display, for example. The input device 45 is a device for inputting various types of information, such as a keyboard or a mouse.

  Here, the operation of the system management device 40 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-16 is a figure showing an example of an effect | action between the card units 20. FIG.

  First, with reference to FIG. 14, a process for depositing the card unit 20 will be described. When money is deposited into the card unit 20 during the operation of the first game hall or the second game hall, the deposited money is received by the banknote discriminator 23 or the coin discriminator 24 to identify the money. Is performed (S01). As a result, if it is identified as regular money, it is next determined whether or not a member card (first member card 4 or second member card 5) is accepted (S012). If it is determined in S02 that the membership card is being accepted (Y), it is then determined whether or not the remaining card amount remains on the accepted membership card (S10). If it is determined in S10 that the remaining card amount remains (Y), the accepted money is returned (S00). On the other hand, if it is determined in S10 that no card balance remains (N), the deposit process of S11 to S15 is performed.

  In this depositing process, first, the deposit amount, which is the amount of the identified money, is recorded as a remaining card amount on the receiving membership card (S11), and the deposit amount and the membership card ID (first number) read from the membership card are recorded. The member card ID or the second member card ID) is transmitted to the system management device 40 together with the device ID of the card unit 20 (S12). In the system management device 40 that has received the information transmitted in S12, the received deposit amount is stored in the remaining amount management DB in association with the received member card ID as the remaining amount of the card (S13). Next, a payment processing end notification indicating that the remaining card amount is stored is transmitted to the card unit 20 which is the transmission source of the device ID (S14). In the card unit 20 that has received the payment processing completion notification, the frequency corresponding to the remaining amount of the membership card is displayed as the remaining frequency on the remaining frequency display 14 and the membership card ball lending process is performed by operating the ball lending button 15. State (hereinafter referred to as “member card ball lending available state”) (S15).

  Returning to S02, if it is determined in S02 that the membership card is not being accepted (N), the deposit amount is stored in the RAM of the unit control unit 22 as a deposit balance, and the deposit balance is stored in a predetermined amount (here In step S20, it is determined whether or not the price is equal to or less than 1000 yen. If it is determined in S20 that the amount is equal to or less than the predetermined amount (Y), visitor ball lending processing for the remaining amount of deposit is performed (S21). On the other hand, if it is determined in S20 that the amount is not less than the predetermined amount (amount greater than 1000 yen) (N), the deposited money is returned (S00).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the process at the time of insertion of a member card, the process at the time of ball loan button operation, and the member card ball loan process are demonstrated. When a membership card is inserted into the card unit 20 during the operation of the amusement hall (S30), a membership card ID (first membership card ID or second membership information) is recorded from the membership card received by the card R / W 25. Card ID), member ID (first member ID or other system member ID), and remaining card amount are read (S31), and the license request including the read member card ID and remaining card amount is sent to the device ID of the card unit 20 At the same time, the data is transmitted to the system management device 40 (S32). In the system management device 40 that has received the use permission request, whether or not the received card balance is equal to or less than the card balance stored in the balance management DB in association with the received member card ID (received card balance) ≦ Check the remaining card amount stored in the remaining amount management DB in association with the received member card ID? (S33).

  When the collation in S33 is collation OK (that is, the received card remaining amount ≦ the card remaining amount stored in the remaining amount management DB in association with the received member card ID), the member card indicating the collation OK The usage permission information is transmitted to the card unit 20 of the device ID transmitted in S32 (S34). When the remaining amount of the card is used in the card unit 20 when the communication state between the card unit 20 and the system management device 40 is offline, the received card remaining amount is less than the received member card ID. The remaining card amount stored in the remaining amount management DB is used. In this case, the remaining card amount stored in the remaining amount management DB in association with the received member card ID is updated to the received remaining card amount. In the card unit 20 that has received the membership card use permission information, it is determined whether or not the remaining card amount of the accepted membership card remains (S36). If it is determined in S36 that there is a remaining amount (Y), the frequency corresponding to the remaining amount of the member card is displayed on the remaining frequency display 14 as the remaining frequency, and the member card can be lent. S37). On the other hand, if it is determined in S36 that there is no remaining balance (N), the frequency (0 frequency) corresponding to the card remaining amount of the member card is displayed as the remaining frequency on the remaining frequency display 14, and the member card ball It is not possible to lend (S38).

  Here, the process returns to S33, and in S33, in the case of collation NG (that is, the received card remaining amount> the card remaining amount stored in the remaining amount management DB in association with the received member card ID), the fact of the collation NG Is transmitted to the card unit 20 of the device ID transmitted in S32 (S35). The card unit 20 that has received the membership card unavailable information returns the accepted membership card.

  Next, processing when the ball lending button 15 is operated will be described. When the ball lending button 15 is operated (S40), the unit controller 22 that detects the operation determines whether or not the member card ball lending state is possible (S41). If it is determined in S41 that the membership card is not available for lending (N), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S41 that the member card ball lending state is available (Y), the member card ball lending process shown in S50- is performed.

  In this membership card ball lending process, a ball lending process for the ball lending set amount (or the remaining card amount) is first executed by the unit control unit 22 (S50) and used for the ball lending process from the remaining card amount of the accepted membership card. The used amount is subtracted and the display of the remaining number is also updated (S51). Next, the member card ID of the accepted member card and the usage amount are transmitted to the system management device 40 together with the device ID (S52). In the system management device 40, the received usage amount is subtracted and updated from the remaining card amount stored in the remaining amount management DB in association with the received member card ID (S53), and the remaining amount is associated with the received member card ID. The received usage amount is added and updated to the today's usage amount stored in the management DB (S54). Next, a subtraction completion notification indicating that the subtraction of the remaining card amount has been completed is transmitted to the card unit 20 of the device ID transmitted in S52 (S55). In the card unit 20 that has received the subtraction completion notification in S55, it is determined whether or not the remaining amount of the membership card is 0 (S56). If it is determined that the remaining amount of the card is not 0 (N), the membership card is determined. The ball lending state continues (S57). If it is determined in S56 that the remaining card amount is 0 (Y), the member card ball lending state is canceled (S58).

  Next, processing of the card unit 20 when the card return button 16 is operated will be described with reference to FIG. When the card return button 16 is operated (S60), the card R / W control unit 26 determines whether or not a member card is accepted (S61). The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that it is being accepted (Y), the membership card ball lending state is canceled and the display of the remaining number is stopped (S62). Then, the membership card is returned (S63).

  17 to 20 are diagrams illustrating an example of a management support screen displayed on the display 44 of the system management device 40. First, FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of a fixed report display screen displayed on the system management apparatus 40. Here, D40 to D44 are screens stored in the system management device 40, and D45 is a screen transmitted from the point management device 50. In the system management device 40, when the operator operates the input device 45 to execute the management support screen display mode, the menu screen shown in D40 is displayed on the display 44. In D40, a “standard report” button, an “event information” button, a “questionnaire result” button, and a “point status button” are displayed.

  In D40, when the operator operates the input device 45 and operates the “standard report” button, the period selection screen shown in D41 is displayed on the display 44. In D41, a “monthly” button, a “weekly” button, and a “daily” button are displayed as buttons for selecting the total period of the usage amount displayed in the standard report.

  In D41, when the operator operates the input device 45 and operates the “monthly” button, the total month selection screen shown in D42 is displayed on the display 44. In this D42, the month in which the standard report can be created is displayed so that it can be selected. By default, the month of the current year is displayed. However, if the “Year-Year” button displayed at the bottom right of the screen is operated, the previous month is displayed. When the “next year” button displayed at the lower right of the screen is operated in a state where the month before the previous year is displayed, the month of the next year is displayed. In D42, when the operator operates the input device 45 to select a month for which a fixed report is desired to be transmitted, a fixed report transmission request for requesting transmission of the fixed report for the selected month is sent from the off-site communication unit 41c. The data is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the transfer device 70.

  In D41, when the operator operates the input device 45 and operates the “Weekly” button, the total week selection screen shown in D43 is displayed on the display 44. In this D43, the week in which the standard report can be created is displayed so that it can be selected. By default, the week of the current year is displayed. However, when the “Year-Year” button displayed at the lower right of the screen is operated, the previous week is displayed. When the “next year” button displayed at the lower right of the screen is displayed in a state where the week before the previous year is displayed, the week of the next year is displayed. In D43, when the operator operates the input device 45 to select a week for which a standard report is desired to be transmitted, a standard report transmission request for requesting transmission of the standard report for the selected week is sent from the off-site communication unit 41c. The data is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the transfer device 70.

  In D41, when the operator operates the input device 45 and operates the “Daily” button, the total date selection screen shown in D44 is displayed on the display 44. In this D44, the day when the standard report can be created is displayed so that it can be selected. By default, the day of the current month is displayed. However, when the “Previous Month” button displayed at the bottom right of the screen is operated, the day of the previous month is displayed. When the “next month” button displayed at the lower right of the screen in a state where the day before the previous month is displayed, the day of the next month is displayed. In D44, when the operator operates the input device 45 to select a day on which the fixed report is desired to be transmitted, a fixed report transmission request for requesting transmission of the fixed report on the selected day is sent from the off-site communication unit 41c. The data is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the transfer device 70.

  In response to these standard report transmission requests, the standard report display screen shown in D45 is transmitted from the point management device 50 to the system management device 40 and displayed on the display 45, which will be described later.

  Returning to D40 in FIG. 17, when the operator operates the input device 45 and operates the “event information” button, the mail software is activated, and the event information transmission screen shown in D50 in FIG. . In D50, in addition to an e-mail title to be sent and an input field for the content to be sent, a check box is provided for designating attributes of point members to be sent, and attributes of gender and date of birth are provided. As follows: teenage male, teenage female, 20th male, 20th female, 30th male, 30th female, 40th male, 40th female, 50th male, 50th female, 60th male, 60th female, The group is classified into 14 groups of males in their 70s and over, and females in their 70s and over.

  At D50, the operator operates the input device 45 to input a title (here, “Ladies' Day”), and selects a transmission target group by checking the check box (here, women of all ages). When the contents are entered (here, notification about Ladies' Day, which is an event held at the store A), and the “Send” button is selected, the event information including the contents entered and selected in the D50 is displayed. The data is transmitted from 41c to the point management device 50 via the transfer device 70. The point management device 50 that has received the event information stores the event information, and transmits an e-mail including the event information to the e-mail address of the point member to be transmitted at a predetermined timing. This will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Returning to D40 of FIG. 17, when the operator operates the input device 45 and operates the “questionnaire result” button, a questionnaire result transmission request is sent from the off-site communication unit 41c to the point management device 50 via the transfer device 70. Sent. In response to this questionnaire result transmission request, the questionnaire result display screen shown in D60 of FIG. 19 is transmitted from the point management device 50 to the system management device 40 and displayed on the display 45. This will be described later. .

  Returning to D40 of FIG. 17, when the operator operates the input device 45 and operates the “point status” button, a point status transmission request is sent from the out-of-field communication unit 41c to the point management device 50 via the transfer device 70. Sent. In response to this point status transmission request, the point status display screen shown in D70 or D71 of FIG. 20 is transmitted from the point management device 50 to the system management device 40 and displayed on the display 45. It will be described later.

  Next, the 1st member management apparatus 100 installed in a 1st game hall is demonstrated. The first member management device 100 is provided at a predetermined location (for example, a management office) in the first game arcade, and is connected to a unit communication unit 101a and a system management device communication unit connected as shown in FIG. 101b, a control unit 102, a hard disk 103, and the like.

  The unit communication unit 101a is communicably connected to the member management device communication unit 21a of the card unit 20 as described above, and manages communication between the first member management device 100 and the card unit 20. . As described above, the unit communication unit 101 a receives the first member ID read by the card unit 20 and the game information generated by the pachinko machine 10 corresponding to the card unit 20.

  The system management device communication unit 101b is communicably connected to the member management device communication unit 41b of the system management device 40, and controls communication between the first member management device 100 and the system management device 40. is there. This system management device communication unit 101b transmits the first member ID and attribute information (password, name, address, gender, date of birth, e-mail address) managed by the first member information DB. When the member ID and attribute information are registered in the first member information DB or the registered information is changed, the storage contents of the updated first member information DB are stored in the system management device 40 and the transfer device 70. As described above, among the attribute information transmitted to the point management device 50, the personal identification number includes the first member ID and the first member card ID. Correspondingly, it is stored in the encoding information DB shown in FIG. 24A to be described later, but the name, address, gender, date of birth, and e-mail address other than the password are discarded without being particularly used. .

  The control unit 102 includes a CPU, a RAM, a ROM, and the like, and each component included in the first member management apparatus 100 when a processing program stored in the hard disk 103 is executed by the CPU using the RAM as a work area. Various operations are performed by controlling the operation of the element.

  The hard disk 103 as a storage device stores a first member information DB shown in FIG. This first member information DB is an example of attribute information management means, and is associated with the first member ID, and attribute information (password, name, address) of the first member player specified from the first member ID. , Gender, date of birth, e-mail address) in association with the “first member ID” of the first member player who has registered as a member of the first game hall. The “personal code number”, “name”, “address”, “sex”, “date of birth”, and “e-mail address” of the member player are stored. The information to be registered in the first member information DB is input using a display and an input device (not shown) included in the first member management apparatus 100. In addition, in association with the first member ID, game information such as the number of jackpots, which is a total of game information transmitted from the pachinko machine 10, is also stored.

  Here, the control unit 102 is a point management apparatus in which attribute information (name, address, e-mail address) corresponding to the first member card ID is updated in a point member information DB shown in FIG. 50, the attribute information stored in the first member information DB in association with the received first member card ID based on the reception of the first member card ID and the updated attribute information, Processing to update the received attribute information after update is performed.

  Next, the 2nd member management apparatus 200 installed in a 2nd game hall is demonstrated. As described above, the second member management apparatus 200 is installed and managed by another company different from the card company that installs and manages the first member management apparatus 100. The second member management device 200 is provided at a predetermined location (for example, a management office) in the second game arcade, and is connected to a unit communication unit 201a, a control unit 202, and a hard disk 203 as shown in FIG. And so on.

  The unit communication unit 201a is communicably connected to the member management device communication unit 21a of the card unit 20 as described above, and manages communication between the second member management device 200 and the card unit 20. . As described above, the unit communication unit 201 a receives the other system member ID read by the card unit 20 and the game information generated in the pachinko machine 10 corresponding to the card unit 20.

  The control unit 202 includes a CPU, a RAM, a ROM, and the like, and each component included in the second member management apparatus 200 is executed by the CPU executing a processing program stored in the hard disk 203 using the RAM as a work area. Various operations are performed by controlling the operation of the element.

  The hard disk 203 as a storage device stores a second member information DB shown in FIG. In this second member information DB, in association with the “other system member ID” of the second member player who has registered as a member of the second game hall, the “password” of the second member player, The “name”, “address”, “sex”, “birth date”, and “e-mail address” are stored. Input of information to be registered in the second member information DB is performed using a display or an input device (not shown) included in the second member management device 200. In addition, game information such as the number of jackpots, which is obtained by counting game information transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 in association with other system member IDs, is also stored.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, each device (transfer device 70, encoding information management device, and point management device 50) outside the game hall will be described.

  First, the encoding information management device 60 will be described. The encoding information management device 60 is a computer installed in the member card encoding mechanism, and stores an encoding information DB (not shown). In this encoding information DB, the association between the first member ID and the first member card ID recorded (encoded) on each first member card 4 and the other system recorded (encoded) on each second member card 5 Encoding information indicating the association between the member ID and the second member card ID is stored. The encoding information management device 60 includes an interface (for example, a device for connecting to a dedicated line) for communicating with the point management device 50 of the card company. Here, in response to a request from the point management device 50, the storage content of the encoding information DB is transmitted to the point management device 50.

  Next, the transfer device 70 will be described. The transfer device 70 is a computer installed in the management center and belongs to the card company. The transfer device 70 stores a remaining amount management DB shown in FIG. As described above, this remaining amount management DB is a DB that stores the storage contents of the remaining amount management DB transmitted from each game hall after the end of business (that is, the remaining amount of the card corresponding to the member card ID and the amount used today). Yes, it is a DB that manages the storage contents of the remaining amount management DB corresponding to each game hall. Note that information transmitted from each game hall may be stored together in one data table, or may be stored in a separate data table for each game hall.

  In addition, the transfer device 70 includes an interface for communicating with the system management device 40 of each game arcade and the point management device 50 of the card company, and communication between the system management device 40 and the point management device 50, The communication between the system management device 40 and the point management device 50 is relayed. Here, when the storage content of the remaining amount management DB shown in FIG. 13A is updated, the updated storage content is transmitted to the point management device 50.

  Here, with reference to Fig.22 (a), the effect | action of the transfer apparatus 70 after the game end of a game hall is demonstrated. When the business end time (S70) of each game hall (first game hall, second game hall) elapses on a certain business day (for example, September 16), the system management device 40 stores the stored contents ( FIG. 13A is transmitted to the transfer device 70 (S71). The transfer device 70 that has received this information from each game hall updates the storage content of the remaining amount management DB (FIG. 13A) (S72), and stores the updated storage amount of the remaining amount management DB in the point management device 50. It transmits to (S73).

  Upon receiving this, the point management device 50 causes the control unit 52 to update the usage amount DB shown in FIG. 23C (S74), which will be described later, and the point member information DB shown in FIG. 23A (S75), And the group DB and store DB shown in FIGS. 24B and 24C are updated (S76).

  First, in S74, in the usage amount DB, a storage area corresponding to the business day (in this case, September), with the usage amount for each business day as the usage amount for each business day in association with the member card ID. Storage area corresponding to the 16th). Thereby, the usage amount of each member player can be managed on a daily basis. Next, in S75, a point grant process (see FIG. 22B) and a point addition process, which will be described later, are performed, and the accumulated usage amount and points are updated in the point member information DB. In S76, in the group DB and the store DB, the number of points updated in the point member information DB is added to the total number of acquired points and the remaining points managed in association with the store ID included in each member card ID. Addition update is performed.

  Next, the point management device 50 will be described. As shown in FIG. 23A, the point management device 50 registers the recording medium identification information and the member card ID that is the member identification information, and associates the recorded medium identification information with the registered member identification information. Owner (that is, member) of the recording medium, which is transaction-related information generated in connection with transaction processing at a store using the 1-member card 4 or the 2nd member card 5) It manages the amount of money used and the number of points. The number of points here is a number of points given as an upper limit of 10 points per day according to the usage amount of the owner of the recording medium. Further, the point management device 50 receives a registration request (first registration request or second registration request) including member attribute information (gender, date of birth, etc.) and associates it with the registered member card ID. The attribute information included in the received registration request is managed.

  Furthermore, the point management device 50 is an example of a store information providing device, and has received a store information request (registration request A) including store specifying information (member card ID) that can specify a store from an operation terminal operated by a member. Based on the above, the control unit 52 is a store information providing means for providing store information (event information) related to a store specified from the store specifying information included in the received store information request to the operation terminal. It is.

  Further, the point management device 50 displays the screens shown in FIGS. 3 to 5 and 9 to 11 described above, and the screens shown in FIGS. 42 to 43 described later on the operation terminals (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card). It serves as a web server that is distributed to the unit 20 and the kiosk terminal 30). Further, the point management device 50 functions as a management support device that transmits the management screens shown in FIGS. 17 to 20 described above in response to a request from the system management device 40.

  The point management device 50 is installed at a predetermined location in the card company (for example, a management office), and is connected as shown in FIG. 21 to an encoded information management device communication unit 51a and a transfer device communication. The computer includes a unit 51b, an external communication unit 51c, a control unit 52, a hard disk 53, a display 54, an input device 55, and the like. The point management device 50 has an Internet connection function, and is connected to the Internet via an external communication unit 51c.

  The communication unit 51a for the encoded information management device is communicably connected to the encoded information management device 60 installed in the member card encoding mechanism, and manages communication between the point management device 50 and the encoded information management device 60. Here, the storage content of the encoding information DB is received from the encoding information management device 60.

  The transfer device communication unit 51b is communicably connected to the transfer device 70 installed in the management center, and controls communication between the point management device 50 and the transfer device 70. The transfer device communication unit 51b includes event information including the content of the event input as the transmission content and the attribute information of the event target member selected as the transmission target in D50 of FIG. Information received from member 40 via transfer device 70 (in this case, event content) and information that can identify the member card ID of the member to be notified (here, event target member) The attribute information) is set to function as notification information setting means.

  The transfer device communication unit 51b functions as a point grant target information collecting unit that collects the member card ID and the point grant target information (the amount used today) at a predetermined collection interval. The member card ID, the remaining card amount, and the today's usage amount, which are stored in the remaining amount management DB transmitted via the transfer device 70, are collected at a collection interval every day when the game hall is closed.

  The external communication unit 51c is communicably connected to the Internet, and communicates between the point management device 50 and operation terminals (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30) connected via the Internet. It governs.

  The control unit 52 includes a CPU, a RAM, a ROM, and the like. When the processing program stored in the hard disk 53 is executed by the CPU using the RAM as a work area, each component included in the point management device 50 is controlled. Various operations are performed by controlling the operation, the function of which will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, the hard disk 53 as a storage device stores a point member information DB. In this point member information DB, a personal identification number, attribute information (name, address, gender, date of birth, e-mail address), mail distribution store, accumulated usage amount, points (cumulative points, A storage column is provided for storing (managing) the current day point) and takeover identification information (takeover date, takeover source ID).

  Here, the point member information DB is an example of member management means, and an e-mail address acquired by an e-mail address acquisition means described later is specified from the second member specifying information included in the received second registration request. It is managed (stored) in association with the member card ID. Specifically, based on the reception of the second registration request B (D112 or D114 in FIG. 4) from the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7, the second registration is performed by the control unit 52 functioning as an e-mail address acquisition unit. The e-mail address included in the request B is acquired from the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7, and the e-mail address acquired by the e-mail address acquisition unit in the point member information DB is the second member included in the second registration request. It is managed (stored) in association with the member card ID specified from the specific information.

  Further, the point member information DB functioning as a member management means is a store information request from the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30), and the member's e-mail address and store specific information as the store specific information. The received e-mail address and the member card ID are managed (stored) in association with each other based on the reception of the member card ID that can identify the user. Specifically, based on the fact that the second registration request B (D112 or D114 in FIG. 4) is received as a store information request from the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7, the e-mail address included in the second registration request B Based on the fact that the first registration request B (D213 or D216 in FIG. 10) is received as the store information request from the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30 in association with the member card ID and stored. The electronic mail address included in the first registration request B and the member card ID are stored in association with each other. In addition, when the 1st registration request B (D212 or D215 of FIG. 10) which does not contain an e-mail address as a store information request | requirement is received from the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30, the member included in this 1st registration request B Store the card ID.

  That is, when the second registration request B is received from the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7, the e-mail address is always registered, but when the first registration request B is received from the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30, If the first registration request B includes an e-mail address, the e-mail address is registered. If the first registration request B does not include an e-mail address, the e-mail address is not registered.

  Further, the point member information DB functioning as a member management means is information that can specify a store for which store information (event information) is desired to be provided from an operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30) ( Based on the reception of the reply information including the store ID), the store ID of the store specified from the received reply information is managed (stored) in association with the member card ID. Specifically, based on the fact that the second registration request B (D112 or D114 in FIG. 4) is received as reply information from the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7, it corresponds to the member card ID included in the second registration request B. In addition, store IDs (stores A and B in the case of D112 and stores X and C in the case of D114) included in the second registration request B are stored in the storage column of the mail delivery store, and the card. Corresponding to the membership card ID included in the first registration request B based on the reception of the first registration request B (D213 or D216 in FIG. 10) including the store ID as reply information from the unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30 In addition, store IDs (stores A and B in the case of D213 and stores X and C in the case of D216) included in the first registration request B are stored in the storage column of the mail delivery store.

  The point member information DB is an example of a point management means, and manages (stores) the number of points owned by the member of the member card ID in association with the member card ID.

  Further, the point member information DB indicates that in the takeover process described later, the takeover process was performed after the point addition process for the registered member card ID (that is, between the previous day's point addition process and today's point addition process). The handover specifying information that can specify that the transfer process has been performed for the registered member card ID) is stored. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39B, which will be described later, when the takeover process is performed, the date when the takeover process is performed is associated with the new member card ID as the takeover destination ID as the takeover date. In addition to storing, the registered member card ID is stored as the takeover source ID. In the first embodiment, even after the point addition processing for the new member card ID is performed, the takeover specifying information is not erased and is retained.

  In the case where a member integration process for integrating one member card ID (for example, A00001) and another member card ID (for example, X00003) is performed for the same member, the one member is stored in the point member information DB. Both the member card IDs are registered in association with each other by arranging the card ID and other member card IDs one above the other, and the attribute information corresponding to each member card ID, the mail distribution store, the accumulated use amount, and the accumulated point The memory fields are integrated. The attribute information associated with both member card IDs is stored in the storage column of the integrated attribute information, and the storage column of the integrated mail distribution store is associated with each member card ID. The mail distribution store is integrated and stored, and in the storage column of the integrated cumulative usage amount, the cumulative usage amount associated with each member card ID is integrated (added) and stored, and the integrated cumulative points are stored. In the storage column, the total number of points obtained by integrating (summing up) the accumulated points associated with each member card ID is stored. However, even if the member integration process is performed, in the point member information DB, the password number, the day point, and the storage field of the takeover identification information are not integrated, and are stored corresponding to each member card ID. . The storage method and update method for each column of the point member information DB will be described later.

  Further, the hard disk 53 stores a notification information DB as shown in FIG. This notification information DB stores notification information to be notified to the member of the member card ID in association with the member card ID registered as a point member. Here, the notification information will be described later. It is configured to store group store additional information, questionnaire information, event information, and winning information. In the case where a member integration process for integrating one member card ID (for example, A00001) and another member card ID (for example, X00003) is performed for the same member, the one member card is displayed in the notification information DB. The ID and other member card IDs are arranged one above the other, and the group store additional information, questionnaire information, event information, and winning information storage fields corresponding to each member card ID are integrated, and each integrated storage field The stored contents associated with each member card ID are integrated and stored. A storage method and an erasing method for each column of the notification information DB will be described later. The questionnaire information is deleted when the questionnaire period of the questionnaire ends.

  The hard disk 53 stores a usage amount DB as shown in FIG. In this usage amount DB, in association with the member card ID registered as a point member, the usage amount, which is the amount of usage value used by the member player of the member card ID for the game of the day, is displayed for each business day. It is memorized as the amount of money used for each business day. In the usage amount DB, when the storage contents of the remaining amount management DB shown in FIG. 13A are transmitted from the transfer device 70 after the game hall is closed, the remaining amount management DB is associated with each member card ID. The amount used today is stored in the storage column of the amount used per business day of the day. In the case where member integration processing for integrating one member card ID (for example, A00001) and another member card ID (for example, X00003) is performed for the same member, the one member card is used in the usage amount DB. The ID and other member card IDs are arranged one above the other, and the storage column for the usage amount for each business day corresponding to each member card ID is integrated. Each integrated storage column corresponds to each member card ID. The stored contents added are integrated (summed) and stored.

  Further, the hard disk 53 stores an encoding information DB as shown in FIG. In this encode information DB, as the encode information acquired from the encode information management device 60, the association between the first member ID and the first member card ID recorded on each first member card 4, and each second member card 5 Is stored, and the first member ID and password registered as store members from the first member management device 100 (that is, the first member card). 4) and the password corresponding to the transmitted first member ID are stored when the attribute information is transmitted.

  The hard disk 53 stores a group DB shown in FIG. 24B and a store DB shown in FIG. The group DB and the store DB are examples of store management means, and manage (store) store IDs that can individually identify stores registered in the point management device 50, and the stores are set by group setting means described later. When belonging to a set group, it is managed (stored) in association with a group name which is group identification information capable of individually identifying the group. The group DB functioning as a store management means manages (stores) a region name that is region identification information that can individually identify the region to which the store location of the store ID belongs in association with the store ID. .

  Here, the group DB is associated with the store name and store ID of each store registered as a group store by the group setting means, and the group name of the group to which each store belongs and the region name of the region to which each store location ( Here, the prefecture name is stored. The store DB stores store names and store IDs of stores that can be set as group stores by the group setting means (in other words, stores that are not yet set as any group store). The registration of the group name, area name, store name, and store ID will be described later.

  In addition, the group DB stores the number of point members in association with each store ID, and in association with the group name, the total number of acquired points, the number of remaining points, and the number of points used in the current month (number of points used in lottery applications And the total number of product exchange points). The store DB stores the number of point members, the total number of points acquired, the number of remaining points, and the number of points used in the current month in association with each store ID. Since each store can belong to only one group, one store is not registered in a plurality of groups.

  Here, the number of point members is the number of store members of the store registered as point members (that is, the number of member card IDs of the store registered in the point member information DB). Once registered, the number of point members is updated.

  The total number of acquired points is the total number of points given to each point member of each group or each store. The total number of acquired points is added and updated by the added and updated number of points as the number of points in the point member information DB is updated. The

  Further, the remaining point number is the total of the number of points that are not used by each point member of each group or each store among the total number of acquired points. This remaining number of points is added and updated by the number of points added and updated with the addition and updating of the number of points in the point member information DB. Subtraction is updated by the number of points.

  Furthermore, the number of points used this month is the total number of points used by each point member of each group or store this month, and the number of points used for lottery application (hereinafter referred to as “lottery application use points”). And the number of points used for exchange with the product (hereinafter referred to as “product exchange use point number”) are stored separately. The lottery application use points are added and updated by the number of points subtracted and updated in accordance with the subtraction update of the points used for the lottery application in the point member information DB. Further, the product exchange use points are added and updated by the number of points subtracted and updated in accordance with the subtraction update of the points used for exchanging products in the point member information DB.

  Here, the group bears a consideration corresponding to the group total of the number of product exchange use points, and each store not registered in the group bears a compensation corresponding to the number of product exchange use points of the store. For lottery applications, each store bears a uniform fee (for example, ¥ 10,000 per month), not the price according to the number of lottery application use points. The number of points used in the current month is reset when one month of the settlement period elapses.

  Further, the hard disk 53 stores a lottery information DB as shown in FIG. In this lottery information DB, each lottery is associated with a lottery ID that can be identified, the type of lottery (whether it is a lottery using points or a questionnaire), and application for the lottery Application period, which is a period for receiving the prize, the award name of each prize prepared for the lottery, the number of winners of each prize, the necessary number of points required for applying for each prize, The explanation and the member card ID (first member card ID, second member card ID) of the member who applied for each award are stored. Here, each item from the lottery ID to the description of the prize is stored when the lottery is set in the point management device 50.

  The item of the applicant member card ID is stored as follows. First, as shown in D410 of FIG. 42, which will be described later, when receiving application information indicating an application for a lottery of a prize selected on the screen, the selected prize is associated with the lottery ID of the lottery. The member card ID (that is, the login ID) included in the login request transmitted from the operation terminal that is the transmission source of the application information is stored in the storage field of the corresponding applicant member card ID. Further, as shown in D460 of FIG. 44, which will be described later, from the operation terminal, when answer information including an answer to the questionnaire is received, in the storage field of the applicant member card ID corresponding to the lottery ID of the lottery corresponding to the questionnaire, The membership card ID (that is, the login ID) included in the login request transmitted from the operation terminal that is the transmission source of the answer information is stored. Furthermore, when the member card ID is received together with the answer information during the questionnaire period from the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 to which the questionnaire is distributed, as shown in D21 of FIG. 27 described later, it corresponds to the lottery ID of the lottery corresponding to the questionnaire. The member card ID included in the answer information is stored in the storage column for the applicant member card ID to be applied.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the hard disk 53 stores the IP addresses of all card units 20 and kiosk terminals 30 provided in all stores. Thereby, based on having received information from the outside by the external communication unit 51c, the control unit 52 determines whether or not the IP address of the transmission source terminal of the information is stored. It is determined that information has been received from the terminal (that is, the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30), and if not stored, it is determined that information has been received from the information terminal (PC 6 or mobile phone 7).

  The display 54 is for displaying various information (for example, a liquid crystal display), and the input device 55 is for receiving various inputs (for example, a keyboard and a mouse).

  The display 54 and the input device 55 are an example of group setting means, and set a group to which a plurality of stores belong. Specifically, when the operator operates the point management device 50 to execute the group setting mode, a group edit screen shown as D01 in FIG. In D01, a “new store registration” button for registering a new store, a “new group setting” button for setting a new group, and the addition of a new store to an already registered group An “add group store” button is displayed.

  When the operator operates the input device 55 and operates the “Register new store” button at D01, a screen shown at D02 in FIG. In D02, input of the store name and store ID of the new store is requested, a store name input column and a store ID input column are displayed, and a region name (prefecture name) to which the store location belongs is selected. A pull-down menu is displayed. In D02, when the operator operates the input device 55 to input the store name and store ID, selects the area name to which the store location belongs from the pull-down menu, and operates the “Register” button, FIG. In the store DB shown in FIG. 4, the selected area name is stored in association with the input store name and store ID.

  When the operator operates the input device 55 and operates the “Register new group” button in D01, a screen shown in D03 of FIG. In D03, input of a new group name and selection of a store to be registered in the group are requested, an input field for a new group name is displayed, and a check box for selecting a store that can be registered in the group includes: A plurality of the store IDs or store names (store IDs here) are displayed in association with the store. Here, the stores that can be registered in the group are stores that are not registered in any group, and specifically, stores that are stored in the store DB shown in FIG.

  In D03, the operator operates the input device 55 to input a new group name, check and select each check box corresponding to a plurality of stores registered as a group store, and operate the “SET” button. The plurality of selected stores are set as group stores, and store IDs and group names of the plurality of stores are stored in association with each other in the group DB shown in FIG. In addition, the area name, store name, number of point members, total number of points earned, number of remaining points, and number of points used this month (number of lottery application used points and merchandise) stored in the store DB in association with the stored store ID The number of exchange points is deleted from the store DB and transferred to the group DB. The area name, the store name, and the number of point members are associated with the stored store IDs to obtain the total number. As for the number of points, the number of remaining points, and the number of points used in the current month, the group total obtained by adding the values for each store is associated with the stored group name.

  In D01, when the operator operates the input device 55 and operates the “add group store” button, a screen shown as D04 in FIG. In D04, selection of a group for adding a group store is requested, and a pull-down menu for selecting the group is displayed. In this pull-down menu, the group names stored in the group DB shown in FIG. 24C are displayed.

  In D04, when the operator operates the input device 55 to select a group to which a group store is to be added from the groups displayed in the pull-down menu, and operates the “Next” button, the screen shown in D05 in FIG. Is displayed on the display 54. In D05, the stores belonging to the group selected in D04 are displayed based on the stored contents of the group DB shown in FIG. 24B, and the store to be added to the group is requested and can be registered in the group. A plurality of check boxes for selecting an appropriate store are displayed in association with the store ID or store name (store ID here) of the store. Here, stores that can be registered in a group are stores that are not registered in any group, and are stores that are stored in the store DB shown in FIG.

  In D05, when the operator operates the input device 55 to check and select a check box corresponding to one or a plurality of stores to be added as a group store, and operates the “set” button, the selected store is displayed. It is newly added as a group store, and the store ID of the store selected in D05 is added to the group selected in D04 in the group DB shown in FIG. In addition, the area name, store name, number of point members, total number of points earned, number of remaining points, and number of points used this month (number of lottery application used points and merchandise) stored in the store DB in association with the added store ID The number of exchange points is deleted from the store DB and transferred to the group DB. The area name, the store name, and the number of point members are associated with the stored store IDs to obtain the total number. For the number of points, the number of remaining points, and the number of points used in the current month, the value of the added store is added to the group total.

  Thus, when a new group is set by the group setting means or a new store is added to the already set group, the control unit 52 functioning as a member identification information extracting means already uses the point management device 50. Among the registered membership card IDs, the membership card ID of the membership card issued at each store belonging to the group is extracted and extracted by the member identification information extraction means by the control unit 52 functioning as the store notification means. A process for notifying a member of the member card ID of a list of stores belonging to the group or the new store is performed.

  Specifically, when a new group is set, the control unit 52 functioning as the member identification information extracting unit changes the group DB shown in FIG. 24B to the newly set group. The store ID of each store to which the store belongs is extracted, and the member card ID including the extracted store ID is extracted from the point member information DB shown in FIG. When a new store is added, the store ID of each store belonging to the group to which the new store is added is extracted from the group DB, and the extracted store ID is extracted from the point member information DB. The member card ID including is extracted.

  Then, when a new group is set, the control unit 52 functioning as a store notification means notifies a member of the extracted membership card ID of a list of stores belonging to the new group. When a new store is added, a process for notifying the member of the extracted membership card ID of the new store is performed.

  Here, the process for notifying a list of stores or a new store is a list of stores or a new one for a member whose e-mail address is registered in the point member information DB in association with the extracted member card ID. This is a process of transmitting an e-mail indicating the store to the e-mail address. For members whose e-mail addresses are not registered in the point member information DB in association with the extracted member card ID, a list of stores or a group indicating a new store in the notification information DB shown in FIG. This is a process of storing the store addition information in association with the member card ID. When the information disclosure request (login request) is received from the operation terminal by performing this process, the stored group store addition is stored. Information (list of stores shown in D450-2 of FIG. 44 or new store shown in D450-1) is set in the group store additional information display area of the menu screen shown in D151 of FIG. 3 or D251 of FIG. The menu screen is distributed and notified.

  According to this, when a new group is set or a new store is added to an already set group, the group store is issued to the owner of the recording medium issued at each store belonging to the group. Since the list or the new store is notified, the member can recognize that there is a store that can be newly integrated.

  The display 54 and the input device 55 are examples of questionnaire information receiving means, and receive the contents of the questionnaire and the attribute information (gender, age) of the point member that is the subject of the questionnaire. Specifically, when the operator operates the point management device 50 to execute the questionnaire mode, a web content creation screen shown as D10 in FIG. In D10, a “Create Web Content” button and a “Send Questionnaire Mail” button are displayed.

  At D10, when the operator operates the input device 55 and operates the “Create Web Content” button, the web content creation software is activated, and the screen shown at D11 in FIG. In D11, the contents of the questionnaire can be created by an editing screen for creating a questionnaire to be published on the web in the html format.

  In D11, when the operator operates the input device 55 to create a questionnaire and operates the “public” button, the created questionnaire data is stored in association with the URL in the hard disk 53, and the questionnaire is stored. It is published on the web and can be viewed with the browser of the operation terminal.

  On the other hand, when the operator operates the input device 55 and operates the “Send Questionnaire Mail” button at D10, the mail software is activated and the questionnaire mail transmission screen shown at D12 in FIG. . In this D12, there are provided an input field for the title of the e-mail to be transmitted and the content to be transmitted (notification content), and a check box for designating the attribute of the point member to be transmitted (notification target). , Gender, date of birth, 10th generation male, 10th female, 20th male, 20th female, 30th male, 30th female, 40th male, 40th female, 50th male, 50th female, The group is classified into 14 groups of males in their 60s, females in their 60s, males in their 70s and over, and females in their 70s and over.

  At this D12, the operator operates the input device 55 to input a title (here, “Sweep Prize Questionnaire”), and selects a transmission target group by checking a check box (here, “male in 30s”). When the content to be transmitted is input (here, the URL of the questionnaire and the respondent will be hit by a digital camera by lottery) and the “Send” button is selected, the selected / input content is set. That is, the display 54 and the input device 55 are information (here, the questionnaire) that can specify the notification contents to be notified to the members (here, the contents of the questionnaire inputted as transmission contents) and the member card IDs of the members to be notified. It functions as a notification information setting means for setting target member attribute information).

  In addition, the control unit 52 extracts an e-mail address that extracts an e-mail address managed in the point member information DB in association with the notification target member card ID specified from the information set by the notification information setting unit. In this case, a point member that matches the attribute of the group selected in D12 (here, male in 30s) is identified from the gender and date of birth managed in the point member information DB, The member card ID of the identified point member is extracted, and the e-mail address associated with the member card ID is extracted.

  Further, the control unit 52 transmits an e-mail including notification information for providing the notification content set by the notification information setting unit to the e-mail address extracted by the e-mail address extracting unit. Here, a process is performed in which an e-mail including the URL of the questionnaire as notification information is transmitted from the external communication unit 51c to the e-mail address via the Internet.

  On the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 that has received this e-mail, the URL of the questionnaire is displayed as shown at D20 in FIG. The point member can use the Internet browser function of the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 by inputting or selecting the URL, and browse the questionnaire published on the web as shown in D21. Here, the point member checks a check box corresponding to an option corresponding to the contents of the questionnaire (here, a favorite gift option), and a member card ID (first member card ID) is entered in the member card ID input field at the lower left of the screen. , The second member card ID) and selecting the “apply” button, the point management device 50 receives the answer information indicating the checked option (ie, answer to the questionnaire) and the entered member card ID. Send to.

  When the point management device 50 receives the member card ID together with the answer information during the questionnaire period, it is associated with the lottery ID (in this case, 4035) of the lottery corresponding to the questionnaire in the lottery information DB shown in FIG. The member card ID is stored. In the point management device 50, the control unit 52 totals the number of selected options based on the answer information received during the questionnaire period. The result of the questionnaire is stored in the hard disk 53 and distributed to the system management device 40 in response to a request from the system management device 40 of each game arcade. If the questionnaire request source is another company, the result of the questionnaire is distributed to the other company via the Internet or the like, and is displayed on the display 54 if the questionnaire is unique to the card company.

  Thus, the point member's email address that matches the attribute information received by the point management device 50 on the questionnaire email transmission screen (D12 in FIG. 26) is the email address stored in the point member information DB. Since the process of transmitting the URL of the questionnaire addressed to the specified e-mail address is performed, the attribute information of the point member managed by the point management device 50 is requested from the game hall or another company Can be used for questionnaire surveys.

  The control unit 52 performs a process of storing, as notification information, questionnaire information indicating the contents of the questionnaire in association with each member card ID to be notified in the notification information DB illustrated in FIG.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 28, the control unit 52 starts the lottery process with the end of the lottery application period specified from each lottery ID stored in the lottery information DB shown in FIG. First, a lottery is performed (S82). As the lottery method, member card IDs corresponding to the number of winners are randomly extracted from the member card IDs stored in association with the lottery ID of the lottery (for example, a random number is generated and a membership card is generated according to the random number). ID) method.

  Then, the control unit 52 notifies the member of the notification content (in this case, the fact that the lottery was won), information that can specify the member card ID of the member to be notified (here, the member card ID of the winning member), and In the notification information DB shown in FIG. 23B, winning information indicating that the lottery is won is stored in association with the member card ID of the winning member (S83). The control unit 52 functioning as the e-mail address extracting unit is an electronic device managed in the point member information DB in association with the member card ID to be notified specified from the information set by the notification information setting unit. An e-mail address is extracted, and here, an e-mail address associated with the member card ID of the elected member is extracted based on the stored contents of the point member information DB shown in FIG. 23A (S84). Then, it is determined whether or not the electronic mail address is registered (S85). If it is determined in S85 that it is not registered (NO), the process ends (S89). When an information disclosure request (login request) is received from the operation terminal in this state, the winning information (D480-1 and D480-2 in FIG. 44) stored in S83 is shown in D151 in FIG. 3 or D251 in FIG. The winning information display area of the menu screen is set, and the menu screen is distributed and notified.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S85 that it is registered (YES), it is determined in the point member information DB whether the name and address are registered in association with the member card ID of the elected member (S86). ). If it is determined in S86 that it is registered (YES), registration of the name and address is not requested again, and the winning information shown in D30 of FIG. 29 is obtained by the control unit 52 functioning as the e-mail transmission means. An e-mail included as notification information is transmitted to the e-mail address (S87), and the process is terminated (S89). On the other hand, if it is determined not to be registered (NO) in S86, registration of the name and address is requested and the winning information shown in D31 of FIG. 29 is notified by the control unit 52 functioning as the e-mail transmission means. An electronic mail included as information is transmitted to the electronic mail address (S88), and the process is terminated (S89). Even if an information disclosure request (login request) is received from the operation terminal in this state, the winning information is not distributed because it is determined by the e-mail address management determining means described later that the e-mail address is managed.

  In the e-mail indicated by D30 in FIG. 29, only the fact that the lottery has been won is displayed. The card company in which the point management device 50 is installed sends out the prizes that have been won, with the registered name and address as the destination after sending the e-mail. On the other hand, in the e-mail indicated by D31 in FIG. 29, the fact that the lottery has been won is displayed, and the input of the name and address is requested, and the input field for the name and address is displayed. When the member inputs the name and address and operates the “registration” button, an e-mail including the input name and address is returned to the point management device 50, and the point member shown in FIG. In the information DB, the name and address included in the e-mail are registered in association with the e-mail address that is the transmission source of the e-mail. Then, in the point management device 50, the winning prize is registered in the shipping information DB (not shown) stored in the hard disk 53 in association with the name and address of the winning point member. The winning prize is sent out with the registered name and address as the destination.

  When the control unit 52 receives event information (D50 in FIG. 18) from the system management device of each store via the transfer device 70, the control unit 52 stores the event information in the hard disk 53, and shows the event information at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. Perform event information distribution processing.

  Here, the transfer device communication unit 51b functioning as the notification information setting means notifies the member of the notification content (the content of the event input as the transmission content here) and the member card ID of the member to be notified. Is specified (here, attribute information of the event target member selected as the transmission target).

  The control unit 52 functioning as the e-mail address extracting unit is an electronic device managed in the point member information DB in association with the member card ID to be notified specified from the information set by the notification information setting unit. An e-mail address is extracted, and here, based on the stored contents of the point member information DB shown in FIG. 23 (a), the event information is selected from the point members of the store from which the event information is transmitted (here, store A). The point member that matches the attribute of the transmission target included in is identified, the member card ID of the identified point member is extracted as a notification target, and the store of the event information transmission source store (here, A store) From the point members whose IDs are stored in the storage field of the mail delivery store, the points that match the attributes of the transmission target included in the event information. Identify cement member, it extracts the membership card ID and e-mail address of the point member which is the identified as the transmission object (S91 in FIG. 30).

  The control unit 52 functioning as the e-mail transmitting unit extracts an e-mail address extracted by the e-mail address extracting unit from the e-mail including the notification information for providing the notification content set by the notification information setting unit. In this example, an e-mail including the transmission content as notification information is transmitted from the external communication unit 51c to the e-mail address via the Internet. In other words, the control unit 52 functioning as the store information providing means stores the store information of the store with the store ID managed (stored) in the storage field of the mail delivery store in association with the member card ID in the point member information DB. A process of transmitting an e-mail including (event information) to an e-mail address managed in association with the member card ID is performed (S94 or S95 in FIG. 30).

  Further, in the notification information DB shown in FIG. 23B, the control unit 52 performs processing for storing event information indicating the contents of the event as notification information in association with each member card ID to be notified (FIG. 23). 30 S96).

  As shown in FIG. 30, the control unit 52 has a certain store (for example, store A: “distribution target store”) among the event information of each store stored in the hard disk 53 at a predetermined timing. Event information distribution processing for distributing event information is started, and in this event information distribution processing, store IDs of stores other than the distribution target store are stored as mail distribution stores. The e-mail including the event information of the other store is transmitted.

  Specifically, first, the control unit 52 functions as the e-mail address extracting unit to extract the notification target member card ID and the transmission target member card ID and e-mail address ( S91). Here, as shown in FIG. 18, since the event target member is a female member of store A, the member card ID of the female member of store A is extracted as a notification target, and store A is stored as a mail delivery store. The member's membership card ID and e-mail address are extracted as transmission targets. Next, the control unit 52 determines whether or not store IDs of stores other than the distribution target store are stored as mail distribution stores in association with each member card ID extracted as the transmission target (S92). ).

  If it is determined in S92 that the store IDs of other mail delivery stores are not stored (NO), the control unit 52 functioning as the e-mail transmission means performs the delivery as shown in D36 of FIG. An e-mail including only event information of the target store (store A here) is transmitted to the e-mail address extracted as the transmission target (S95).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S92 that the store ID of another mail delivery store (for example, B store) is stored (YES), the control unit 52 stores the event information of the other mail delivery store on the hard disk 53. It is determined whether it is stored in (S93). If it is determined in S93 that the event information is not stored (NO), the process proceeds to S95.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S93 that the event information is stored (YES), as shown in D35 of FIG. An e-mail including event information of store A) and event information of another mail delivery store (store B in this case) is transmitted to the e-mail address extracted as the transmission target (S94). As described above, when store IDs of stores other than the distribution target store are stored as mail distribution stores, an email including event information of the other stores is transmitted, so that a plurality of mail distribution stores are stored. Is stored, instead of a plurality of e-mails including event information for each mail distribution store, one e-mail including the event information of the plurality of mail distribution stores is distributed. Saves the trouble of receiving and checking multiple emails.

  Also, as shown in S94 or S95, among other group stores belonging to the group of stores registered by the member, an e-mail including store information of the store desired by the member is sent to the e-mail address of the member. Since it is transmitted, the convenience of members is improved.

  The control unit 52 that delivered the e-mail in S94 or S95 stores event information indicating the contents of the event as notification information in association with each member card ID to be notified in the notification information DB (S96). ), The process is terminated.

  Here, other functions of the control unit 52 will be described. In addition to updating and managing each DB as described above, the control unit 52 [1] Member card ID and point grant target information (today's usage amount) transmitted from the system management device 40 via the transfer device 70 [2] Management support screen transmission process based on a request from the system management device 40, [3] Registration request A (first registration request A or second registration request A) from the operation terminal Group store information provision processing based on reception, [4] Point member registration processing based on reception of registration request from operation terminal, [5] Member integration processing based on reception of member integration request from operation terminal, [6] Operation terminal Store list reply processing based on reception of group store list request from [7] Takeover processing based on reception of takeover request from operation terminal, and [8] Information disclosure request from operation terminal It performs a members-only page transmission process or the like based on trust.

  First, regarding the point addition process based on the reception of the membership card ID and the point grant target information (the amount used today) transmitted from the system management device 40 via the transfer device 70, the control unit 52 includes the point grant target Point addition for adding the number of points according to the amount used today, which is the collected point granting information, to the number of points associated with the member card ID collected by the information collecting means (transfer device communication unit 51b) It functions as a point addition processing means for performing processing, and here, takeover specifying information (takeover date and takeover source ID) is stored in association with the new member card ID (Sa19 and FIG. On condition that Sa21 is YES), for the number of points associated with the new member card ID, While taking over point addition processing that adds the number of points according to the amount used today corresponding to the registered member card ID and the number of points according to the amount used today corresponding to the new member card ID, the takeover specifying information is stored. On the condition that it has not been done (No in Sa21), the number of points corresponding to the amount used today corresponding to the registered member card ID is not added to the number of points associated with the new member card ID .

  The control unit 52 functions as an upper limit value setting means for setting an upper limit value of the number of points to be added to the points associated with the member card ID in the point addition processing by the point addition processing means. Then, 10 points per day are set as the upper limit value. Then, the control unit 52 functioning as a point addition processing means corresponds to the number of points corresponding to the amount used today corresponding to the registered member card ID and the new member card ID when performing the point addition processing at the time of takeover. On the condition that the total value with the number of points according to the amount used today exceeds the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means (NO in Sa15 or Sa25 in FIG. 22B described later), the upper limit Performs processing to add points.

  In this example, the control unit 52 functioning as a point addition processing means first performs a point granting process for assigning points on the day according to the amount used today, and then assigns the day points granted by the point granting process to the member card ID. A point addition process for adding the accumulated points associated with each other is performed.

  Specifically, first, the control unit 52 functioning as a point addition processing means receives the membership card ID, the remaining card amount, and the amount used today (FIG. 13A), which are stored in the remaining amount management DB. Then, the point giving process shown in FIG. 22B is performed for all the received membership card IDs (hereinafter referred to as “reception IDs”).

  That is, the control unit 52 first determines whether or not the reception ID is registered as a point member in the point member information DB shown in FIG. 23A, that is, the member whose reception ID is shown in the left column of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is stored in the card ID storage field (Sa11). If it is determined that the reception ID is registered (YES) in Sa11, the received today's usage amount corresponding to the reception ID is stored in the point member information DB in association with the reception ID. The accumulated usage amount is updated (Sa12), and points are given according to the current usage amount (Sa13). In Sa13, 10 points per day is set as the upper limit, and 1 point is awarded for every 1000 yen used today (that is, the amount stored as the usage amount for each business day in the usage amount DB).

  Next, the control unit 52 determines whether or not a point is stored in the storage field of the day point corresponding to the received ID in the point member information DB (Sa14). If it is determined in Sa14 that the current day point is not stored (NO), the point given in Sa13 in association with the received ID is stored as the current day point (Sa17), and the process is terminated. .

  On the other hand, the current day point is stored in Sa14 (YES), that is, the takeover source ID is stored in association with the reception ID by performing the takeover process described later, and any of Sa26, Sa27, or Sa28 is stored. If it is determined that the current day point has been stored, it is determined whether or not the sum of the stored current day point and the point given in Sa13 exceeds the upper limit of 10 points. (Sa15). If it is determined in Sa15 that the total value does not exceed the upper limit (NO), the total value is stored as a point on the current day in association with the reception ID (Sa18), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in Sa15 that the total value exceeds the upper limit (YES), 10 points that are the upper limit are stored as points on the current day in association with the reception ID (Sa16), and processing Exit. That is, even if the total value of the points given to the takeover source ID and the points given to the takeover destination ID exceeds the upper limit value, the upper limit value is set to the member who has taken over. Points that exceed the limit are not awarded, and points can be imparted fairly.

  If it is determined in Sa11 that the received ID is not registered (NO), it is determined whether or not the received ID is stored as the takeover source ID in the point member information DB (Sa19). If it is determined in Sa19 that the received ID is not stored as the takeover source ID (NO), no points are given (Sa20), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in Sa19 that the received ID is stored as the takeover source ID (YES), it is determined whether or not the takeover date corresponding to the takeover source ID is today in the point member information DB. (Sa20). If it is determined in Sa20 that the takeover date corresponding to the takeover source ID (for example, X00002 which is the takeover source ID of the membership card ID of X01439) is not today (NO), points are not given (Sa20), The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in Sa21 that the takeover date corresponding to the takeover source ID (for example, A00007, which is the takeover source ID of A01234) is today (YES), the received today use corresponding to the takeover source ID is used. In the point member information DB, the amount is added and updated to the accumulated usage amount stored in association with the takeover destination ID (A01234 here) associated with the takeover source ID (Sa22). In the same manner as above, points are given according to the amount used today (Sa23).

  That is, when the takeover source ID is stored (YES in Sa19) and the takeover date is today (YES in Sa21), the control unit 52 satisfies the condition that the takeover specifying information is stored. As a thing, a point corresponding to the amount used today corresponding to the takeover source ID is given, and as shown in Sa26, Sa27, or Sa28 described later, the point including the given point is a new member card that is the takeover destination ID. The takeover information point addition process stored in the storage field of the ID point of the day is performed. On the other hand, even if the takeover date and the takeover source ID are stored, the control unit 52 satisfies the condition that the takeover specifying information is not stored when the takeover date is not today (NO in Sa21). As a result, the points corresponding to the amount used today corresponding to the takeover source ID are not given.

  In other words, even if the takeover date and takeover source ID are stored in the storage field of takeover specifying information, if the takeover date is not today (for example, September 16), the stored information is: It is possible to specify that the takeover process has been performed after the point addition process for the takeover source ID (that is, the takeover process has been performed for the takeover source ID between the previous day's point addition process and the current day's point addition process). Since it is specified that the point addition processing at the time of takeover has already been performed on the date of the takeover date, not information, in this case, points according to the amount used today corresponding to the takeover source ID are not given. That is, the takeover specifying information is a takeover date of the day on which the point addition process is performed.

  Next, the control unit 52 determines whether or not a point is stored in the storage section for the point of the day corresponding to the takeover destination ID in the point member information DB (Sa24). If it is determined in Sa24 that the current day point is not stored (NO), the point given in Sa23 in association with the takeover destination ID is stored as the current day point (Sa27), and the process is terminated. To do.

  On the other hand, when the day point is stored in Sa24 (YES), that is, when it is determined that the day point is stored in any of the above-described Sa16, Sa17, or Sa18 due to the handover process described later. Determines whether or not the sum of the stored current day points and the points given in Sa23 exceeds the upper limit of 10 points (Sa25). If it is determined in Sa25 that the total value does not exceed the upper limit value (NO), the total value is stored as a point on the current day in association with the takeover destination ID (Sa28), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in Sa25 that the total value exceeds the upper limit (YES), 10 points that are the upper limit are stored as points on the current day in association with the takeover destination ID (Sa26), The process ends. That is, even if the total value of the points given to the takeover source ID and the points given to the takeover destination ID exceeds the upper limit value, the upper limit value is set to the member who has taken over. Points that exceed the limit are not awarded, and points can be imparted fairly.

  Note that the upper limit value of points given per day can be arbitrarily changed, and the point grant rate (here, 1 point for 1000 yen) can be arbitrarily changed.

  Next, the control unit 52 functioning as a point addition processing means stores all the member card IDs stored in the point member information DB in the point storage field on the day after performing the point grant processing. A point addition process is performed in which the points are added and updated with respect to the points stored in the accumulated point storage column, and the points stored in the point storage column on the day are set to zero.

  Next, regarding [2] management support screen transmission processing based on a request from the system management device 40, when the control unit 52 receives the fixed report transmission request (see FIG. 17), the period included in the fixed report transmission request The average use value calculation processing is performed for calculating the average value (average use amount) of the use value for each attribute information (gender and age). Specifically, based on the gender and date of birth of the point member managed in the point member information DB and the usage amount of the point member by business day managed in the usage amount DB, the gender and age Processing to calculate the average usage amount is performed. Here, point members managed in the point member information DB are males in their teens, females in their teens, males in their 20s, females in their 20s, males in their 30s, females in their 30s, males in their 40s, females in their 50s. , Women in their 50s, men in their 60s, women in their 60s, men in their 70s and over, women in their 70s and over, and the average amount of money spent per day in each group Calculations are based on weekly data and monthly data. Then, based on the calculated data, the control unit 52 generates a standard report representing the average usage amount for each attribute information (gender, age) in a bar graph format as shown in D45 of FIG. A process of transmitting from the communication section 51b to the system management apparatus 40 that is the transmission source of the standard report transmission request is performed via the transfer apparatus 70. Then, in the system management apparatus 40 that has received the standard report, the standard report display screen shown in D45 is displayed on the display 44.

  In this way, the point management device 50 calculates the average usage amount for each attribute information (here, gender and age) and distributes it to each game hall. It is possible to grasp customer acquisition activities for customers of each attribute. For example, referring to the graph of the average usage amount of D45, it is understood that the average usage amount of men in their 30s is large (that is, it is a good customer), and a favorite gift for the email address of men in their 30s Can be used to attract customers, such as increasing the types of prizes popular with men in their 30s (for example, cigarettes), and to provide preferential services such as providing information on game machines with poor settings. In addition, by grasping that the average amount of money spent by women is small, it is possible to conduct preferential treatments such as events that can be played on recommended stands exclusively for female members, and to conduct sales activities that anticipate an increase in sales.

  Further, when receiving the questionnaire result transmission request, the control unit 52 creates a report representing the selection number of each option of the questionnaire result stored in the hard disk 53 in a bar graph format as shown in D60 of FIG. The generated report is transmitted from the transfer device communication unit 51b via the transfer device 70 to the system management device that has transmitted the questionnaire result transmission request. In the system management apparatus 40 that has received this report, a questionnaire result display screen shown in D60 is displayed on the display 44.

  In this way, the system management device 40 can receive the questionnaire result from the point management device 50 and obtain the result of the questionnaire for the point member. can do. For example, it is possible to attract customers by grasping the favorite prizes of customers of each attribute and arranging the prizes according to the target customer segment.

  Further, when the control unit 52 receives the point status transmission request, based on the stored contents of the group DB shown in FIG. 24B and the store DB shown in FIG. Whether the store in which the management apparatus 40 is installed belongs to any group (that is, the store ID of the store is stored in the group DB), or does not belong to any group (that is, the store Whether the store ID is stored in the store DB) is determined. When it is determined that the store (for example, store A) belongs to the group, the control unit 52 stores the storage contents of the group DB related to the group as shown in D70 of FIG. 20, and the transfer device communication unit 51b. To the system management device 40 of the store via the transfer device 70. On the other hand, when it is determined that the store (for example, P store) does not belong to the group, the control unit 52 stores the storage contents of the store DB related to the store as shown in the same D71. To the system management device 40 of the store via the transfer device 70.

  In this way, the system management device 40 receives the point status of the group to which the store belongs or the point status of the store from the point management device 50, and refers to the number of product exchange use points included in the point status. Since it is possible to grasp the number of product exchange use points that the group or store has to bear the consideration for this month, it can be used as a measure for the settlement of the consideration. As described above, for a lottery application, each store bears a uniform fee (for example, ¥ 10,000 per month), not a price corresponding to the number of lottery application use points.

  [3] Regarding the group store information providing process based on the reception of the registration request A (first registration request A or second registration request A) from the operation terminal, the control unit 52 includes the operation terminal (PC6, mobile phone 7, Based on the reception of the store information request (here, the first registration request A or the second registration request A including the member card ID which is the store specifying information) from the card unit 20, the kiosk terminal 30), the store management means ( 1st determination which determines whether group identification information (group name) is matched with store ID of the store specified from the store specific information included in the received store information request in the group DB and store DB) It functions as a group identification information determination means for performing the above.

  Specifically, when the control unit 52 receives a registration request A (first registration request A or second registration request A) including, for example, a member card ID of the store A, the store ID of the store A is displayed. It is stored in the group DB shown in 24 (b), and it is determined that the group name (in this case, ◎◎ group) is associated with the store ID of the A store. In addition, when the control unit 52 receives a registration request A (first registration request A or second registration request A) including, for example, a member card ID of a P store, the store ID of the P store is changed to FIG. It is determined that the group name is not associated with the store ID of the P store.

  The control unit 52 associates the group identification information with the group identification information in the store management unit (group DB) on the condition that the group identification information determination unit determines that the group identification information (group name) is associated. It functions as a group store information providing means for providing the operation terminal with group store information that can recognize stores of other store IDs, and is included in the received store information request in the store management means here Same as the area identification information (area name) managed in association with the shop ID of the shop specified from the shop specifying information (that is, the membership card ID included in the first registration request A or the second registration request A) Group store information capable of recognizing stores of other store IDs associated with the area identification information is provided to the operation terminal.

  Specifically, the control unit 52 receives, for example, a registration request A (first registration request A or second registration request A) including a membership card ID of the store A, and the group identification information determination unit determines the store A. Store ID is stored in the group DB shown in FIG. 24B, and it is determined that the group name (here, ◎◎ group) is associated with the store ID of the A store. Group store information that can recognize the store B associated with “Tokyo”, which is the area name managed in association with the store ID of the store A, is provided. Further, the control unit 52 receives a registration request A (first registration request A or second registration request A) including, for example, a member card ID of the X store, and the store ID of the X store is determined by the group identification information determination unit. When it is determined that a group name (in this case, ◎◎ group) is stored in the group DB shown in FIG. 24B and associated with the store ID of the X store, the store of the X store Group store information that can recognize the C store associated with “Kanagawa Prefecture”, which is the area name managed in association with the ID, is provided.

  And the control part 52 which functions as a group store information provision means is the store identification information (namely, member included in the 1st registration request A or the 2nd registration request A) contained in the said store information request received by the said group identification information determination means. On the condition that it is determined that the group identification information is associated with the store ID of the store identified from the card ID), the store information of the store of the other store identification information associated with the group identification information Confirmation information for confirming whether or not to provide (event information) is provided to the operation terminal as the group store information, and the confirmation information here is store information of the specified store. It also confirms whether or not you wish to provide.

  Specifically, the control unit 52 can receive a registration request A (first registration request A or second registration request A) including, for example, a member card ID of A store, and can recognize another B store as described above. When providing group information, whether the store A and the store B are recognizable as shown in D112 in FIG. 4 or D213 in FIG. Confirmation information for confirming whether or not to provide event information of the store B is provided. Further, the control unit 52 receives the registration request A (first registration request A or second registration request A) including, for example, the membership card ID of the X store, and as described above, the group store information that can recognize other C stores. 4, or as shown in D 216 of FIG. 4 or D 216 of FIG. 9, the X store and the C store can be recognized, and whether or not the event information of the X store is desired to be provided, and Confirmation information for confirming whether or not to provide event information of the store C is provided. In the confirmation information, the store display order is such that the store specified from the membership card ID included in the received registration request is displayed first, and then other stores belonging to the same region of the same group are displayed.

  Next, regarding [4] point member registration processing based on reception of a registration request from the operation terminal, the control unit 52 receives the first member card ID from the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30). When the registration request A (first registration request A or second registration request A) including the initial password is received, the received registration request is based on the stored contents of the encoding information DB shown in FIG. An encoding information collation process is performed to determine whether or not the personal identification number stored in association with the first membership card ID included in A matches the initial personal identification number included in the received registration request A. If the first member card ID is registered without making such a determination, even if the first member card ID is entered incorrectly on the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7, it is registered erroneously. The coincidence of numbers is also determined. When the first registration request A is received from the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30, the first member card ID included in the first registration request A is the one read from the IC chip or read from the magnetic stripe. Since it is specified by the member card ID specifying process from one member ID, there is no mistake and it is not always necessary to perform the encoding information collation process, but the second registration request A is received from the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 In order to perform the same processing as that performed, the encoding information collation processing is performed.

  Similarly, the control unit 52 receives a registration request A (first registration) including the second member card ID and the last four digits of the other system member ID from the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30). When the request A or the second registration request A) is received, it is associated with the second member card ID included in the received registration request A based on the stored content of the encoding information DB shown in FIG. Encoding information collation processing is performed to determine whether or not the last four digits of the stored other system member ID match the last four digits of the other system member ID included in the received registration request A. If the second member card ID is registered without making such a determination, even if the second member card ID is entered incorrectly on the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7, it will be registered erroneously. The match of the system member ID is also determined. When the first registration request A is received from the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30, the second membership card ID included in the first registration request A is read from the IC chip or other than the magnetic stripe. Since it is specified by the member card ID specifying process from the system member ID, there is no mistake and it is not always necessary to perform the encode information collating process, but the second registration request A is received from the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 In order to perform the same processing as that performed, the encoding information collation processing is performed.

  Moreover, the control part 52 is based on having received the said registration request B (1st registration request B or 2nd registration request B) from the operation terminal (PC6, the mobile telephone 7, the card unit 20, the kiosk terminal 30), It functions as attribute information determination means for determining whether or not the attribute information (gender, date of birth) included in the received registration request B has already been managed. Specifically, it is determined whether the gender and date of birth included in the registration request B are already registered in the point member information DB shown in FIG.

  In the case of being already registered here, first, a member of the store that has already been registered as a point member picks up a member card of another member of the store, and the member card of the picked-up member card This is a case where a registration request B including an ID, the gender and date of birth of the member has been transmitted, and second, a member card of another store of the member of the store already registered as a point member The registration request B including the member's card ID and the member's gender and date of birth has been sent. Third, the same gender and date of birth as the member's gender and date of birth This is a case where the date is accidentally registered as attribute information of other members of the store. Here, the first case is a case where the point member should not be registered, and the second case and the third case are cases where the point member should be registered.

  Further, the controller 52 determines that the member identification information (first registration request B or the second registration request B) included in the registration request B (first registration request B or second registration request B) on condition that it is determined that the attribute information is determined by the attribute information determination unit. The store ID of the store corresponding to the member card ID (that is, the member card ID included in the registration request B) specified from the first member specifying information or the second member specifying information is associated with the already managed attribute information. It functions as a store specifying means for specifying the store ID of the store corresponding to the registered membership card ID. Specifically, since information indicating that the store ID is included in a predetermined portion (here, the first character) of the member card ID is stored, the store ID is extracted from the member card ID based on the information. Thus, the store ID is specified.

  Further, the control unit 52 includes member specifying information (first member specifying information or second member specifying information) included in the registration request B (first registration request B or second registration request B) specified by the store specifying unit. Whether the store ID of the store corresponding to the member card ID specified from (i.e., the member card ID included in the registration request B) matches the store ID of the store corresponding to the already registered member card ID. It functions as a store match determination means for determining whether or not. In the case of coincidence here, the first case and the third case are included.

  Further, the control unit 52, on the condition that it is determined by the store match determination means that the store matches, the member specifying information (first member specifying) included in the registration request B (first registration request B or second registration request B). Function as member identification information extracting means for extracting the member card ID specified from the information or the second member specifying information) (that is, the member card ID included in the registration request B) and the already managed member card ID. It is. Thereby, the target membership card ID is extracted in the first case and the third case.

  Further, the control unit 52 is specified from the first member specifying information included in the received first registration request B based on the reception of the first registration request B from the store terminal (the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30). The member card ID is registered in the point member information DB. Specifically, the member card ID included in the first registration request B received from the card unit 20 (that is, the first member specifying information). And the member card ID (member ID which is member identification information) and the member card ID included in the first registration request B received from the kiosk terminal 30 (ie, the member specified from the member ID which is the first member specifying information) Card ID) is registered.

  The control unit 52 functioning as a registration unit receives the second registration request B from the information terminal (PC 6 or mobile phone 7), and then receives the second member specifying information included in the received second registration request B. Is registered in the point member information DB. Specifically, the member card ID included in the second registration request B received from the information terminal (that is, the second member specifying information) (Member card ID which is member identification information) is registered.

  Here, the control unit 52 functioning as a registration unit determines that the verification is OK in the encoding information verification process and that the attribute information determination unit determines that the attribute information is not registered, or the attribute information is registered. Even if it is determined that the store ID is determined, the membership card ID is registered on the condition that the store ID is determined not to match by the store match determination unit.

  [5] Next, regarding the member integration processing based on the reception of the member integration request (login request and integrated ID information) from the operation terminal, the control unit 52 functioning as the group identification information determination unit includes the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone) 7. Based on the reception of the member specifying information (first member specifying information or second member specifying information) or the member card ID from the card unit 20, the kiosk terminal 30), it is specified from the received member specifying information. Whether the group identification information (group name) is associated with a store ID of a store corresponding to the member card ID or the integrated member identification information (integrated member card ID) that is the received member card ID. A second determination is made. The group identification information determination means for performing the second determination is whether or not the store ID of the store corresponding to the integration source member card ID is a store ID of a store belonging to the group set by the group setting means. It is also a group corresponding store determination means for determining whether or not.

  Specifically, based on the reception of the member integration processing request, the store ID is specified (extracted) from the login ID which is the member card ID included in the login request already received from the operation terminal, It is determined whether or not a group name is associated with the store ID, that is, whether or not the store ID is a store ID of a store belonging to a group stored in the group DB shown in FIG.

  Further, the controller 52 determines that the group member store ID has the group name associated with the store ID, that is, on the condition that the store ID of the store belonging to the group is determined. Member identification information (integration target member card ID) that is another member card ID that is desired to be integrated, or member specification information that can specify the integration target member card ID (first member specification information or second member specification) It functions as an integrated reception page transmitting means for transmitting an integrated reception page for receiving input of information to the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30).

  The control unit 52 receives the integration source member card ID or the member specification information (first member specification information or second member specification information) that can specify the integration source member card ID from the operation terminal, It functions as the same group store specifying means for specifying the integrated source member card ID specified from the received member specifying information, or the same group store belonging to the group of stores corresponding to the received integrated source member card ID. . The control unit 52 functioning as an integrated reception page transmitting unit transmits the integrated reception page including information that can identify the same group store specified by the same group store specifying unit to the operation terminal, and Among the same group stores specified by the same group store specifying means, it is possible to accept selection of stores desired to be integrated, and the integration target member card ID or the integration target member card ID in the selected same group store The integrated reception page for receiving the input of the member specifying information (first member specifying information or second member specifying information) that can specify the ID is transmitted to the operation terminal.

  Specifically, first, the control unit 52 functioning as the same group store specifying unit specifies the same group store belonging to the store group of the store ID specified from the login ID. That is, based on the stored contents of the group DB shown in FIG. 24B, for example, when the specified store ID is the store ID of the store A, it is registered as the group store of the group A to which the store A belongs. A store, B store, C store, and X store are identified. Next, the control unit 52 is specified from the store of the store ID specified from the login ID and the other registered member card IDs registered in association with the login ID among the specified same group stores. The store with the store ID is identified as an integrated store, and the store that is not registered in association with the login ID is identified as an unintegrated store. Then, the control unit 52 functioning as an integrated reception page transmitting unit operates the integrated reception page (D160 and D161 in FIG. 5 or D260 and D261 in FIG. 11) indicating the identified integrated store and unintegrated store as the operation. Send to the terminal.

  Further, the control unit 52 can specify the integration target member card ID input on the integration reception page from the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30) or the integration target member card ID. Based on the reception of the member specifying information (first member specifying information or second member specifying information), the received integration target member card ID or the integration target member card ID specified from the received member specification information The store ID of the corresponding store functions as the same group store determination means for determining whether or not the store ID of the same group store that belongs to the group of stores corresponding to the integration source member card ID. From the operation terminal, the member card ID to be integrated input on the integration reception page or the member special member that can specify the member card ID to be integrated Along with information (first member specifying information or second member specifying information), selection information that can specify the same group store selected on the integration reception page (that is, unintegrated in which the member card ID is input in D161 of FIG. 5) Based on the reception of the store ID of the store or the store ID of the unintegrated store corresponding to the button operated in D260 of FIG. Corresponding to the integration target member card ID by determining whether the store ID of the store corresponding to the specified integration target member card ID is the store ID of the same group store specified from the received selection information It is determined whether the store ID of the store to be used is the store ID of the same group store belonging to the group of stores corresponding to the integration source member card ID.

  The control unit 52 also supports member identification information for associating the integration source member card ID with the integration target member card ID on the condition that the same group store determination means determines that the store ID is the same group store. The store ID of the store corresponding to the integration source member card ID does not match the store ID of the store corresponding to the integration target member card ID. As a condition, the member identification information association processing is performed.

  Further, the control unit 52 functioning as a member identification information association processing means has a plurality of integration target member card IDs input on the integration reception page or a plurality of member specification information capable of specifying the plurality of integration target member card IDs. When receiving (first member specifying information or second member specifying information), a plurality of integration target member card IDs received or a plurality of integration target member card IDs specified from the received plurality of member specification information On the condition that the store IDs of the stores corresponding to are not the same, the member identification information associating process for associating the plurality of integration target member card IDs with the integration source member card ID is performed.

  Specifically, the integrated ID information including one member card ID (second member specifying information) input on the integrated reception page and the store ID of the unintegrated store where the member card ID is input has been received. Based on that, the member card ID included in the integrated ID information has been registered as a point member, and the store ID specified from the member card ID and the store ID of the unintegrated store included in the integrated ID information (That is, the member card ID entered in the input field for a certain unintegrated store is the member card ID of the unintegrated store) And the issuer store of the member card in which the integration target member card ID is recorded, and the issuer store of each member card belongs to the same group. Cormorant. That is, in the integrated reception page, when the member card ID of the store B is input in the input field of the store B that is an unintegrated store, the member identification information association process is performed, while the store C that is an unintegrated store When the member card ID of the store B is input in the input field, the member identification information associating process is not performed.

  In addition, integrated ID information including a plurality of member card IDs (second member identification information) input on the integrated reception page and store IDs of a plurality of unintegrated stores input with the member card IDs has been received. The membership card ID included in the integrated ID information is registered as a point member, and the store ID specified from the member card ID and the store ID of the unintegrated store included in the integrated ID information are If they match (that is, the member card ID input in the input field for a certain unintegrated store is the member card ID of the unintegrated store), the member card issuing store in which the integration source member card ID is recorded Different from the issuing store of the membership card in which the integration target membership card ID is recorded, the issuing stores of the membership cards in which a plurality of integration target membership card IDs are recorded are different, and each membership card Issued store of the soil is determined to belong to the same group, do the member identification information association processing. That is, on the integrated reception page, the member card ID of the store B is input to the input column of the store B which is an unintegrated store, and the member card ID of the store C is input to the input column of the store C which is an unintegrated store. In the case where the member identification information is associated, the member card ID of the store B is input to the input column of the store B which is an unintegrated store, and the input column of the store C which is an unintegrated store is entered. When the member card ID of store B is input, the member identification information association process is not performed.

  The control unit 52 functions as a point summing unit that sums the number of points corresponding to each member identification information associated by the member identification information association processing. The details of the member identification information association processing by the member identification information association processing means described above and the point summation processing by the point summation means will be described later with reference to FIG. 37 as member integration processing.

  The control unit 52 functions as a summation condition setting means for summing (integrating) the points corresponding to a plurality of member card IDs. Here, the member integration request (that is, login) that is the summation request received. Request member and integrated ID information) each member card ID is recorded in a different store, and each member card ID is included in the member integration request that is the received sum request It is set as a summation condition that the card issuing store belongs to the same group set by the group setting means.

  The control unit 52 is included in the received summation request based on the fact that the member integration request (that is, the login request and the integrated ID information), which is a summation request including a plurality of member card IDs, is received from the operation terminal. It functions as a total condition determination unit that determines whether or not a plurality of member card IDs satisfy the total condition set by the total condition setting unit. Here, the member card ID included in the integrated ID information is a point member. The store ID of the unintegrated store that is registered and included in the integrated ID information matches the store ID specified from the member card ID included in the integrated ID information (that is, an input field for a certain unintegrated store) Each member card ID included in the member integration request is recorded). Different issues store each member card, and issues a store of each membership cards each membership card ID is recorded included in the membership integration request is determined summed condition that belong to the same group. This summation condition determination means corresponds to the same group store determination means.

  [6] Regarding the store list reply process based on the reception of the group store list request from the operation terminal, the control unit 52 functioning as the store specifying means includes the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal). 30) Based on the reception of the group store list request from 30), the store ID is specified (extracted) from the login ID included in the login request already received from the operation terminal. The control unit 52 functioning as the group store specifying unit is set by the group setting unit (display 54 and input device 55) as a group store of the group to which the store having the store ID specified by the store specifying unit belongs. Identify each store.

  Further, the control unit 52 functions as a store list reply unit that distributes the list of stores specified by the group store specifying unit to the operation terminal. Specifically, as shown in D440 of FIG. 43 described later, a screen including a list of stores is returned from the external communication unit 51c to the operation terminal that is the transmission source of the group store list request via the Internet. .

  [7] Regarding the takeover process based on the reception of the takeover request from the operation terminal, the control unit 52 reissues a new member card in place of the member card in which the registered member card ID already registered is recorded. Is performed as a takeover processing means for performing a takeover process for associating the number of points associated with the registered member card ID with the new member card ID recorded on the new member card. Here, the handover process is performed based on the reception of the handover request from the operation terminal.

  In addition, based on the reception of the takeover request from the operation terminal, the control unit 52 is a member card ID of a member card in which the registered member card ID and the new member card ID included in the received takeover request are issued at the same store. It functions as the same store determination means for determining whether or not. Specifically, the control unit 52 functions as the store specifying unit, thereby receiving the takeover request from the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30). By specifying the store ID of each store corresponding to the registered member card ID (old member card ID) and the new member card ID included in the handover request, and functioning as the store match determination unit, the store specifying unit It is determined whether or not the identified store IDs match. The store specifying unit and the store match determining unit correspond to the same store determining unit.

  The control unit 52 functions as a registration determination unit that determines whether or not the new member card ID included in the received handover request is registered in the point member information DB shown in FIG. .

  Then, the control unit 52 functioning as a takeover processing unit is determined to be a member card ID of a member card issued at the same store by the same store determination unit, and is determined not to be registered by the registration determination unit. As a condition, takeover processing is performed.

  Further, the control unit 52 determines whether there is another registered member card ID registered in association with the registered member card ID included in the received handover request based on the reception of the handover request. It functions as an association determination means for determination, and specifically, is registered in the point member information DB shown in FIG. 23A in association with the registered member card ID included in the received takeover request. It is determined whether or not there is another member card ID. For example, when the registered member card ID is A00001, it is determined that there is another member card ID (X00003 here) registered in association with it, and when the registered member card ID is A00004, It is determined that there is no other member card ID registered in association.

  Then, the control unit 52 functions as a takeover processing unit, and performs the takeover process on the condition that it is determined by the association determination unit, and functions as a registration unit to respond to the takeover request. The new member card ID included is registered in association with the other registered member card ID. Details of the handover process described above will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

  Finally, regarding the member-only page distribution process based on the reception of the information disclosure request from the operation terminal, the control unit 52 performs the process of distributing the login screen to the operation terminal in response to the reception of the login screen distribution request. .

  Further, the control unit 52 receives an information disclosure request including a member card ID or member specifying information (first member specifying information or second member specifying information) from the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30). Login that is a member card ID included in the received information disclosure request or a member card ID specified from the member identification information included in the received information disclosure request based on the reception of (login request here) It functions as the same member determining means for determining whether or not there is a member card ID associated with the member identification information (login ID).

  Further, the control unit 52 transmits a member-dedicated page dedicated to the member including at least the number of points corresponding to the login ID to the operation terminal on the condition that the same member determining unit determines that the same member does not exist. It functions as a member-dedicated page transmission unit that transmits to the operation terminal a member-dedicated page that includes at least the total number of points added by the point summation unit on the condition that it is determined by the member determination unit.

  That is, the login request which is a part of the information disclosure request includes the membership card ID (that is, the login ID) and the personal identification number of the membership card registered as the point member. Any member card ID registered in association with a point member, that is, if the login ID is stored in the storage column of the member card ID shown in the left column of FIG. Information related to the login ID is stored in the point information stored in the point member information DB shown in FIG. 23A or the notification information DB shown in FIG. 23B in association with the login ID. A single member-only page (so-called “My Page”) that displays group store additional information, questionnaires, event information, and winning information is distributed. Even if the login ID is stored in the takeover source ID column shown in the right column of FIG. 23A, the login is not performed and the member-dedicated page is not distributed.

  Here, the control unit 52 functions as a point use processing unit that performs processing for allowing the member to use the total number of points combined by the point totaling unit in order to enjoy a predetermined service. Here, based on the reception of the point use request which is a part of the information disclosure request, it functions as the point use processing means.

  Here, the “predetermined service” is an application for a lottery using points, and the “processing for using the predetermined service” is as shown in D410 of FIG. 42 described later. From the external communication unit 51c, the point use screen displaying the content of the lottery during the application period extracted from the lottery information DB and the number of points usable for the application for the lottery extracted from the point member information DB is displayed on the Internet. The application request is distributed to the operation terminal that is the transmission source of the login request, and the application information indicating the application for the lottery of the prize selected on the point use screen is received from the operation terminal. The member card ID included in the login request is stored in the storage field of the applicant member card ID corresponding to the selected prize, and the membership information is stored in the point member information DB. From the number of points stored in association with the card ID, a processing for subtracting the number of points required to apply for the selected prize.

  Further, the “predetermined service” is an exchange for a product using points, and the “processing for using the predetermined service” is preliminarily indicated as D412 in FIG. A point use screen displaying the contents of set exchangeable products and the number of points usable for exchange with the products extracted from the point member information DB is sent from the external communication unit 51c via the Internet. It is distributed to the operation terminal that is the transmission source of the login request, receives exchange information indicating exchange with the product selected on the point use screen from the operation terminal, and stores the exchange information in the point member information DB in the member card ID. This is a process of subtracting the number of points necessary for exchanging with the product from the number of points stored in association with each other.

  The control unit 52 receives the confirmation request (here, the login request) including the first member identification information (here, the member card ID) from the store terminal (the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30). Notification target for determining whether the member card ID specified from the first member specifying information included in the confirmation request is the notification target member card ID specified from the information set by the notification information setting means Functioning as determination means and functioning as notification information return means for returning the notification information to the store terminal on condition that the notification target determination means determines that the membership card ID is a notification target It is.

  The confirmation request includes not only a request transmitted from the store terminal (card unit 20 or kiosk terminal 30) but also a request transmitted from the information terminal (PC 6 or mobile phone 7). Therefore, the control unit 52 functioning as a notification target determination unit performs the determination even when a confirmation request is received from the information terminal, and the control unit 52 functioning as a notification information return unit is notified by the notification target determination unit. The notification information is sent back to the information terminal on the condition that it is determined that the membership card ID is.

  Further, the control unit 52 determines whether or not the point member information DB manages the email address in association with the member card ID specified from the first member specifying information included in the confirmation request. The control unit 52 functioning as a determination unit and functioning as the notification information return unit is conditioned on the condition that the e-mail address management determination unit determines that the e-mail address is managed. Is not returned to the store terminal (the operation terminal here).

  Details of the functions of the notification object determination unit, the notification information return unit, and the e-mail address management determination unit will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 (b), (c), and (d).

  Hereinafter, processing performed by the point management apparatus 50 will be described with reference to FIGS. The point management device 50 is waiting for access from the outside (S000). When information is received by access from the outside, the received information is transmitted from the information terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7). It is determined whether or not the information is transmitted from a store terminal (card unit 20 or kiosk terminal 30), specifically, the hard disk 53 stores the IP address of the transmission source terminal of the information. (S100). If it is determined in S100 that the received information is transmitted from the store terminal (YES), that is, it is determined that the IP address of the transmission source terminal of the information is stored, the process proceeds to SH100 in FIG. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the received information is transmitted from the information terminal (NO), that is, the IP address of the transmission source terminal of the information is not stored, the information is shown in FIG. It is an empty mail transmitted from the information terminal as shown in D102 (S101), an initial screen access request transmitted from the information terminal when the URL is clicked on the screen shown in D103 (S102), or It is determined whether the login screen access request transmitted from the information terminal is operated by operating the “login” button in the bookmarked login screen indicated by D150 (S103). If the information does not correspond to any of S101 to S103 (NO in S103), the process returns to the state of waiting for an external access (S000).

  If it is determined in S101 that a blank mail has been received (YES), as shown in D103 of FIG. 3, an e-mail including a URL for accessing the initial screen is converted into information indicating the sender of the blank mail. A reply is made to the terminal (S104), and the process returns to S000. If it is determined in S102 that the initial screen access request has been received (YES), the initial screen indicated by D104 in FIG. 3 is distributed to the information terminal that is the source of the initial screen access request (S105). ), Go to S106. If it is determined in S103 that a login screen access request has been received (YES), the login screen indicated by D150 in FIG. 3 is distributed to the information terminal that has transmitted the login screen access request (S150). , The process proceeds to S200 of FIG.

  The point management device 50 that delivered the initial screen to the information terminal in S105 determines whether the “new registration” button has been operated (S106), the “member” button has been operated (S107), or “notification” on the initial screen. "Button is operated (S108), or it is determined whether the" site guidance "button is operated (S109).

  If it is determined in S107 that the “member” button has been received (YES), the log-in screen shown in D150 of FIG. 3 is distributed to the information terminal (S150), and FIG. Proceed to S200. If it is determined in S108 that the “notification” button has been received (YES), the notification screen is distributed to the information terminal (S160), and reception of an initial screen access request is awaited. If it is determined in S171 that the initial screen access request has been received (YES), the process returns to D105 and the initial screen is distributed again. If it is determined in S109 that the “site guidance” button has been received (YES), the site guidance screen is distributed to the information terminal (S170), and the process proceeds to S171.

  If it is determined in S106 that the “new registration” button has been received (YES), the screen shown in D110 of FIG. 4 is distributed to the information terminal (S110), and the D110 is displayed. In the screen shown, it is determined whether the “first member card” button has been operated (S111) or the “second member card” button has been operated (S112). If there is no operation within the predetermined time in S111 or S112, a screen (not shown) indicating timeout is delivered to the information terminal, and the process returns to S105. If it is determined in S111 that the “first member card” button has been received (YES), the registration screen for the first member card shown in D111 of FIG. 4 is distributed to the information terminal. Then (S113), the process proceeds to S115. If it is determined in S112 that the “second member card” button has been received (YES), the second member card registration screen shown in D113 of FIG. 4 is distributed to the information terminal. Then (S114), the process proceeds to S115.

  In S115, it waits for reception of the second registration request A transmitted from the information terminal. If the second registration request A is not received within the predetermined time in S115, a screen (not shown) indicating timeout is delivered to the information terminal, and the process returns to S105. If it is determined in S115 that the second registration request A has been received (YES), the encoding information matching process is performed (S116). If it is determined in step S116 that the verification is NG (NO), a screen indicating that the input is incorrect is distributed to the information terminal (S117), and the process returns to S113 or S114 to accept re-input. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S116 that the verification is OK (YES), the store specifying means determines from the member card ID (first member card ID or second member card ID) included in the received second registration request A. The store ID is extracted (S118), and the group identification information determination unit determines whether or not group identification information (group name) is associated with the store ID in the store management unit (group DB and store DB). It is determined whether or not the store with the store ID belongs to any group (S119).

  The group identification information is associated with the store ID extracted from the member card ID included in the second registration request A in S119 (YES), that is, the store with the store ID is stored in the group DB, and If it is determined that it belongs, whether there is another store ID associated with the same region identification information as the region identification information (region name) managed in association with the store ID Is determined (S120).

  If it is determined in S120 that there is another store ID associated with the same area name (YES), the process proceeds to S121, and group store information is provided as shown in D112 or D114 of FIG. The screen which can recognize the store of the other store ID matched with the same area name as the said store ID first by the store with the store ID extracted from the member card ID included in the second registration request A Is delivered to the information terminal, and the process proceeds to S123.

  According to this, when the store of the store ID specified from the member card ID included in the second registration request A received from the information terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7) operated by the member belongs to the group, the group store Since the information is provided to the information terminal, the member can be made aware of the existence of another group store belonging to the group.

  Further, even when there are many stores belonging to the group (for example, in the case of a large group), the identification is made from the member card ID included in the second registration request A received from the information terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7) operated by the member. The group store information that can recognize the group store located in the same area as the store with the store ID (that is, the store where the member is likely to visit) is provided to the information terminal, thus improving the convenience of the member To do.

  Note that it is determined in S119 that group identification information is not associated with the store ID (NO), that is, the store with the store ID does not belong to any group and is stored in the store DB. If it is determined that there is no other store ID associated with the same area name in S120 (NO), the process proceeds to S122, and group store information provision is provided in D112 or D114 of FIG. By means of the means, a screen capable of recognizing only the store having the store ID extracted from the member card ID included in the second registration request A is distributed to the information terminal, and the process proceeds to S123.

  In S123, reception of the second registration request B transmitted from the information terminal is awaited. If the second registration request B is not received within the predetermined time in S123, a screen (not shown) indicating timeout is delivered to the information terminal, and the process returns to S105. If it is determined in S123 that the second registration request B has been received (YES), the process proceeds to S130 in FIG.

  The point management device 50 that has received information from the store terminal (the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30) in S100 proceeds to FIG. 33 and has received a registration confirmation request including the member card ID or the member ID from the store terminal ( SH100), whether the “member card ID manual input” button was operated (SH101) or the “notification” button was operated on the initial screen (D201 in FIG. 9) stored and displayed in advance at the store terminal (SH102) or whether the “site guidance” button has been operated.

  If it is determined in SH101 that the “member card ID manual input” button has been received (YES), the screen shown in D202 of FIG. 9 is distributed to the store terminal (SH155). Return to S000. When the member card ID is input and the “Send” button is operated on the screen shown in D202, a registration confirmation request including the input member card ID is transmitted from the store terminal to the point management device 50. And YES is determined in S000, S100, and SH100. If it is determined in SH102 that the “notification” button has been received (YES), the notification screen is distributed to the store terminal (SH160), and the process returns to S000. On the other hand, if it is determined NO in SH102, it is determined that the “site guidance” button has been received, and the site guidance screen is distributed to the information terminal (SH170). Return.

  If it is determined at SH100 that a registration confirmation request has been received (YES), it is determined whether or not a member ID is included in the registration confirmation request. If it is determined in SH 104 that the member ID is included in the registration confirmation request (YES), the registration confirmation request is transmitted from the kiosk terminal 30 and read from the magnetic stripe of the member card by the card reader 33. Since the member ID is included as member specifying information, the member card ID specifying process for specifying the member card ID corresponding to the member ID is performed (SH105), and the process proceeds to SH106. On the other hand, if it is determined in SH 104 that the member ID is not included in the registration confirmation request (NO), the registration confirmation request is transmitted from the card unit 20 and the IC chip of the member card is received by the card R / W 25. The member card ID is a member card ID that includes the member card ID read out from the card unit 20 or is transmitted from the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30 and manually entered by the member visually observing the display area of the member card. Since it is not necessary to perform the membership card ID specifying process, the process proceeds to SH106 as it is.

  In SH106, whether or not the membership card ID included in the received registration confirmation request or the membership card ID specified in SH105 is registered as a point member, that is, the membership card ID shown in the left column of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is stored in the storage column. If it is determined in SH106 that the member card ID is registered as a point member (YES), the login screen shown in D250 of FIG. 9 is distributed to the store terminal (SH150), and S200 of FIG. Proceed to On the other hand, if it is determined in SH106 that the member card ID is not registered as a point member (NO), the screen shown in D210 of FIG. 10 is distributed to the store terminal (SH107).

  The point management apparatus 50 that has delivered the screen indicated by D210 in SH107 indicates whether the “new registration” button has been operated (SH108) or the “card takeover” button has been operated (SH109) on the screen indicated by D210. judge. If it is determined in SH109 that the “card takeover” button has been received (YES), the takeover screen indicated by D221 in FIG. 10 is delivered to the store terminal (SH110). Proceed to S400 of 38. If it is determined in SH108 that the “new registration” button has been received (YES), the process proceeds to SH111.

  In SH111, it is determined whether the member card ID included in the received registration confirmation request or the member card ID specified in SH105 is the first member card ID. If it is determined in SH111 that the member card ID is the first member card ID (YES), the registration screen for the first member card shown in D211 of FIG. 10 is distributed to the store terminal (SH113). ), Go to SH115. On the other hand, when it is determined in SH111 that the member card ID is not the first member card ID (NO), that is, the member card ID is the second member card ID, the second member card ID shown in D214 of FIG. The registration screen is distributed to the store terminal (SH114), and the process proceeds to SH115.

  In SH115, the reception of the first registration request A transmitted from the store terminal is awaited. If the first registration request A is not received within a predetermined time in SH115, a screen (not shown) indicating timeout is delivered to the store terminal, and the process returns to SH107. If it is determined in SH115 that the first registration request A has been received (YES), the encoding information collation process is performed (SH116). When it is determined that the collation is NG (NO) in SH116, a screen indicating that the input is incorrect is distributed to the store terminal (SH117), and the process returns to SH113 or SH114 to accept re-input. On the other hand, if it is determined that the collation is OK (YES) in SH116, the store specifying unit uses the member card ID (first member card ID or second member card ID) included in the received first registration request A. The store ID is extracted (SH118), and whether or not group identification information (group name) is associated with the store ID in the store management unit (group DB and store DB) by the group identification information determination unit, that is, It is determined whether or not the store with the store ID belongs to any group (SH119).

  In this SH 119, group identification information is associated with the store ID extracted from the member card ID included in the first registration request A (YES), that is, the store of the store ID is stored in the group DB, and If it is determined that it belongs, whether there is another store ID associated with the same region identification information as the region identification information (region name) managed in association with the store ID Is determined (SH120).

  If it is determined in SH120 that there is another store ID associated with the same area name (YES), the process proceeds to SH121, as shown in D211 and D213, or D215 and D216 in FIG. A store of another store ID associated with the same area name as the store ID, starting with the store of the store ID extracted from the member card ID included in the first registration request A by the group store information providing means Is distributed to the information terminal, and the process proceeds to SH123.

  According to this, when the store of the store ID specified from the member card ID included in the first registration request A received from the store terminal (card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30) operated by the member belongs to the group, Since the group store information is provided to the store terminal, the member can recognize the presence of other group stores belonging to the group.

  Further, even when there are many stores belonging to the group (for example, in the case of a large group), the member card ID included in the first registration request A received from the store terminal (card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30) operated by the member. Since the group store information that can recognize the group store located in the same area as the store with the store ID identified from (that is, the store where the member is likely to visit) is provided to the store terminal, the convenience of the member Will improve.

  Note that it is determined in SH 119 that group identification information is not associated with the store ID (NO), that is, the store with the store ID does not belong to any group and is stored in the store DB. If it is determined that there is no other store ID associated with the same area name in SH120 (NO), the process proceeds to SH122, and in D211 and D213, or D215 and D216 in FIG. Then, the group store information providing means distributes a screen capable of recognizing only the store with the store ID extracted from the member card ID included in the first registration request A to the store terminal, and proceeds to SH123.

  In SH123, reception of the first registration request B transmitted from the store terminal is awaited. If the first registration request B is not received within a predetermined time in SH123, a screen (not shown) indicating that a timeout has occurred is distributed to the store terminal, and the process returns to SH107. If it is determined in SH123 that the first registration request B has been received (YES), the process proceeds to S130 in FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 34, in S123 or SH123, the registration request B (first registration request B or second registration request) from the operation terminal (PC 6 or mobile phone 7 as an information terminal, card unit 20 or kiosk terminal 30 as a store terminal). The point management device 50 that has received B) determines whether or not the attribute information (gender, date of birth) included in the received registration request B has already been managed (registered) by the attribute information determination means ( S130). If it is determined in S130 that the attribute information is not registered (NO), since it is the first registration as a point member, the point member information DB corresponds to the member card ID included in the received registration request. At the same time, the personal identification number and attribute information are registered (S141). If the registration request B includes an e-mail address (YES in S142), the e-mail address is also registered in association with the member card ID (S143). Further, when the store ID of the mail distribution store is included in the registration request B (YES in S144), the store ID is stored in the storage column of the mail distribution store in association with the member card ID (S145). Then, a registration completion screen (not shown) indicating that the registration is completed is distributed to the operation terminal (S146). If the operation terminal is an information terminal, the process proceeds to S171, and if it is a store terminal, S000 is performed. Proceed to

  According to this, in the point management device 50, when the second registration request B is transmitted from the information terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7) possessed by the member, the membership card ID is registered and installed in the store. Member identification information is registered even if the first registration request B is transmitted from the store terminal (the card unit 20, the kiosk terminal 30). Even a good store member can register member identification information as a point member, giving all store members an opportunity to enjoy the benefits of a point member fairly.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S130 that the attribute information is registered (YES), the store identification means extracts the store ID from the member card ID included in the registration request B and the registered information The store ID is extracted from the membership card ID already managed in association with the attribute information (S131), and the store match determination means determines whether or not the store ID extracted in S131 matches (S132). . If it is determined in S132 that the store IDs do not match (NO), it is the registration of the membership card of a different store by the same member, and it should be registered as a point member.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S132 that the store IDs match (YES), a member who has already registered a member card of a store as a point member picks up a member card of another member of the store, If you are trying to register the picked-up member card separately from your own member card, or you accidentally register the same gender and date of birth as the attribute information of other members of the store In this case, the member identification information extraction unit extracts the member card ID included in the registration request B and the already managed member card ID (S133), and proceeds to S134.

  According to this, the attribute information included in the registration request B is already managed, and the store corresponding to the member card ID already registered in association with the managed attribute information is included in the registration request. If the store corresponding to the member card ID matches, the member card ID included in the registration request B and the already registered member card ID are extracted, so the recording medium of another member is picked up. It is possible to identify the possibility that a member intends to register the recording medium of the other member separately from his / her own recording medium.

  In S134, it is determined whether or not both of the membership card IDs extracted in S133 are the first membership card ID. If it is determined in S134 that both are the first member card IDs (YES), the first member management device 100 installed in the store that issued the recording medium on which the first member card ID is recorded is displayed. On the other hand, the transmission of the name and address managed in association with each first member card ID is requested (S135), and reception of the name and address is awaited (S137). If it is determined in S137 that the name and address are received (YES), it is determined whether or not the received names and addresses match (S138).

  The case where it is determined that they do not match (NO) in S138 is a case where the same gender and date of birth as the member's gender and date of birth are accidentally registered as attribute information of other members of the store. Yes, since it should be registered as a point member, the process proceeds to S141 and thereafter. On the other hand, when it is determined that they match (YES) in S138, a member who has already registered a membership card of a store as a point member picks up the member card of another member of the store and picks it up This is a case where the membership card is to be registered separately from the membership card and should not be registered as a point member. Therefore, the membership card ID extracted in S133 is displayed on the display 54 (S139), and the membership card ID is registered. An error screen (not shown) indicating that the operation has not been performed is distributed to the operation terminal (S140). If the operation terminal is an information terminal, the process proceeds to S171. If the operation terminal is a store terminal, the process proceeds to S000. move on.

  If it is determined in S134 that both are not the first membership card ID (NO), that is, both the membership card IDs extracted in S133 are the second membership card ID, the membership card ID is displayed on the display 54. Then (S135), the process proceeds to S141 and thereafter in order to register the second member card ID as a point member. The operator who sees the second member card ID displayed in S135 associates the second member card ID with the second member card ID for the store that issued the recording medium on which the second member card ID is recorded. The name and address managed at 200 are inquired by telephone or the like, and the name and address are acquired. When the operator determines that the acquired names and addresses match each other, the operator operates the input device 55 to perform processing for deleting the registrations in S141, S143, and S145.

  Proceeding to FIG. 35, the point management device 50 that has distributed the login screen to the operation terminal (PC 6 or mobile phone 7 as an information terminal, card unit 20 or kiosk terminal 30 as a store terminal) in S150 or SH150, It waits for the reception of a login request transmitted from the operation terminal (S200).

  Specifically, as shown in D150 of FIG. 3, a login screen on which a registered member card ID and password input field is displayed is distributed to the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 and displayed on the display. Is displayed. On this login screen, when the point member operates the operation key, inputs the member card ID and password, and operates the “login” button, the entered member card ID and password are temporarily stored. A login request including the membership card ID and the password is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet.

  As described above, in the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7, when the member card ID and the password are entered on the login screen shown in D150 of FIG. 3, the screen (URL) is registered in the bookmark (favorite). The entered membership card ID and password are stored in a cookie. When the registered bookmark is selected, the login screen of D150 is displayed with the membership card ID and password stored in the cookie being input. When the “login” button is operated, the login screen is displayed. A login request including the registered membership card ID (ie, login ID) and password is transmitted to the point management apparatus 50 via the Internet.

  For the card unit 20 and the kiosk terminal 30, as shown in D250 of FIG. 9, a login screen in which an input field for a registered password is displayed is displayed on the display. In this login screen, the card unit 20 displays the member card ID read by the card R / W 25 from the IC chip of the registered member card that has been inserted. In the kiosk terminal 30, the registered member that has been inserted. The member card ID specified by the member card ID specifying process is displayed on the basis of the member card ID read from the magnetic stripe of the member card by the card reader 33, and the member card ID is manually input at the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30. If it has been entered, the manually entered membership card ID is displayed. On this login screen, when the point member operates the operation key, inputs the password, and operates the “login” button, the displayed member card ID and the input password are temporarily stored. At the same time, a login request including the member card ID and the password is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet.

  If no login request is received from the information terminal within the predetermined time in S200, a screen (not shown) indicating timeout is delivered to the information terminal, and the process returns to S105. If it is determined in S200 that a login request has been received (YES), the membership card ID and password included in the login request and the membership card ID and password stored in the point member information DB are Collation is performed, and it is determined whether or not the collation is OK (S201). When it is determined that the verification is NG (NO) in S201, an error screen indicating that the verification is NG is distributed (S202). If the operation terminal is an information terminal, the process proceeds to S171, and the store terminal If there is, proceed to S000. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the verification is OK (YES), the member card ID (that is, the login ID) included in the received login request is specified (S203), and the specified login ID is set in the login request. The information is stored in association with the IP address of the operation terminal (hereinafter referred to as “transmission source terminal”) as the transmission source (S204), and the process proceeds to S205.

  Thus, by storing the login ID in association with the IP address, the member integration processing request (S260), the takeover processing request (S262), and the registration information update request (S264) transmitted from the transmission source terminal. ), Group store list request (S 265), point use request (S 266), questionnaire response information (S 270), name / address registration information (S 280) at the time of winning, and integrated ID information (S 307 in FIG. 37) Even if the ID is not included, the login ID stored in association with the IP address of the transmission source terminal can be specified. Accordingly, a combination of the login request including the login ID, the registration information update request (S264), the group store list request (S265), or the point use request (S266) is an information disclosure request including the member card ID. The combination of the login request including the login ID and the integrated ID information (S307 in FIG. 37) is a member integrated request including a plurality of member card IDs.

  In S205, the point stored in the point member information DB in association with the login ID is specified. In S206, the specified point is displayed on the menu screen (if the transmission source terminal is an information terminal, D151 in FIG. 3). If the transmission source terminal is a store terminal, a predetermined area of the menu screen shown in S251 in FIG. 9 is set, and the group store additional information setting process (S210) and questionnaire setting are further set for the menu screen. Processing (S220), event information setting processing (S230), and winning information setting processing (S240) are performed.

  Specifically, in the group store additional information setting process of S210, as shown in FIG. 36A, it is determined whether or not the group store additional information is stored in the notification information DB in association with the login ID. (S211). If it is determined that there is no group store additional information stored in S211 (NO), the fact that there is no additional group store is set in the group store additional information display area of the menu screen (S213), and the process proceeds to S220. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S211 that group store additional information is stored (YES), it is indicated by D450-1 or D450-2 in FIG. 44 according to the contents of the stored group store additional information. Information (that is, new store additional information or new group group store list information) is set in the group store additional information display area of the menu screen (S212), and the process proceeds to S220.

  Here, D450-1 indicates that a new store has been added to the group to which the store with the store ID extracted from the member card ID (for example, the member card ID of the A store shown in D150 or D250) included in the login request belongs. , A screen shown to the member of the member card ID, and the added new store (here, Z store) is displayed. D450-2 indicates that a new group has been set for the store with the store ID extracted from the member card ID included in the login request (for example, the member card ID of the P store (not shown)). A list of group stores (here, P store, Q store, R store) belonging to the set new group (here, □□ group) is displayed.

  According to this, when a new group is set or a new store is added to an already set group, the group store is issued to the owner of the membership card issued at each store belonging to the group. Since the list or the new store is notified, the member can recognize that there is a store that can be newly integrated.

  In the questionnaire setting process of S220, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), it is determined whether or not a questionnaire is stored in the notification information DB in association with the login ID by the notification target determination unit (S221). If it is determined in S221 that the questionnaire is not stored (NO), the fact that there is no questionnaire is set in the questionnaire display area of the menu screen (S224), and the process proceeds to S230.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S221 that the questionnaire is stored (YES), the e-mail address management determination means registers an e-mail address in the point member information DB in association with the stored login ID. It is determined whether it has been performed (S222). If it is determined in S222 that the e-mail address is registered (YES), the questionnaire information that is the notification information is not set by the notification information return means, and the questionnaire information has been distributed by e-mail. Is set in the questionnaire display area of the menu screen (S225), and the process proceeds to S230.

  If it is determined in S222 that the e-mail address is not registered (NO), the information shown in D460 of FIG. 44 showing the questionnaire is set in the questionnaire display area of the menu screen by the notification information return means. (S223), the process proceeds to S230. In D460, the point member operates the operation key, checks the check box corresponding to the option according to the contents of the questionnaire (here, the option of the favorite prize), and selects the “Apply” button. Reply information indicating the checked option (that is, answer to the questionnaire) is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet.

  In the event information setting process of S230, as shown in FIG. 36C, the notification target determination unit determines whether or not event information is stored in the notification information DB in association with the login ID. If it is determined in S231 that the event information is not stored (NO), the fact that there is no event information is set in the event information display area of the menu screen (S234), and the process proceeds to S240.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S231 that the event information is stored (YES), as in S222, the e-mail address management determination means associates the e-mail address in the point member information DB in association with the login ID. Is registered (S232). If it is determined in S232 that the e-mail address is registered (YES), the event information that is the notification information is not set by the notification information return means, and the event information has already been distributed by e-mail. Is set in the event information display area of the menu screen (S235), and the process proceeds to S240.

  If it is determined in S232 that the e-mail address is not registered (NO), the information shown in D470 of FIG. 44 showing the event information is displayed in the event information display area of the menu screen by the notification information return means. After setting (S233), the process proceeds to S240. In D470, the event information input in D50 of FIG. 18 is displayed.

  According to this, event information of a certain store can be provided to a member who is a member of the store and whose e-mail address is not registered. For members who have registered an e-mail address and registered the store ID of the store as a mail delivery store, the event information of the store is electronic as shown in S94 or S95 of FIG. It is included in the mail and sent to the electronic mail address.

  In the winning information setting process of S240, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), the notification target determining means determines whether the winning information is stored in the notification information DB in association with the login ID (S241). ). If it is determined in S241 that the winning information is not stored (NO), the fact that there is no winning information is set in the winning information display area of the menu screen (S245), and the process proceeds to S250.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S241 that the winning information is stored (YES), as in S222, the e-mail address management determination means associates the e-mail address in the point member information DB in association with the login ID. Is registered (S242). If it is determined in S242 that the e-mail address is registered (YES), the notification information return means does not set the winning information that is the notification information, and the corresponding selection information has been distributed by e-mail. Is set in the winning information display area of the menu screen (S246), and the process proceeds to S250.

  If it is determined in S242 that the e-mail address is not registered (NO), it is determined whether the name and address are registered in the point member information DB in association with the login ID (S243). .

  If it is determined in S243 that the name and address are registered (YES), the information shown in D480-1 in FIG. 44 showing the winning information is displayed on the menu screen by the notification information return means. The area is set (S247), and the process proceeds to S250. In D480-1, the fact that the lottery has been won is displayed as in D30 in FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S243 that the name and address are not registered (NO), the information shown in D480-2 of FIG. 44 displaying the winning information and the input request for the name and address is displayed on the menu screen. The winning information display area is set (S244), and the process proceeds to S250. In D480-2, as in the case of D31 in FIG. 32, the fact that the lottery has been won is displayed, the input of the name and address is requested, and the input column for the name and address is displayed. 44, when the point member operates the operation key, inputs the name and address in the input field, and operates the “Register” button, the registration information including the input name and address is displayed. And transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet.

  According to these group store additional information setting processing, questionnaire setting processing, event information setting processing, and winning information setting processing, points are registered from the store terminal (card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30) and no e-mail address is registered. Notification can be sent to the member by returning the notification information to the store terminal. In addition, notification information is quickly notified by e-mail to the point member who has registered from the information terminal (PC6, mobile phone 7), while the confirmation request is received for the point member. Since the notification information is not returned, useless duplicate transmission of the notification information to the point member who has already received the notification information by electronic mail is prevented.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the point management device 50 that has performed the processes of S210, S220, S230, and S240 associates the login ID with the group store additional information, questionnaire information, event information, Then, the winning information is erased (S250), the set menu screen is stored (S251), and when the transmission source terminal is the information terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7) by the member-dedicated page transmission means, FIG. When the menu screen shown in D151 and the transmission source terminal is a store terminal (card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30), the menu screen shown in D251 in FIG. 9 is distributed as a member-only page (S252).

  The point management device 50 that has distributed the menu screen in S252 transmits a member integration processing request (S260), a takeover processing request (S262), and registration, which are transmitted from the operation terminal in response to a button operation or input on the menu screen. Information update request (S264), group store list request (S265), point use request (S266), questionnaire response information (S270), name / address registration information (S280) at the time of winning, and logout request (S290) It will be in the state to wait for reception.

  If it is determined in S260 that the member integration processing request has been received (YES), the process proceeds to FIG. The store ID is extracted from the log-in ID (S300), and whether or not a group name is associated with the store ID (that is, the store ID is stored in the group DB shown in FIG. 24B). It is determined whether or not the store ID belongs to a group (S301).

  If it is determined in S301 that the group name is not associated with the store ID (that is, it is not the store ID of the store belonging to the group), the error screen displaying the message “Cannot be integrated because it is not a group store” is operated. Distribution to the terminal (S302), and the process proceeds to S316. On the other hand, if it is determined in S301 that the group name is associated with the store ID (that is, the store ID of the store belonging to the group), the store of the store ID extracted in S300 by the same group store determination unit (E.g., store A) is identified as a group store (here, store A, store B, store C, and store X) belonging to the same group (here, ◎◎ group) (S303), A store with a login ID (here, A store) and a store with another member card ID registered in association with the login ID (here, X store) are identified as integrated stores (S304), and the login Stores that are not registered in association with the ID (here, store B and store C) are specified as unintegrated stores (S305), and the process proceeds to S306. When the membership card IDs of all group stores are registered in association with the login ID, the unintegrated store is not specified, and the unintegrated store is not displayed on the integrated reception page.

  In S306, when the transmission source terminal is an information terminal by the integrated reception page transmitting means, the integrated reception page shown in D160 and D161 of FIG. 5 displaying the specified group name, integrated store, and unintegrated store. When the transmission source terminal is a store terminal, the integrated reception page of D260 and D261 in FIG. 11 displaying the specified group name, integrated store, and unintegrated store is displayed. Is distributed to the store terminal, and the process proceeds to S307.

  In S307, it waits for reception of integrated ID information transmitted from the transmission source terminal. If the integrated ID information is not received within the predetermined time in S307, a screen (not shown) indicating timeout is delivered to the transmission source terminal, and the process returns to S252. If it is determined in S307 that the integrated ID information has been received (YES), the same group store determination means determines S308 and S310.

  First, in S308, whether or not the member card ID (first member card ID or second member card ID) included in the integrated ID information received in S307 has been registered as a point member, specifically, the integrated ID The member card ID included in the information is stored in the member card ID storage field shown in the left column of FIG. 23A, and the personal identification number associated with the member card ID and the integrated ID information are stored in the integrated ID information. It is determined whether or not the included PIN number matches. If it is determined in S308 that the user is not registered as a point member (NO), an error screen displaying a message “Please register for point member” is distributed to the operation terminal (S309). The process proceeds to S316. On the other hand, if it is determined in S308 that the user has been registered as a point member (YES), the process proceeds to S310.

  In S310, whether or not the store ID of the unintegrated store included in the integrated ID information received in S307 matches the store ID specified from the member card ID included in the integrated ID information, that is, included in the integrated ID information. It is determined whether or not the member card ID entered in the input field for a certain unintegrated store (for example, store B) is the member card ID of the unintegrated store. If it is determined in S310 that the store IDs do not match (NO), for example, if the member card ID of store B is entered in the input field of store C, the member integration process is not performed and “ An error screen displaying the message “It is not a membership card ID” is distributed to the operation terminal (S311), and the process proceeds to S316. On the other hand, if it is determined in S310 that the store IDs match (YES), that is, if the member card ID of the B store is entered in the input field of the B store, the process proceeds to S312.

  In S312, as member integration processing, member identification information association processing is performed by the member identification information association processing means, and point summation processing is performed by the point summation means. Specifically, when a member integration process for integrating a login ID (for example, A00001) and a member card ID of an unintegrated store (here, B00777) is performed, A00001 and B00777 are stored in the point member information DB. Both the member card IDs are registered in association with each other by arranging them vertically, and the attribute information corresponding to each member card ID, the mail distribution store, the accumulated use amount, and the accumulated points storage field are integrated. The attribute information associated with both member card IDs is stored in the storage column of the integrated attribute information, and the storage column of the integrated mail distribution store is associated with each member card ID. The mail distribution store is integrated and stored, and in the storage column of the integrated cumulative usage amount, the cumulative usage amount associated with each member card ID is integrated (added) and stored, and the integrated cumulative points are stored. In the storage column, the total number of points obtained by integrating (summing up) the accumulated points associated with each member card ID is stored. However, even if the member integration process is performed, in the point member information DB, the password number, the day point, and the storage field of the takeover identification information are not integrated, and are stored corresponding to each member card ID. .

  That is, in the first embodiment, as shown in S308, the member integration process is performed only when all the membership card IDs to be integrated are already registered as point members. In the first embodiment, as shown in S309, when the member card ID included in the integrated ID information is a member card ID of an unintegrated store, that is, the stores of the member card IDs to be integrated are not the same, and The member integration process is performed only when the store is a group store belonging to the same group.

  Accordingly, the point member information DB, which is a point management means, corresponds to the integration source member card ID (here, the member card ID of the A store and the X store) that has already been registered in the point member information DB from the operation terminal. The member card ID of a store different from the store specified from the integration source member card ID, and the integration target member card ID already registered in the point member information DB (here, the member card ID of the store B) The integration source member card ID and the integration target member card ID are registered in association with each other on condition that a member integration request for integration is received (that is, they are not the same store).

  In addition, the point member information DB, which is a point management means, from the operation terminal to the integration source member card ID already registered in the point member information DB (here, the member card ID of A store and X store) A member card ID of a store belonging to the same group as the store identified from the integration source member card ID, and an integration target member card ID already registered in the point member information DB (here, a member card of store B) ID), the integration source member card ID and the integration target member card ID are registered in association with each other on the condition that a member integration request for integrating (ID) is received (that is, they are in the same group).

  In other words, in the first embodiment, in addition to the condition that they are not the same store and the same group, it is determined that the determination is YES in S310 as an integration condition. In other words, in the first embodiment, in S303 to S305, stores that are not the same and belong to the same group are returned to the operation terminal as unintegrated stores. As a result, the member integration process is performed on the condition that they are not in the same store and in the same group.

  The point management device 50 that has performed the member integration processing in S312 identifies the integrated points in S313, and if the transmission source terminal is an information terminal in S314, the integrated registration completion screen shown in D162 of FIG. Is distributed to the information terminal, and when the transmission source terminal is the store terminal, the integrated registration completion screen shown in D262 of FIG. 11 is distributed to the store terminal, and the process proceeds to S315. In D162 or D262, the integrated store and the points after integration are displayed.

  In S315, the point set on the menu screen stored in S251 is updated to the integrated point specified in S313, and in S316, reception of a menu screen access request is awaited (S316). If it is determined in S316 that the menu screen access request has been received (YES), the process returns to S252 to distribute the menu screen updated in S315.

  As described above, when a member integration request for integrating the integration source member card ID and the integration target member card ID is received, the store identified from the integration source member card ID and the integration target member card ID Since it is possible to integrate only when the store specified from the group store is a group store, the points corresponding to each member card ID can be added together and used to improve the number of customers at the group store .

  Further, when a member integration request for integrating the integration source member card ID and the integration target member card ID is received, the store specified from the integration source member card ID and the store specified from the integration target member card ID Since the integration is performed only when the membership card is different, the points of the member who lost the membership card recorded with the membership card ID may be integrated with the points of other members who picked up the membership card. It is possible to reduce the risk that a member who has lost the membership card suffers a disadvantage. That is, if integration is performed even if the stores match, the member who picks up the membership card can also use the points of the member who lost the membership card, and the member who lost the membership card arbitrarily However, according to this, since the integration is not performed when the stores match, the disadvantage is not incurred.

  Furthermore, if a member has two member cards at one store, they must have two member cards even if there is an upper limit (for example, 10 points) in the points given per day. 10 points can be obtained with each membership card, and if the two membership cards are merged, double points can be obtained and used, but according to this, when the stores match Is not integrated, so there is no such inconvenience.

  In addition, since the integration source member card ID and each store corresponding to the integration target member card ID do not match, for example, the member of the store A picks up the member card of another store A at the store A When trying to integrate the member card of the other store A picked up and the member card of his own store B, the integration is performed, but the member card of the other store A picked up is tried to be integrated. The member who owns the A store membership card and is usually already registered as a point member, or is trying to integrate with the own store A membership card to be registered. In many cases, integration can be prevented.

  If it is determined in D262 in FIG. 35 that a takeover processing request has been received (YES), that is, it is determined that a takeover processing request has been received from the information terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7), the takeover screen shown in D170 in FIG. The information is distributed to the information terminal (S263), and the process proceeds to S400 in FIG.

  In S400, it waits for reception of the takeover request transmitted from the operation terminal. If no takeover request is received within the predetermined time in S400, a screen (not shown) indicating timeout is distributed to the operating terminal, and if the operating terminal is an information terminal, S252 If the operation terminal is a store terminal, the process returns to SH107. If it is determined in S400 that the takeover request has been received (YES), whether or not the new member card ID included in the takeover request has been registered in the point member information DB by the registration determining means, that is, FIG. It is determined whether or not it is stored in the storage column of the membership card ID shown in the left one column of 23 (a) (S401). If it is determined in S401 that the registration has been completed (YES), an error screen indicating that the transfer cannot be performed is distributed to the operation terminal (S402), and the reception of the menu screen access request is awaited (S403). ). If it is determined in S403 that a menu screen access request has been received (YES), the process returns to S252 and the menu screen stored in S251 is distributed. On the other hand, if it is determined in S401 that the registration has not been completed (NO), the process proceeds to S405 and subsequent steps, and a takeover process is performed. The determination of S401 is performed because the following problem occurs when the takeover process for the registered new member card ID is permitted.

  Specifically, when a takeover process for a registered new member card ID is permitted and the point corresponding to the new member card ID is invalidated along with the takeover process, before transmitting the takeover request, If a new member card ID is registered and a new member card is used, and a takeover request is sent after points are given to the new member card ID, the points associated with the new member card ID are invalid The problem of becoming will arise.

  In addition, when a transfer process for a registered new member card ID is permitted and the points corresponding to the new registered member card ID are not invalidated and the points corresponding to the registered member card ID are added together with the transfer process. An owner of a registered member card picks up a registered member card of another person, and issues a takeover request including the registered member card ID of the other person and the self-registered member card ID as a new member card ID. When transmitted, there arises a problem that the points corresponding to the other member's registered member card ID are added to the points corresponding to the new member card ID.

  Therefore, in the first embodiment, since the determination in S401 is performed and the handover process is performed on the condition that the new member card ID is not registered, these problems do not occur. In other words, the number of points associated with the registered new membership card ID is not invalidated, and the number of points associated with the registered new membership card ID is another member's registered membership. The number of points associated with the card ID does not add up and the other person does not lose.

  In S405, the encoding information collation process is performed for an unregistered new member card ID included in the handover request. If it is determined in step S405 that collation is NG (NO), a screen indicating that the input is incorrect is distributed to the operation terminal (S407), and the process proceeds to S403. On the other hand, if it is determined in S405 that the verification is OK (YES), the point member information verification process is performed for the registered member card ID included in the handover request (S406). If it is determined that the collation is NG (NO) in S406, the process proceeds to S407.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the verification is OK in S406 (YES), the store identification means extracts the store ID from the registered member card ID and the new member card ID included in the handover request (S408), It is determined by the matching determination means (same store determination means) whether or not the store IDs extracted in S408 match (S409). If it is determined in S409 that the store IDs do not match (NO), an error screen indicating that the store cannot be taken over is distributed to the operation terminal (S410), and the process proceeds to S403. On the other hand, if it is determined in S409 that the store IDs match (YES), the handover process from S412 onward is performed. According to this, since the handover process is performed for the membership card ID of the membership card issued at the same store, the handover process is performed for the membership card ID of the membership card issued at another store. There is no fear.

  In S412, in the point member information DB, the takeover processing means performs the takeover process by registering a new member card ID instead of the registered member card ID included in the takeover request, and in S413, the new member The takeover date is stored in association with the card ID, the registered member card ID is stored as the takeover source ID, and a takeover completion screen indicating that the takeover is completed is delivered to the operation terminal in S414. The process proceeds to S403.

  In the information terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7) that has received the transfer completion screen, the membership card ID and password stored in the cookie are the new membership card ID and registration entered on the screen shown in D170 of FIG. Will be logged in to the point member website with the new member card ID and password after rewriting, and after that renewal, it will not be possible to log in with the member card ID and password before rewriting. become.

  As described above, since the takeover processing is performed based on the reception of the takeover request from the operation terminal operated by the owner of the member card, the point management device 50 and the member management device provided in the store (first In the member management apparatus 100 and the second member management apparatus 200), it is not necessary to assemble a program associated with transmission / reception of a takeover request or to provide an apparatus for performing the transmission / reception, and the cost for the takeover process is reduced. Further, in the point management system 1 including the point management device 50, it is not necessary to provide a member management device for transmitting the takeover request in the store.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 39, the takeover process performed by the control unit 52 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 39A, in the point member information DB, A00009 which is a registered member card ID (old member card ID) in a state where A00009 and the member card ID of B00246 are registered in association with each other. When a takeover request including A01111 which is an unregistered new member card ID is received, the registered member card ID and the new member card ID of the member card issued at the same store (here, A store) by the same store determination means. Since it is determined that it is a member card ID and the new member card ID is not registered in the point member information DB by the registration determining means, the takeover process is performed as shown in FIG. 39 (b). become.

  Specifically, first, the handover processing means performs the processing of S412 shown in FIG. 38, and performs the handover processing in which A01111 is registered instead of A00009. As a result, the new member card ID A01111 is registered in association with the other registered member card ID B00246 registered in association with the registered member card ID A00009. Next, the process of S413 is performed, and the takeover date (September 16, here) is stored in association with A01111, and A00009 is stored as the takeover source ID.

  Next, when the stored contents of the balance management DB (FIG. 13 (a)) are received after the game hall of the day is closed, the point grant processing shown in FIG. 22 (b) is performed in ascending order of the reception ID. As shown in FIG. Specifically, for the member card ID of B00246, although not shown, the 22,000 yen is used as the amount used today, so 10 points, which is the upper limit of points given per day, are given. , It will be stored in the storage section of the day points.

  For the membership card ID of A01111, since the handover process is performed today, the point grant process is performed as follows. First, 9 points are given according to the amount used today (for example, 9000 yen) corresponding to A00009 as the takeover source ID, and the 9 points are stored in the storage field of the current day point corresponding to A01111 as the takeover destination ID. . Next, 3 points are given according to today's spending amount (for example, 3000 yen) corresponding to A01111 as the takeover destination, and the sum of the stored 9 points and the given 3 points is 1 day. Since the upper limit value of 10 points is exceeded, the 10 points are stored in the point storage field. If the total value does not exceed the upper limit value, the total value is stored in the point storage field.

  After this point giving process is performed, a point addition process is performed as shown in FIG. Specifically, 10 points stored in the storage field for the current day point for the membership card ID of A01111 and 10 points stored in the storage field for the current day point for the member card ID of B00246 are for both membership card IDs. The 374 points stored in the accumulated point storage column are added and updated to 394 points, and the 10 points stored in the current day storage column for both member card IDs are set to 0. Note that the takeover date and the takeover source ID, which are the takeover specifying information registered in association with A01111, remain without being deleted even after the point assigning process and the point adding process are performed.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), the amount used today, which is the point grant target information, is transmitted at the end of the game hall, so the collection interval of the point grant target information is every day. Since the point grant processing is performed when the point grant target information is transmitted, the point grant interval is also every day, but the point grant target information collection interval is temporarily shorter than the point grant interval (for example, every 6 hours). In such a case, if the takeover request is received before the point grant target information is collected and the takeover process is completed, points corresponding to the point grant target information that should be collected are not given, which is disadvantageous for the member. There is a problem of becoming. Specifically, for example, when the game is started at 10 o'clock and ends at 22:00, the point grant target information is transmitted every 6 hours, that is, at 16:00 during business and at 22:00 after business closes. In 15:00, when the takeover request is received and the takeover process is completed, even if the ball lending is performed up to 15:00, the amount used for the ball lending is not collected until 16:00. Points are not awarded according to the amount used.

  Therefore, in the present invention, when the takeover process is performed, the takeover date and the takeover source ID are stored as takeover specifying information, thereby specifying that the takeover request was made between the previous day's point grant and today's point grant. I managed to keep it possible. Then, when performing the point grant process and the point addition process, if it is managed that the takeover process has been performed during the point grant interval (in this case), the point grant target information corresponding to the registered member card ID is displayed. The corresponding day points and the day points corresponding to the point grant target information corresponding to the new member card ID are added to the accumulated points corresponding to the new member card ID. According to this, the point to be added to the point associated with the new member card ID is surely included in the point provision target information corresponding to the registered member card ID, regardless of the collection interval of the point provision target information. Can be added.

  Further, in the present invention, the points given per day are the sum of the current day points corresponding to the current usage amount corresponding to the registered member card ID and the current day points corresponding to the current usage amount corresponding to the new member card ID. If the upper limit value is exceeded, the upper limit point is added to the accumulated points associated with the new member card ID, so the member who took over exceeds the upper limit value. No points are awarded and points can be imparted fairly.

  If it is determined in S264 of FIG. 35 that a registration information update request has been received (YES), the process proceeds to FIG. 40A, and the registration information update request is stored in association with the IP address of the transmission source terminal. It is determined whether the name and address are registered in the point member information DB in association with the login ID being registered. If it is determined in S500 that the name and address are not registered (NO), a screen (not shown) indicating that there is no registration information to be updated is distributed to the transmission source terminal. (S507) Waiting for reception of a menu screen access request (S508). If it is determined in S508 that a menu screen access request has been received (YES), the process returns to S252 and the menu screen stored in S251 is distributed. On the other hand, if it is determined in S500 that the name and address are registered (YES), the name, address, and e-mail address registered in association with the login ID are also registered from the point member information DB. If so, the e-mail address is extracted (S501), and the registered information display screen shown in D430 of FIG. 43, which displays the extracted name, address, and e-mail address as the current registration information, is displayed on the transmission source terminal. Then, it is distributed (S502), and reception of update information is waited (S503).

  In D430, the name, address, and e-mail address are displayed as the current registration information, and the name, address, and e-mail address input fields are displayed as the updated registration information. In D430, the point member operates the operation key to input the name, address and / or e-mail address to be updated in the input field (leave the input field for information not to be updated blank) When the “” button is operated, update information including the input information is transmitted to the point management apparatus 50 via the Internet.

  In the point management device 50, when it is determined in S503 that update information is received from the transmission source terminal (YES), the name, address, and electronic information stored in the point member information DB in association with the login ID The mail address is updated to the name, address, and e-mail address included in the received update information (S504), and the process proceeds to S505.

  As described above, the control unit 52 is associated with the member card ID based on the member card ID (here, the member card ID included in the received login request) received from the operation terminal and the point member. Since the attribute information managed in the information DB is updated, the latest attribute information can be managed in response to the change or correction of the attribute information of the point member managed by the point management device 50.

  In S505, it is determined whether or not the first member card ID is included in the stored login ID and other member card IDs registered in association with the login ID. If it is determined in S505 that the first member card ID is not included (NO), an update completion screen indicating that the update has been completed is distributed to the transmission source terminal (S510), and the process proceeds to S508. move on. On the other hand, if it is determined in S505 that the first member card ID is included (YES), the first member card ID and the update information are specified from the store ID included in the first member card ID. (S506), and the process proceeds to S510. The first member management apparatus 100 that has received the update information and the first member card ID in S506 stores the first member information DB in association with the first member card ID in the first member information DB (FIG. 13B). The name, address, and e-mail address of the user are updated with the received update information.

  Thus, in the first member management device 100, attribute information (here, name, address, electronic) managed by the first member information DB in association with the first member card ID transmitted from the point management device 50. E-mail address) is updated to the updated attribute information transmitted from the point management device 50, so that the latest attribute information can be managed in the first game hall without the need for changing work.

  If it is determined in S266 in FIG. 35 that the group store list request has been received (YES), the process proceeds to FIG. 40B, and the store specifying means responds to the IP address of the transmission source terminal of the group store list request. The store ID is extracted from the stored login ID, and the group store specifying means stores each group stored in the group DB shown in FIG. 24B as the group store of the group to which the store with the extracted store ID belongs. The store is specified (S600), and the process proceeds to S601.

  In S601, it is determined whether or not there is a group store specified in S600. If it is determined in S601 that there is no group store (NO), a screen (not shown) indicating that there is no group store is distributed to the transmission source terminal (S603), and the menu screen access request is received. Wait (S604). If it is determined in S604 that the menu screen access request has been received (YES), the process returns to S252 and the menu screen stored in S251 is distributed. On the other hand, if it is determined in S601 that there is a group store (YES), as shown in D440 of FIG. 43, a screen displaying the group store list is distributed to the transmission source terminal (S602), and the process goes to S604. move on.

  According to this, the store corresponding to the login ID stored in association with the IP address of the transmission source terminal of the group store list request received from the operation terminal operated by the member is specified, and the specified store belongs Since the group store list of the group is returned, the member can recognize the group store.

  If it is determined in S265 in FIG. 35 that the point use request has been received (YES), the process proceeds to FIG. 41, and the lottery information stored in the lottery information DB is extracted (S700) and set in the menu screen. The screen shown in D410 of FIG. 42 displaying the current points (current number of points) and the extracted lottery information is distributed to the transmission source terminal (S702), receiving the application information (S704), It waits for the operation of the “exchange” button (S711). In S704 or S711, if there is no receipt of application information or operation of the “product replacement” button within a predetermined time, a screen (not shown) indicating timeout is delivered to the operation terminal, and S252 is displayed. Return to.

  In D410, the number of points corresponding to the member card ID included in the login request is displayed as the current number of points, and the details of the lottery extracted from the lottery information DB (award name, award description, necessary points, and winning) Number of people) is displayed together with an “application” button and a “product exchange” button. In D410, the point member operates the operation key to select an award that can be applied within the current number of points (in this case, check the check box corresponding to the award) and operate the “apply” button. Then, application information indicating an application for the lottery of the selected prize (here, B prize) is transmitted to the point management apparatus 50 via the Internet.

  If it is determined in S704 that application information is received from the transmission source terminal (YES), the application corresponding to the prize indicated by the application information in the lottery ID of the extracted lottery information in the lottery information DB is determined. The login ID is stored in the storage field of the member member card ID (S705), and the points used for the lottery application are stored in the group DB or the store DB in association with the store ID included in the login ID. The number of remaining points is subtracted and updated, and added to the lottery application use points (S706), and the points used for the lottery application are stored in the point member information DB in association with the login ID. The number of points that have been subtracted and updated, and the points set on the stored menu screen are also subtracted and updated (S707). To deliver screen shown in D411 of Figure 42 displaying the fed versus the operating terminal (S 708), waits to receive a menu screen access request (S709). If it is determined in S709 that a menu screen access request has been received (YES), the process returns to S252 to distribute the menu screen updated in S707. In D411, the current number of points after subtracting the number of points used to apply for the award, the applied prize (here B-prize), and the number of points used for applying to the award (here 40P) Is displayed.

  If it is determined in S711 that the “exchange product” button is operated (YES), the point set on the menu screen (the current number of points) and the product information are displayed in D412 of FIG. The screen shown is distributed to the transmission source terminal (S712), and the exchange information is received (S713) or the “lottery application” button operation (S716) is waited. If the exchange information is not received or the “lottery application” button is not operated within a predetermined time in S713 or S716, a screen (not shown) indicating timeout is distributed to the operation terminal. Return to. If it is determined in S716 that the “lottery application” button is operated (YES), the process returns to S702.

  In D412, the number of points corresponding to the membership card ID included in the login request is displayed as the current number of points, and the contents (product name and necessary points) of a preset exchangeable product are “ It is displayed together with an “Exchange” button and a “Lottery Application” button. At D412, the point member operates the operation key, selects a product that can be exchanged within the current point number range (here, check the check box corresponding to the product), and operates the “exchange” button. Then, exchange information indicating exchange with the selected product (here, a mobile strap) is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet.

  If it is determined in S713 that exchange information is received from the transmission source terminal (YES), the points used for exchange with the product are associated with the store ID included in the stored login ID. And subtracting and updating from the remaining points stored in the group DB or store DB, and adding and updating to the product exchange use points (S714), and associating the points used for the exchange with the products with the login ID Then, the point number stored in the point member information DB is subtracted and updated, and the points set on the stored menu screen are also subtracted and updated (S715), and the process proceeds to S740.

  In S740, it is determined whether the name and address are registered in the point member information DB in association with the login ID. If it is determined in S740 that the name and address are registered (YES), the screen shown in D413-1 of FIG. 42 is distributed to the transmission source terminal, and the process proceeds to S709. In D413-1, a message indicating that the product is to be shipped is displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in S740 that the name and address are not registered (NO), the screen shown in D413-2 of FIG. 42 displaying the input request for the name and address is distributed to the transmission source terminal. (S742), and waits for reception of registration information including the name and address from the transmission source terminal (S743). In D413-2, the fact that the product is to be shipped is displayed, the input of the name and address is requested, and the input column of the name and address is displayed. In D413-2, when the point member operates the operation key, inputs the name and address in the input field, and operates the “Register” button, the registration information including the input name and address is stored on the Internet. And transmitted to the point management device 50.

  If it is determined in S743 that registration information is received (YES), the name and address included in the received registration information are registered in the point member information DB in association with the login ID (S744). ), And proceeds to S709. Thereafter, in the shipping information DB (not shown) stored in the hard disk 53, the exchanged product is registered in association with the name and address of the point member, and the registered name and address are addressed from the card company. As a result, the exchanged product is shipped.

  If it is determined that the answer information is received (YES) in S270 of FIG. 35, the login ID is stored in the lottery information DB in the storage field of the applicant member card ID of the lottery ID corresponding to the questionnaire. Store (S271) and proceed to S285. Specifically, when the point management device 50 receives the answer information, the lot management information DB shown in FIG. The membership card ID included in the login request is stored. In the point management device 50, the control unit 52 totals the number of selected options based on the answer information received during the questionnaire period. In S285, reception of a menu screen access request is awaited. If it is determined in S285 that the menu screen access request has been received (YES), the process returns to S252 and the menu screen stored in S251 is distributed.

  If it is determined in S280 in FIG. 35 that registration information is received (YES), the name and address included in the received registration information are registered in the point member information DB in association with the login ID ( The process proceeds to S281) and S285. Thereafter, in the shipping information DB (not shown) stored in the hard disk 53, the winning prize is registered in association with the name and address of the winning point member, and the registered name and address are received from the card company. Winning prizes will be shipped to the destination.

  If it is determined in S290 in FIG. 35 that a logout request has been received (YES), the setting contents of the menu screen stored in S251 are deleted (S291), and the process is terminated.

[1 '. Modification of First Embodiment]
The point management system 1 according to the modified example of the first embodiment has the same configuration as the point management system 1 according to the first embodiment. However, in the above-described first embodiment, in the point management device 50, store management means The group DB and the store DB manage the region identification information (region name) that can individually identify the region to which the store of the store with the store ID belongs, in association with the store ID, and register the registration request A from the operation terminal. Upon receipt, the control unit 52, which is a group store information providing means, uses the store identification information included in the received registration request A in the group DB as shown in D112 or D114 in FIG. 4 or D213 or D216 in FIG. Corresponding to the same region name as the region identification information (region name) managed in association with the store ID of the store specified from a certain membership card ID In contrast to the group store information that can recognize stores of other store IDs being returned to the operation terminal, in this modification, the group DB and store DB that are store management means are associated with store IDs, When information (in this case, a zip code) that can identify the store location of the store ID is managed and the registration request A is received from the operation terminal, the control unit 52, which is a group store information providing means, displays group identification information ( Recognize stores with other store IDs associated with (group name) in the order in which the stores are located closer to the location of the store specified from the member card ID that is the store specifying information included in the received registration request A It is different in that possible group store information is returned to the operation terminal, and the other points are the same.

  That is, in this modified example, the hard disk 53 of the point management device 50 is replaced with the group DB shown in FIGS. 46B and 46C instead of the group DB and the store DB shown in FIGS. And store DB, and in these group DB and store DB, instead of the area name, the postal code is managed (stored as information that can specify the location of the store of the store ID in association with the store ID). )is doing.

  Further, in the display 54 and the input device 55 functioning as the group setting means, as shown in FIG. 45, the operator operates the input device 55 at D01 similar to FIG. Is operated, the screen shown at D02 ′ is displayed on the display 54. In D02 ′, the store name and store ID of the new store are requested, a store name input field and a store ID input field are displayed, and a pull-down menu for selecting the postal code of the store is displayed. Is done. At D02 ′, the operator operates the input device 55 to input the store name and store ID, selects the postal code of the store from the pull-down menu, and operates the “Register” button, as shown in FIG. 46 (c ′). In the store DB shown, the selected postal code and the input store name and store ID are stored in association with each other.

  Also, when a new group is set in D03 similar to FIG. 25, store IDs and group names of a plurality of stores set as group stores are associated in the group DB shown in FIG. 46 (b ′). Zip code, store name, number of point members, total number of points earned, number of remaining points, and number of points used this month (lottery application) The number of used points and the number of used product replacement points) are deleted from the store DB and transferred to the group DB and associated with the stored store ID.

  In addition, when a group store is added in D04 and D05 similar to FIG. 25, the store ID of the store selected in D05 is assigned to the group selected in D04 in the group DB shown in FIG. 46 (b ′). In addition to being added, the postal code, store name, number of point members, total number of points earned, number of remaining points, and number of points used in the current month (lottery application use) The number of points and the number of product exchange use points) are erased from the store DB and transferred to the group DB and associated with the added store ID.

  The control unit 52 is associated with the store ID specified from the membership card ID included in the received registration request A, although not shown, instead of the processing of S118 shown in FIG. 32 or SH118 shown in FIG. Stores of other store IDs associated with the group identification information (group name) (namely, stores belonging to the same group) are stores specified by the member card ID (hereinafter referred to as “specific stores”). Extraction is performed in the order in which the location is closer to the location. Specifically, other stores are extracted in ascending order of the absolute value of the difference between the zip code of a specific store and the zip code of another store. For example, with respect to the groups managed in the group DB shown in FIG. 46 (b '), if the A store is a specific store, the B store, the C store, And other stores are extracted in the order of X stores. When the X store is a specific store, other stores are extracted in the order of C store, A store, and B store in ascending order of the absolute value of the zip code difference.

  And the control part 52 which functions as the said group shop information provision means performs the process which transmits the screen which can recognize another shop in the said extracted order with respect to a specific shop first.

  Specifically, when the second registration request A including the membership card ID of the store A is received from the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7, instead of D112 in FIG. 4 as shown in D112 ′ of FIG. Then, a screen capable of recognizing other stores in the order of the extracted B store, C store, and X store is transmitted to the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 starting with the store A as a specific store. In addition, when the second registration request A including the membership card ID of the X store is received from the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7, instead of D114 of FIG. 4, as shown in D114 ′ of FIG. A screen capable of recognizing other stores in the order of the extracted C store, A store, and B store is transmitted to the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 starting with a certain X store.

  Further, when the first registration request A including the membership card ID of the store A is received from the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30, the store A which is a specific store is replaced with D213 in FIG. First, a screen capable of recognizing other stores in the order of the extracted B store, C store, and X store is transmitted to the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30. Further, when the first registration request A including the membership card ID of the X store is received from the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30, the X store which is a specific store is replaced with D216 in FIG. First, a screen capable of recognizing other stores in the order of the extracted C store, A store, and B store is transmitted to the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30.

  According to this, even when there are many stores belonging to the group (for example, in the case of a large group), the store is located near the location of the store specified from the member card ID received from the operation terminal operated by the member. Since the group store information that can recognize the group stores is provided to the operation terminal in order (that is, in the order in which the members are likely to come to the store), the convenience of the members is improved.

[2. Point management system 1 including point management device 50 according to the second embodiment]
The point management system 1 according to the second embodiment has the same configuration as the point management system 1 according to the first embodiment, but firstly, compared with the first embodiment, the point member information DB, notification The data storage format of the information DB and the usage amount DB is different. Second, the member integration process is different. Third, the takeover process is different.

  First, regarding the first difference (DB data storage format), in the point member information DB of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23 (a), each integrated member card ID is registered side by side vertically. However, in the point member information DB of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), a storage column for other member card IDs is provided in association with each member card ID and integrated. Each member card ID is registered in the storage field of the other member card ID. Specifically, X00003 is registered as another member card ID in association with the member card ID of A00001, and A00001 is registered as another member card ID in association with the member card ID of X00003. ing.

  Further, in the point member information DB of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23A, for each member card ID integrated, there are storage fields for attribute information, mail distribution store, accumulated usage amount, and accumulated points. Although integrated, in the point member information DB of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), even for each integrated member card ID, these attribute information, mail distribution store, cumulative use The storage fields for the amount and the accumulated points are independent without being integrated, and each storage field is provided in association with each member card ID.

  Therefore, in the first embodiment, the point summing unit performs the point summing process when the member integration process is performed, but in the second embodiment, the point summing process is performed when the login request is received. . When application information or exchange information is received from the operation terminal, as shown in S707 and S715 of FIG. 41, an application is made for the selected prize from the number of points stored in association with each member card ID. In order to subtract the number of points necessary for exchange or the number of points necessary for exchanging with the selected product, here, the point corresponding to the member card ID included in the login request is preferentially subtracted. If insufficient, the shortage is subtracted from points corresponding to other member card IDs registered in association with the member card ID.

  Similarly to this point member information DB, in the notification information DB of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), each storage column is not integrated even if each member card ID is integrated. In the usage amount DB of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48 (c), even if each member card ID is integrated, the storage fields are not integrated and are independent. Yes.

  Regarding the second difference (member integration process), in the first embodiment, the member integration process is performed on the condition that all the membership card IDs to be integrated have already been registered as point members. In the second embodiment, the member integration process is performed on the condition that any one of the membership card IDs to be integrated has already been registered as a point member. That is, in the second embodiment, the member integration process is performed even if any of the membership card IDs to be integrated is not registered as a point member.

  Here, in the PC 6 and the mobile phone 7 of the second embodiment, the “integrated registration” button is not displayed on the menu screen shown in D151 of FIG. 3, but the D104 of FIG. “Integrated registration” button is displayed on the initial screen.

  In D104 ′, when the member operates the operation key and operates the “integrated registration” button, the fact that the integrated registration is selected is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet, and the point The screens D121 ′ to D125 ′ are distributed and temporarily stored from the management device 50 to the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7, and first the screen of D121 ′ is displayed on the display. In D121 ′, it is required to input a member card ID (first member card ID or second member card ID) and a registered password for the registered member card, and an input field for the member card ID and password. Is displayed.

  In D121 ′, when the member operates the operation key to input the member card ID displayed in the member card display area and the registered password and operate the “Register” button, the input contents Is temporarily stored, and the stored screen of D122 ′ is displayed on the display. In D122 ′, “unregistered first member card” button, “unregistered second member card” button, and “registered” button are displayed as buttons for selecting the type of member card to be integrated. The

  When the member operates the operation key and operates the “unregistered first member card” button in D122 ′, the stored screen of D123 ′ is displayed on the display. In D123 ', an input field for the first member card ID and initial password is displayed. In D123 ′, the member who owns the unregistered first member card 4 operates the operation key, and the first member card ID displayed in the display area 4a of the first member card 4 is initialized. When the password is entered and the “Register” button is operated, the contents entered and stored in D121 ′ (that is, the membership card ID of the registered membership card and the registered password) and entered in D123 ′ A first member integration request including the contents (that is, the member card ID and initial password of the unregistered first member card 4) is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet.

  In D122 ', when the member operates the operation key and operates the "unregistered second member card" button, the stored screen of D124' is displayed on the display. In D124 ', the last four digits of the second member card ID and other system member ID are displayed. In D124 ', the member who owns the unregistered second member card 5 operates the operation key, and the second member card ID and other system displayed in the display area 5a of the second member card 5 are displayed. When the last 4 digits of the member ID are entered and the “Register” button is operated, the contents entered and stored in D121 ′ (ie, the member card ID and registered password of the registered member card), and D124 The first member integration request including the content entered in '(that is, the member card ID of the unregistered second member card 5 and the last four digits of the other system member ID) is sent via the Internet to the point management device 50. Sent to.

  Here, the first member integration request is member specifying information (here, the member card ID itself) that can specify a member card ID newly registered (unregistered) in the point management device 50 as a point member and the point. This includes member specifying information (here, the member card ID itself) that can specify a member card ID already registered (registered) in the management apparatus 50.

  On the other hand, when the member operates the operation key and operates the “registered” button in D122 ′, the stored screen of D125 ′ is displayed on the display. In D125 ', an input field for a member card ID and a registered password is displayed. In D125 ′, the member who owns the registered member card operates the operation key, and inputs the member card ID displayed in the display area of the member card and the registered password. When the “Register” button is operated, the contents entered and stored at D121 ′ (ie, the membership card ID and registered password of the registered membership card) and the contents entered at D125 ′ (ie, registered) The second member integration request including the membership card ID and registered password of the membership card is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet. Here, the second member integration request is a plurality of member specifying information (here, the member card ID) that can specify a plurality of (registered) member card IDs already registered in the point management device 50 as point members. Itself).

  In the card unit 20 and the kiosk terminal 30 of the second embodiment, the PC 6 and the mobile phone 7 do not display the “integrated registration” button on the menu screen indicated by D251 in FIG. 9, but change to the initial screen indicated by the same D201. In the initial screen shown as D201 ′ in FIG. 50, an “integrated registration” button is displayed, and in the case of integrated registration, an operation of the “integrated registration” button is prompted without inserting a membership card. Is displayed.

  In D201 ′, when the member operates the operation key and operates the “integrated registration” button, the fact that the integrated registration is selected is transmitted to the point management apparatus 50 via the Internet, and the point The screen shown in D220 ′ to D225 ′ is distributed and temporarily stored from the management device 50 to the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30, and the screen of D220 ′ is first displayed on the display. In D220 ', a message prompting insertion of a registered member card is displayed.

  In the card unit 20 in which D220 ′ is displayed, when a member card registered by a member is inserted into the card R / W 25, the member card ID is read from the IC chip of the member card, and the stored D221 is stored. 'Screen appears on the display. In D221 ', the read registered member card ID is displayed, and an input column for a registered password is displayed.

  When the member card in which the member has been registered is inserted into the card reader 33 at the kiosk terminal 30 on which D220 ′ is displayed, the member ID is read from the magnetic stripe of the member card, and the member ID becomes the point management device 50. The point management device 50 performs the member card ID specifying process, the point management device 50 returns the member card ID specified by the member card ID specifying process, and stores the stored information. D221 'is displayed on the display. In D221 ', the membership card ID returned from the point management device 50 is displayed, and an input field for the registered personal identification number is displayed.

  In D221 ′ displayed on the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30, when the member operates the operation key, inputs the registered password and operates the “Register” button, this is displayed in D221 ′. The membership card ID and the password entered in D221 ′ are temporarily stored, and the stored screen of D222 ′ is displayed on the display. In D222 ′, “unregistered first member card” button, “unregistered second member card” button, and “registered” button are displayed as buttons for selecting the type of member card to be integrated. The

  When the member operates the operation key and operates the “unregistered first member card” button in D222 ′, the stored screen of D223 ′ is displayed on the display. In D223 ', an input field for the first member card ID and the initial password is displayed. In D223 ′, the member who owns the unregistered first member card 4 operates the operation key, and the first member card ID displayed in the display area 4a of the first member card 4 is initialized. When the "register" button is operated by inputting the password, the contents displayed and stored in D221 '(that is, the member card ID of the registered membership card and the registered password), and D223' The first member integration request including the contents entered in (i.e., the member card ID and initial password of the unregistered first member card 4) is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet. .

  In D222 ', when the member operates the operation key and operates the "unregistered second member card" button, the stored screen of D224' is displayed on the display. In D224 ', the last four digits of input fields for the second member card ID and other system member ID are displayed. In D224 ′, the member who owns the unregistered second member card 5 operates the operation key, and the second member card ID and other system displayed in the display area 5a of the second member card 5 are displayed. When the last 4 digits of the member ID are entered and the “Register” button is operated, the contents displayed and stored in D221 ′ (that is, the member card ID of the registered member card and the registered password) , The first member integration request including the contents inputted in D224 ′ (that is, the member card ID of the unregistered second member card 5 and the last four digits of the other system member ID) is managed via the Internet. It is transmitted to the device 50.

  On the other hand, when the member operates the operation key and operates the “registered” button in D222 ′, the stored screen of D225 ′ is displayed on the display. In D225 ', an input field for a member card ID and a registered password is displayed. At D225 ′, the member who owns the registered member card operates the operation key, and inputs the member card ID displayed in the display area of the member card and the registered password. When the “Register” button is operated, the content displayed and stored in D221 ′ (that is, the member card ID of the registered member card and the registered password) and the content input in D225 ′ (ie, A second member integration request including the member card ID of the registered member card and the registered password) is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet.

  Here, regarding the member integration processing based on the reception of the member integration request (first member integration request or second member integration request) from the operation terminal, the control unit 52 includes the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20). , Kiosk terminal 30), member integration request including unregistered first member card ID and initial password, or member integration request including unregistered second member card ID and last four digits of other system member ID When receiving (that is, the first member integration request), the encoding information collation process is performed.

  When the control unit 52 receives a member integration request (first member integration request or second member integration request) from the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30), Based on the stored contents of the point member information DB shown in FIG. 23 (a), a point member information collation process is performed for collating the registered member card ID and the registered password included in the received member integration request.

  Moreover, the control part 52 functions as the said store identification means, From the operation terminal (PC6, the mobile telephone 7, the card unit 20, the kiosk terminal 30), the said member integration request | requirement (1st member integration request or 2nd A plurality of member card IDs (first members) specified from a plurality of member specifying information (first member specifying information, second member specifying information) included in the member integration request based on receiving the member integration request) By specifying the store ID of each store corresponding to the card ID and the second member card ID) and functioning as the store matching determination unit, it is determined whether or not the store IDs specified by the store specifying unit match. judge. The store specifying unit and the store match determination unit correspond to the sum condition determination unit. And the control part 52 which functions as the said registration means does not agree | coincide by the said store coincidence determination means (namely, the total condition that the issuing store of each member card in which each member card ID included in the received member integration request is recorded is different) The plurality of member identification information is registered in association with each other on the condition that the plurality of member identification information is registered, while the plurality of member identification information is not registered on the condition that the store coincidence determining unit determines that they match. .

  Here, when the member integration request is the first member integration request, the control unit 52 functioning as the store specifying unit sends the point management device 50 from the store terminal (the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30). First member specifying information or second member specifying information that can specify a newly registered member card ID (first member card ID, second member card ID) and a member card ID already registered in the point management device 50 The first member specifying information included in the received first member integration request based on receiving the first member integration request including the first member specifying information or the second member specifying information And / or specifying the store ID of each store corresponding to each member card ID specified from the second member specifying information (that is, each member card ID included in the first member integration request). First member specifying information and point management that can specify a member card ID (first member card ID, second member card ID) newly registered in the point management device 50 from the information terminal (PC 6 or mobile phone 7). Each of the first member integration requests received based on the reception of the first member integration request including the second member specifying information that can specify the member card ID already registered in the device 50 The store ID of each store corresponding to each member card ID specified from the second member specifying information (that is, each member card ID included in the first member integration request) is specified.

  Next, the control unit 52 functioning as the store coincidence determining unit specifies the store ID of the store corresponding to the newly registered member identification information specified by the store specifying unit and the already registered member identification information. It is determined whether or not the store ID of the store corresponding to 1 matches. And the control part 52 which functions as the said registration means is made into the said member identification information already registered into the said some member identification information newly registered on the condition that it determined with the said shop matching determination means not being in agreement. While registering in association, the plurality of member identification information to be newly registered is not registered on condition that the store match determination means determines that they match.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), when a certain member has already registered the membership card ID of the member card of his / her A store as a point member, as shown in FIG. 51 (a-1). In addition, from the operation terminal operated by the member, the member card ID and password of the registered card of the store A, and the member card ID and password of the member card of the unregistered store B are included. When the first member integration request is received, the control unit 52 functioning as a store specifying unit after the encoding information collation process and the point member information collation process determine that the collation is OK, The store ID of the store A and the store ID of the store B are extracted from the membership card ID included in the request (S1), and the control unit 52 functioning as a store matching determination unit stores the store ID of the store A extracted in step S1. And store B It is determined that the store ID does not match (S2), and the control unit 52 functioning as a registration unit associates with the member card ID of the store B, the personal identification number included in the first member integration request, and already registered The sex and date of birth are registered, and the membership card ID of store A is registered as another membership card ID (S3), and the membership card ID of store B is associated with the membership card ID of store A. Then, it is registered as another member card ID (S4).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 51 (a-2), from the operation terminal operated by the member, the membership card ID and password of the member card of the registered A store, and the unregistered A store of the other person. When the first member integration request including the member card ID and the password of the member card is received, it is determined that the verification is OK in the encoded information verification process and the point member information verification process, and then functions as a store specifying unit. The control unit 52 that extracts the store ID of the store A and the store ID of the store A from the member card ID included in the first member integration request (S1). Then, it is determined that the store ID of the store A extracted in S1 and the store ID of the store A match (S2), and the control unit 52 functioning as a registration unit registers the membership card ID of another person's store A. No (S3).

  Here, based on the reception of the first member integration request, the control unit 52 determines from the member specifying information (first member specifying information or second member specifying information) included in the received first member integration request. Same member determination means for determining whether there is a member card ID registered in association with a specified member card ID that has already been registered (that is, each member card ID included in the first member integration request) The control unit 52 that functions as the store identification unit functions as a store ID of a store corresponding to the registered member card ID on the condition that it is determined by the same member determination unit. And the control unit 52 functioning as the store coincidence determining means specifies the store card ID corresponding to the registered membership card ID specified by the store specifying means. Determining a shop ID, and whether or not the shop ID of the shop corresponding to the membership card ID to be newly registered is specified from the member identification information included in the member integrated request matches.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51 (a ′), a certain member associates the member card ID of the member card of his / her A store with the member card ID of the member card of his / her B store, and points As shown in FIG. 51 (a-1 ′), the member card ID and password of the member card of the registered A store and the user's own card are entered from the operation terminal operated by the member. When the first member integration request including the membership card ID and password of the member card of the unregistered C store is received, it is determined that the verification is OK in the encoding information verification process and the point member information verification process. Thereafter, the control unit 52 functioning as a store specifying unit extracts the store ID of the store A and the store ID of the store C from the member card ID included in the first member integration request (S1), and stores match determination unit Function as The control unit 52 determines that the store ID of the store A extracted in S1 and the store ID of the store C do not match (S2), and the control unit 52 that functions as the same member determination unit It is determined that there is a member card ID of the store B registered in association with the member card ID of the registered store A included in the member integration request (S3). The store ID of the store B is extracted from the member card ID of the registered store B (S4), and the control unit 52 functioning as a store match determination unit determines the store ID of the store C extracted in step S1 and the store ID. It is determined that the extracted store ID of the store B does not match (S5), and the control unit 52 functioning as a registration unit is included in the first member integration request in association with the member card ID of the store C. Register your PIN, registered gender and date of birth. In addition, the membership card ID of the A store and the membership card ID of the B store are registered as other membership card IDs (S6), and the membership card ID of the C store is associated with the membership card ID of the A store. Are registered as other membership card IDs in association with the membership card ID of store B (S7).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 51 (a-2 ′), from the operation terminal operated by the member, the member card ID and password of the member card of the registered A store and the unregistered B store of the other person. When the first member integration request including the member card ID and the personal identification number of the member card is received, it is determined that the collation is OK in the encoding information collation process and the point member information collation process. The functioning control unit 52 extracts the store ID of the store A and the store ID of the store B from the member card ID included in the first member integration request (S1), and functions as a store match determination unit. Determines that the store ID of the store A and the store ID of the store B extracted in S1 do not match (S2), and the control unit 52 functioning as the same member determination means sends the first member integration request Already registered in It is determined that there is a member card ID of the store B registered in association with the member card ID of the store (S3), and the control unit 52 functioning as the store specifying means determines from the member card ID of the registered store B. The store ID of the store B is extracted (S4), and the control unit 52 functioning as a store match determination unit matches the store ID of the store B extracted in S1 with the store ID of the store B extracted in S4. (S5), the control unit 52 functioning as a registration means does not register the member card ID of another person's B store (S6).

  When the member integration request is the second member integration request, the control unit 52 functioning as the store specifying means has already sent the point management device 50 from the store terminal (the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30). Second member integration request including a plurality of first member specifying information and / or second member specifying information capable of specifying each of a plurality of registered member card IDs (first member card ID, second member card ID) Corresponding to each member card ID (that is, each member card ID included in the second member integration request) specified from the plurality of first member specifying information and / or second member specifying information In addition to specifying the store ID of each store to be operated, a plurality of membership card IDs (the first IDs already registered in the point management device 50 from the information terminal (PC 6 or mobile phone 7)) Based on the reception of the second member integration request including a plurality of second member specifying information capable of specifying each of the member card ID and the second member card ID). The store ID of each store corresponding to each member card ID (that is, each member card ID included in the second member integration request) is specified.

  Next, the control unit 52 functioning as the store coincidence determining unit determines whether or not the store IDs specified by the store specifying unit match. The control unit 52 functioning as the registration unit registers the plurality of already registered member identification information in association with each other on the condition that the store match determination unit determines that they do not match. The plurality of already registered member identification information is not registered in association with each other on the condition that the match determination means determines that they match.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), a certain member has registered as a point member the membership card ID of the member card of his / her A store and the member card ID of the member card of his / her B store. In some cases, as shown in FIG. 52 (b-1), from the operation terminal operated by the member, the member card ID and password of the member card of his registered A store, and his registered B Upon receiving the second member integration request including the member card ID and password of the store membership card, the control unit 52 functions as store specifying means after the point member information verification process determines that the verification is OK. Extracts the store ID of the store A and the store ID of the store B from the member card ID included in the second member integration request (S1), and the control unit 52 functioning as a store match determination unit in S1 Of extracted A store It is determined that the store ID of the store ID and the store ID of the store B do not match (S2), and the control unit 52 functioning as a registration unit associates the member card ID of the store B with the member card ID of the store A and other members. Register as a card ID, and register the member card ID of store A as another member card ID in association with the member card ID of store B (S3).

  That is, the point member information DB, which is a point management means, applies the integration source to the integration source member card ID (here, the member card ID of the store A) already registered in the point member information DB from the operation terminal. A member card ID of a store different from the store specified from the member card ID, and the integration target member card ID (here, the member card ID of store B) that has already been registered in the point member information DB is integrated. On condition that the member integration request (second member integration request) has been received, the integration source member card ID and the integration target member card ID are registered in association with each other.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52 (b-2), from the operation terminal operated by the member, the member card ID and password of the member card of the registered A store and the member of the registered store A of another person. When the second member integration request including the card's member card ID and PIN is received, the point member information collation process confirms that it is OK (that is, the second member's registered card ID of the store A is second. Control unit functioning as a store specifying unit after it is determined that the password included in the member integration request of the user coincides with the password registered in the point member information DB in association with the member card ID) 52 extracts the store ID of the store A and the store ID of the store A from the member card ID included in the second member integration request (S1), and the control unit 52 functioning as a store match determination unit Extracted in It is determined that the store ID of the store A matches the store ID of the store A (S2), and the control unit 52 functioning as a registration unit associates the member card ID included in the second member integration request. No (S3).

  Here, based on the reception of the second member integration request, the control unit 52 functioning as the same member determination means receives the member specifying information (first member specifying information included in the received second member integration request). , Whether there is a member card ID registered in association with one of a plurality of member card IDs (that is, each member card ID included in the second member integration request) specified from the second member specifying information) The control unit 52 that functions as the store specifying unit determines whether or not the same member determination unit has determined that the store has a store corresponding to the registered member card ID. The control unit 52 that further specifies an ID and functions as the store match determination unit, specifies the store card ID corresponding to the registered member card ID specified by the store specifying unit. Determining a shop ID, and whether or not the shop ID of the shop corresponding to the remaining membership card ID is identified from the member identification information included in the member integrated request matches.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52 (b '), a certain member associates the member card ID of the member card of his / her A store with the member card ID of the member card of his / her B store as a point member. 52. Operation terminal operated by the member as shown in FIG. 52 (b-1 ′) when registered and the member card ID of the member card of his / her C store is separately registered as a point member When receiving the second member integration request including the membership card ID and password of the registered card of the registered A store and the membership card ID and password of the registered card of the registered C store. The controller 52 functioning as the store specifying unit after the point member information verification process determines that the verification is OK, the store ID and C of the store A are determined from the member card ID included in the second member integration request. Store store D is extracted (S1), and the control unit 52 functioning as a store match determination unit determines that the store ID of the store A and the store ID of the store C extracted in S1 do not match (S2). The control unit 52 functioning as the same member determination unit determines that there is a member card ID of the store B registered in association with the member card ID of the registered store A included in the member integration request (S3). The control unit 52 functioning as the store specifying unit extracts the store ID of the B store from the registered membership card ID of the B store (S4), and the control unit 52 functioning as the store match determination unit is the S1. It is determined that the store ID of the store C extracted in step S4 and the store ID of the store B extracted in step S4 do not match (S5), and the control unit 52 functioning as a registration unit uses the membership card ID of the store C as a membership card ID. Correspondingly, the membership card ID of A store and Register the member card ID of store B as another member card ID (S6), register the member card ID of store C as another member card ID in association with the member card ID of store A, and It is registered as another member card ID in association with the member card ID of store B (S7).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52 (b-2 ′), from the operation terminal operated by the member, the member card ID and password of the member card of the registered A store, and the registered B store of the other person. When the second member integration request including the member card ID and the password of the member card is received, the point member information verification process is OK (that is, about the member card ID of another person's registered A store, After it is determined that the personal identification number included in the second member integration request coincides with the personal identification number registered in the point member information DB in association with the membership card ID), it functions as a store specifying unit. The control unit 52 extracts the store ID of the store A and the store ID of the store B from the member card ID included in the second member integration request (S1), and the control unit 52 functioning as a store match determination unit Extracted with S1 It is determined that the store ID of the store A and the store ID of the store B do not match (S2), and the control unit 52 functioning as the same member determination unit stores the registered store A included in the member integration request. It is determined that there is a member card ID of the B store registered in association with the member card ID (S3), and the control unit 52 functioning as the store specifying means determines the B from the registered member card ID of the B store. The store ID of the store is extracted (S4), and the control unit 52 functioning as a store match determination unit matches the store ID of the B store extracted in S1 with the store ID of the B store extracted in S4. It determines with there (S5), and the control part 52 which functions as a registration means does not match with member card ID of another person's B store (S6).

  In addition, the control unit 52 determines whether each store ID specified by the store specifying unit is a store ID of a store belonging to the group set by the group setting unit (display 54 and input device 55). It functions as a determination means. The store specifying unit and the group determining unit correspond to the sum condition determining unit. And the control part 52 which functions as the said registration means is store ID of the store which belongs to the group by this group determination means (that is, the issue store of each member card in which each member card ID included in the received member integration request is recorded) The member identification information is registered in association with each other on the condition that it is determined that the group setting means satisfies the total condition that they belong to the same group set by the group setting means.

  When the member integration request is the first member integration request, the control unit 52 functioning as the registration unit determines that the group determination unit determines that the store ID of the store belonging to the group is the store ID. As a condition, the newly registered member card ID is registered in association with the already registered member card ID, while the group determining unit determines that the member ID is not a store ID of a store belonging to a group. The newly registered member card ID is registered without being associated with the already registered member card ID.

  Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 51 (a-1), the control unit 52 functioning as the store specifying unit determines the store ID and B of the store A from the member card ID included in the first member integration request. Since the store ID of the store is extracted (S1), the control unit 52 functioning as the group determination means stores the store ID extracted in S1 based on the stored contents of the group DB shown in FIG. Are belonging to the same ◎◎ group, and the control unit 52 functioning as a registration unit performs the registration of S3 and S4.

  On the other hand, although not shown, the first member integration including the membership card ID and password of the membership card of the registered A store, and the membership card ID and password of the membership card of the unregistered D store. When the request is received, the control unit 52 functioning as a store specifying unit after the encoding information collation process and the point member information collation process determine that the collation is OK, the member included in the first member integration request The control unit 52 that extracts the store ID of the store A and the store ID of the store D from the card ID and functions as a group determination means extracts the store ID based on the stored contents of the group DB shown in FIG. The control unit 52 that determines that the store IDs do not belong to the same group (that is, the extracted store ID is not the store ID of the store belonging to the group) and functions as a registration unit is Instead of associating the ID with the member card ID of the store A, register the PIN number included in the first member integration request, the registered gender and date of birth, in association with the member card ID of the store D .

  In addition, when the member integration request is the second member integration request, the control unit 52 functioning as the registration unit is provided on the condition that the group determination unit determines that the store ID is a store ID of a store belonging to the group. As described above, the plurality of member card IDs are registered in association with each other, but the plurality of member card IDs are not associated on the condition that the group determining unit determines that the member IDs are not store IDs of stores belonging to the group. .

  Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (b-1), the control unit 52 functioning as a store specifying unit determines the store ID and B of the store A from the member card ID included in the second member integration request. Since the store ID of the store is extracted (S1), the control unit 52 functioning as the group determination means stores the store ID extracted in S1 based on the stored contents of the group DB shown in FIG. Are belonging to the same ◎◎ group, and the control unit 52 functioning as a registration unit performs the registration in S3.

  That is, the point member information DB, which is a point management means, applies the integration source to the integration source member card ID (here, the member card ID of the store A) already registered in the point member information DB from the operation terminal. A member card ID of a store belonging to the same group as the store specified from the member card ID, and an integration target member card ID already registered in the point member information DB (here, a member card ID of a store B) On the condition that a member integration request for integration (second member integration request) has been received, the integration source member card ID and the integration target member card ID are registered in association with each other.

  On the other hand, although not shown, the second member integration including the membership card ID and PIN of the registered card of the registered A store and the membership card ID and PIN of the registered card of the registered D store When the request is received, the control unit 52 functioning as a store specifying unit after the point member information collation process determines that the collation is OK, the store 52 determines the A store from the member card ID included in the second member integration request. The control unit 52 that extracts the store ID of the store and the store ID of the store D and functions as a group determination unit determines that the store ID extracted in S1 is based on the stored contents of the group DB shown in FIG. The control unit 52, which determines that they do not belong to the same group (that is, the extracted store ID is not the store ID of the store belonging to the group) and functions as a registration means, has the membership card ID of the A store and the member card of the D store. Not carried out the association between de ID.

  Regarding the third difference (takeover processing), in the first embodiment, the takeover processing is performed on the condition that the new member card ID of the takeover destination is not registered as a point member. In the second embodiment, The takeover process is performed regardless of whether or not the new member card ID of the takeover destination is registered as a point member.

  That is, in the second embodiment, the control unit 52 functioning as the takeover processing unit is the member card ID of the member card issued at the same store by the same store determination unit, regardless of the determination result by the registration determination unit. The handover process is performed on the condition that the determination is made.

  In the second embodiment, the control unit 52 that functions as a takeover processing unit handles the registered member card ID as a takeover process when the registration determination unit determines that a new member card ID is registered. The number of points attached is managed in association with the new member card ID, and the number of points associated with the new member card ID is added together.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 39C and 39D, the takeover specifying information is not erased even after the point grant processing is performed, but the second embodiment Then, as shown in FIGS. 55C and 55D, after the point grant processing is performed, the takeover specifying information is deleted. Therefore, the point addition processing means is the takeover destination ID on the condition that the takeover specifying information is stored, while the point addition process is performed on the condition that the takeover specifying information is not stored. The point corresponding to the amount used today corresponding to the registered member card ID that is the takeover source ID is not added to the point associated with the new member card ID.

  Hereinafter, the process performed by the point management apparatus 50 according to the second embodiment will be described only with respect to differences from the process performed by the point management apparatus 50 according to the first embodiment.

  First, in the point giving process shown in FIG. 22A, after the process of Sa26, Sa27, or Sa28 is performed, the process of deleting the takeover specifying information (takeover date, takeover source ID) is performed (Sa29 '). In this way, since the takeover specifying information is deleted after the point giving process is performed, it is not necessary to perform the process of Sa21, and if it is determined YES in Sa19, the process of Sa21 is not performed. The process proceeds to Sa22.

  In the process shown in FIG. 35, after the process of S203 is performed, another member card ID (hereinafter referred to as “corresponding ID”) registered in association with the member card ID (login ID) included in the login request. It is determined whether or not there is (refer to S203-1 '). If it is determined in S203-1 ′ that there is no corresponding ID (NO), the login ID specified in S203 is stored in association with the IP address of the transmission source terminal (S204 ′) and stored in S204 ′. The point stored in the point member information DB in association with the login ID is identified (S205 '), and the identified point is displayed on the menu screen (if the transmission source terminal is an information terminal, the menu shown in D151 in FIG. 3) If the screen and the transmission source terminal are store terminals, they are set in a predetermined area (menu screen shown in S251 in FIG. 9) (S206 ′), and the process proceeds to S210.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S203-1 ′ that there is a corresponding ID (YES), the corresponding ID is specified (S203-2 ′), and the login ID specified in S203 and the correspondence specified in S203-2 ′ are specified. The ID is stored in association with the IP address of the transmission source terminal (S204-1 ′), and each point stored in the point member information DB is specified in association with the stored login ID and the corresponding ID (S205-). 1 ′), the point summing means sums the identified points (S205-2 ′), and displays the summed points on the menu screen (when the transmission source terminal is an information terminal, the menu shown in D151 in FIG. 3). If the screen and the transmission source terminal are store terminals, they are set in a predetermined area of the menu screen shown in S251 of FIG. 9 (S206-1 ′), and the process proceeds to S210.

  After the processing of S210 to S252 is performed, it waits for reception of a member integration request (first member integration request or second member integration request) transmitted from the operation terminal (S260 '). If it is determined in S260 'that no member integration request has been received (NO), the process proceeds to S262. On the other hand, if it is determined in S260 ′ that the member integration request has been received (YES), the process proceeds to FIG. 53 to determine whether or not the received member integration request includes an unregistered member card ID ( S300 ').

  If it is determined in S300 ′ that an unregistered member card ID is included (YES), the received member integration request is the first member integration request, so the unregistered member included in the first member integration request The encoding information collation process is performed for the member card ID (S330 ′). If it is determined in step S330 ′ that the verification is NG (NO), a screen indicating that the input is incorrect is distributed to the operation terminal (S331 ′), and the reception of the menu screen access request is awaited ( S345 ′). If it is determined in S345 'that the menu screen access request has been received (YES), the process returns to S252, and the menu screen stored in S251 is distributed. On the other hand, if it is determined in S330 'that the verification is OK (YES), the point member information verification process is performed for the registered member card ID included in the first member integration request (S332'). If it is determined in this S332 'that collation NG (NO), the process proceeds to S331'.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the verification is OK in S332 ′ (YES), the store identification unit extracts store IDs from the plurality of member card IDs included in the first member integration request (S333 ′), It is determined by the group determination means whether all of the extracted store IDs belong to the same group stored in the group DB shown in FIG. 24B (S334 ′). If it is determined in S334 ′ that they belong to the same group (YES), the process proceeds to S337 ′ and subsequent steps, and in S342 ′ and S343 ′, a plurality of membership card IDs included in the registration request are handled by the registration means. Attached and registered.

  According to this, when a member integration request for integrating the integration source member card ID and the integration target member card ID is received, the store specified from the integration source member card ID and the integration target member card ID are specified. Since the integration is performed only when the store to be operated is a group store, the points corresponding to the respective membership card IDs can be added together and used for improving the number of customers at the group store.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S334 ′ that they do not belong to the same group (NO), the registration means registers the registered attribute information in association with each unregistered member card ID (S335 ′). An individual registration completion screen (not shown) indicating that registration has been performed independently is distributed to the operation terminal (S336 ′), and the process proceeds to S345 ′.

  According to this, when each store corresponding to each member card ID included in the member integration request is not a group store, the newly registered member card ID included in the member integration request is registered without being associated. Therefore, there is no need to redo the registration operation, and the convenience for members is improved.

  In S337 ', the store match determination means determines whether or not the store IDs extracted in S333' match. The case where it is determined in S337 ′ that the store IDs match (YES) is a case where a member who has picked up a member card of another member of a certain store intends to integrate it with the member card of the store. Therefore, an error screen indicating that the integration cannot be performed is distributed to the operation terminal (S338 ′), and the process proceeds to S345 ′.

  According to this, when a member integration request for integrating the integration source member card ID and the integration target member card ID is received, the store specified from the integration source member card ID and the integration target member card ID are specified. Since integration is performed only when the store is different, the points of the member who lost the member card with the member card ID recorded are integrated with the points of other members who picked up the member card. It is possible to reduce the risk that the member who lost the membership card will suffer disadvantages. That is, if integration is performed even if the stores match, the member who picks up the membership card can also use the points of the member who lost the membership card, and the member who lost the membership card arbitrarily However, according to this, since the integration is not performed when the stores match, the disadvantage is not incurred.

  Furthermore, if a member has two member cards at one store, they must have two member cards even if there is an upper limit (for example, 10 points) in the points given per day. 10 points can be obtained with each membership card, and if the two membership cards are merged, double points can be obtained and used, but according to this, when the stores match Is not integrated, so there is no such inconvenience.

  In addition, since each store corresponding to the plurality of membership card IDs included in the member integration request is not matched, for example, a member of store A picks up a member card of another store A at the store A. When trying to integrate the member card of the other store A picked up and the member card of his own store B, the integration is performed, but the member card of the other store A picked up is tried to be integrated. The member who owns the A store membership card and is usually already registered as a point member, or is trying to integrate with the own store A membership card to be registered. In many cases, integration can be prevented.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S337 ′ that the store IDs do not match (NO), the same member determination means associates the point member information with the registered member card ID included in the first member integration request. It is determined whether there is another member card ID (corresponding ID) registered in the DB (S339 ′). If it is determined in S339 ′ that there is no corresponding ID (NO), the registration means associates the PIN number included in the member integration request with the registered attribute information in association with the unregistered member card ID. The registered and registered member card ID is registered (S342 ′), and the registered member card ID is registered in association with the registered member card, that is, integrated (S343 ′). An integrated registration completion screen (not shown) indicating completion is distributed to the operation terminal (S344 ′), and the process proceeds to S345 ′.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S339 ′ that there is a corresponding ID (YES), the store identification unit extracts the store ID from the corresponding ID (S340 ′), and the store match determination unit extracts it in S340 ′. It is determined whether or not the store ID matches the store ID extracted in S333 ′ from the unregistered member card ID included in the first member integration request (S341 ′). If it is determined in S341 'that they do not match (NO), the process proceeds to S342'. On the other hand, if it is determined in S341 ′ that they match (YES), registration of the unregistered member card ID and registration of the member card ID is not performed by the registration unit, and the process proceeds to S345 ′ after S338 ′. .

  According to this, it corresponds to a store corresponding to another member card ID registered in association with the already registered member card ID included in the first member integration request, and a newly registered member card ID. Even if the store matches, the newly registered member card ID is not registered, so that the risk of a member who has lost the member card suffering a disadvantage can be further reduced.

  If it is determined in S303 ′ that an unregistered member card ID is not included (NO), the received member integration request is the second member integration request, so all of the second member integration requests are included. For the member card ID (that is, the registered member card ID), the point member information matching process is performed (S351 ′). If it is determined that the collation is NG (NO) in S351 ', a screen indicating that the input is incorrect is distributed to the operation terminal (S352'), and the process proceeds to S345 '.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the verification is OK in S351 ′ (YES), the store identification unit extracts the store ID from each of the plurality of member card IDs included in the second member integration request (S353 ′). It is determined by the group determination means whether all of the extracted store IDs belong to the same group stored in the group DB shown in FIG. 24B (S354 ′). If it is determined in S354 ′ that they belong to the same group (YES), the process proceeds to S357 ′ and subsequent steps, and in S363 ′, a plurality of member card IDs included in the registration request are registered in association with each other by the registration means. Is done.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S354 ′ that they do not belong to the same group (NO), the registration means does not register each registered membership card ID in association with it, and does not perform the association. The screen shown (not shown) is distributed to the operation terminal (S355 ′), and the process proceeds to S345 ′.

  In S357 ', the store match determination means determines whether or not the store IDs extracted in S353' match. The case where it is determined in S357 ′ that the store IDs match (YES) is a case where a member who has picked up a member card of another member of a certain store intends to integrate it with his member card of the store. Therefore, an error screen indicating that the integration cannot be performed is distributed to the operation terminal (S358 ′), and the process proceeds to S345 ′.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S357 ′ that the store IDs do not match (NO), the same member determination means associates the point member information with the registered member card ID included in the second member integration request. It is determined whether there is another member card ID (corresponding ID) registered in the DB (S359 ′). When it is determined in S359 ′ that there is no corresponding ID (NO), the registration unit registers, that is, integrates a plurality of registered membership card IDs (S363 ′), and proceeds to S344 ′. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S359 ′ that there is a corresponding ID (YES), the store identification unit extracts the store ID from the corresponding ID (S360 ′), and the store match determination unit extracts it in S360 ′. It is determined whether or not the store ID matches the store ID extracted in S353 ′ from the remaining registered member card ID included in the second member integration request (S361 ′). If it is determined in S361 'that they do not match (NO), the process proceeds to S363'. On the other hand, if it is determined in S361 'that they match (YES), the registration of the membership card ID is not registered by the registration means, and the process proceeds to S345' after S358 '.

  According to this, the store corresponding to the member card ID registered in association with any of the plurality of already registered member card IDs included in the second member integration request, and the plurality of member card IDs Even if the stores corresponding to the remaining member card IDs match, the association of the plurality of member card IDs is not performed, so that the risk of the member who lost the recording medium suffering a disadvantage is further reduced. can do.

  Also, in the process shown in FIG. 38, if it is determined in S400 that a takeover request has been received (YES), the process proceeds to FIG. 54, where the registration determination means determines that the new member card ID included in the takeover request is a point member. It is determined whether or not it has been registered in the information DB (S400 ′).

  If it is determined in S400 'that it has not been registered (NO), the encoding information matching process is performed for the unregistered new member card ID included in the handover request (S430'). If it is determined in step S430 ′ that the verification is NG (NO), a screen indicating that the input is incorrect is distributed to the operation terminal (S431 ′), and the reception of the menu screen access request is awaited (S431 ′). S345 ′). If it is determined in S345 'that the menu screen access request has been received (YES), the process returns to S252, and the menu screen stored in S251 is distributed. On the other hand, if it is determined in S430 'that the verification is OK (YES), the point member information verification process is performed for the registered member card ID included in the handover request (S432'). If it is determined in this S432 'that collation is NG (NO), the process proceeds to S431'.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the verification is OK in S432 ′ (YES), the store identification unit extracts the store ID from the registered member card ID and the new member card ID included in the handover request (S433 ′). Then, it is determined by the store match determination means (same store determination means) whether or not the store IDs extracted in S433 ′ match (S437 ′). If it is determined in S437 'that the store IDs do not match (NO), an error screen indicating that the store cannot be taken over is delivered to the operation terminal (S438'), and the process proceeds to S445 '. On the other hand, if it is determined in S437 'that the store IDs match (YES), the process proceeds to S439' and subsequent steps, and the handover process is performed in S442 '. According to this, since the handover process is performed for the membership card ID of the membership card issued at the same store, the handover process is performed for the membership card ID of the membership card issued at another store. There is no fear.

  In S439 ', the association determination unit determines whether there is another registered member card ID registered in association with the registered member card ID included in the handover request. If it is determined in S439 'that there is no other registered member card ID (NO), the process proceeds to S442'. On the other hand, if it is determined in S439 ′ that there is another registered member card ID (YES), the registration unit corresponds the new member card ID included in the handover request to the other registered member card ID. At the same time, the registered member card ID included in the handover request corresponding to the other registered member card ID is deleted (S440 ′), and the process proceeds to S442 ′. According to this, if there is another registered member card ID registered in association with the registered member card ID included in the handover request, the new member card ID included in the handover request is the other registered member card. Since registration is performed in association with the card ID, there is no need to transmit a summation request (member integration request) including the other registered member card ID and new member card ID, and a plurality of the member card IDs recorded therein. The convenience of the owner who owns the membership card is improved.

  In S442 ′, the new member card ID is registered in place of the registered member card ID included in the transfer request by the transfer processing means in the point member information DB, and is included in the transfer request instead of the registered personal identification number. The takeover process is performed by registering the password to be registered. In S443 ′, the takeover identification information management means stores (registers) the takeover date in association with the new member card ID, and the already registered The member card ID is stored (registered) as a takeover source ID, and in S444 ′, a takeover completion screen indicating that the takeover is completed is distributed to the operation terminal, and the process proceeds to S445 ′.

  If it is determined in S400 ′ that the registration has been completed (YES), the point member information regarding the registered member card ID (old member card ID) and the registered new member card ID included in the handover request Collation processing is performed (451 ′). If it is determined that the collation is NG (NO) in S451 ', a screen indicating that the input is incorrect is distributed to the operation terminal (S452'), and the process proceeds to S445 '.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the verification is OK in S451 ′ (YES), the store identification unit extracts the store ID from the registered member card ID and new member card ID included in the handover request (S453 ′). Then, it is determined by the store match determination means (same store determination means) whether or not the store IDs extracted in S453 ′ match (S457 ′). If it is determined in S457 'that the store IDs do not match (NO), an error screen indicating that the store cannot be taken over is distributed to the operation terminal (S458'), and the process proceeds to S445 '. On the other hand, if it is determined in S457 'that the store IDs match (YES), the process proceeds to S459' and subsequent steps, and a takeover process is performed in S462 '. According to this, since the handover process is performed for the membership card ID of the membership card issued at the same store, the handover process is performed for the membership card ID of the membership card issued at another store. There is no fear.

  In S459 ', the association determination unit determines whether there is another registered member card ID registered in association with the already registered member card ID included in the handover request. If it is determined in S459 'that there is no other registered member card ID (NO), the process proceeds to S462'. On the other hand, if it is determined in S459 ′ that there is another registered member card ID (YES), the registration unit corresponds the new member card ID included in the handover request to the other registered member card ID. At the same time, the registered membership card ID included in the handover request corresponding to the other registered member card ID is deleted (S460 ′), and the process proceeds to S463 ′. According to this, if there is another registered member card ID registered in association with the registered member card ID included in the handover request, the new member card ID included in the handover request is the other registered member card. Since registration is performed in association with the card ID, there is no need to transmit a summation request (member integration request) including the other registered member card ID and new member card ID, and a plurality of the member card IDs recorded therein. The convenience of the owner who owns the membership card is improved.

  In S462 ′, the new member card ID is registered in place of the registered member card ID included in the handover request by the handover processing means in the point member information DB, and is included in the handover request instead of the registered password. Registering the PIN number to be registered, and adding the accumulated usage amount and the accumulated points associated with the registered member card ID to the accumulated usage amount and the accumulated points associated with the new member card ID, A takeover process is performed, and in S463 ′, the takeover identification information management means stores (registers) the takeover date in association with the new member card ID, and stores (registers) the registered member card ID as the takeover source ID. In S444 ′, a takeover completion screen indicating that the takeover is completed is distributed to the operation terminal. Te, the process proceeds to S445 '.

  According to this, even if the number of points is managed in association with the new member card ID, the number of points associated with the registered member card ID is associated with the new member card ID. Therefore, the convenience of the owner who owns the plurality of membership cards in which the membership card IDs are recorded is improved.

  In the information terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7) that has received the handover completion screen, the membership card ID and password stored in the cookie are the new membership card ID and registration entered on the screen shown in D405 of FIG. Will be logged in to the point member website with the new member card ID and password after rewriting, and after that renewal, it will not be possible to log in with the member card ID and password before rewriting. become.

  As described above, since the takeover processing is performed based on the reception of the takeover request from the operation terminal operated by the owner of the member card, the point management device 50 and the member management device provided in the store (first In the member management apparatus 100 and the second member management apparatus 200), it is not necessary to assemble a program associated with transmission / reception of a takeover request or to provide an apparatus for performing the transmission / reception, and the cost for the takeover process is reduced. Further, in the point management system 1 including the point management device 50, it is not necessary to provide a member management device for transmitting the takeover request in the store.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 55, the handover process performed by the control unit 52 will be described. First, with reference to (a), (b), (c), and (d) of FIG. 55, a takeover process performed by the control unit 52 when the new member card ID is not registered will be described. As shown in FIG. 55A, in the point member information DB, A00009 and B00246 member card IDs are registered in association with each other, and the registered member card ID (old member card ID) A00009 and not yet registered. When a takeover request including A01111 which is a registered new member card ID is received, the member of the member card whose registered member card ID and new member card ID are issued at the same store (here, A store) by the same store determination means Since it is determined that it is a card ID and the new member card ID is not registered in the point member information DB by the registration determination means, the takeover process is performed, as shown in FIG. 55 (b). Become.

  Specifically, the registration unit first performs the process of S440 ′ shown in FIG. 54, and the new member card ID A01111 is registered in association with the registered member card ID A00009. A00009 registered in association with B00246 is deleted while being registered in association with B00246, which is the already registered member card ID. Next, the takeover processing unit performs the process of S442 ′, performs a takeover process in which A01111 is registered instead of A00009, and further performs the process of S443 ′ by the takeover specifying information management unit. In association with A01111, a takeover date (September 16 in this case) is registered, and A00009 is registered as a takeover source ID.

  Next, when the stored contents of the balance management DB (FIG. 16 (a)) are received after the game hall of the day is closed, the point grant processing shown in FIG. 22 (b) is performed in ascending order of the reception ID. As shown in FIG. Specifically, for the membership card ID of B00246, the accumulated usage amount has increased by 22,000 yen, and since the usage amount of 22,000 yen is used today, the upper limit value of points given per day is used. A certain 10 points are given and stored in the point storage column on the day.

  For the membership card ID of A01111, since the handover process is performed today, the point grant process is performed as follows. First, 9 points are given according to the amount used today (for example, 9000 yen) corresponding to A00009 as the takeover source ID, and the 9 points are stored in the storage field of the current day point corresponding to A01111 as the takeover destination ID. . Next, 3 points are given according to today's spending amount (for example, 3000 yen) corresponding to A01111 as the takeover destination, and the sum of the stored 9 points and the given 3 points is 1 day. Since the upper limit value of 10 points is exceeded, the 10 points are stored in the point storage field. If the total value does not exceed the upper limit value, the total value is stored in the point storage field. Then, the takeover date and takeover source ID, which are the takeover specifying information registered in association with A01111, are deleted.

  After this point giving process is performed, a point addition process is performed as shown in FIG. 55 (d). Specifically, for the membership card ID of B00246, 10 points stored in the storage column for the current day are added to the 369 points stored in the storage column for accumulated points to be 379 points. At the same time, 10 points stored in the point storage field are set to 0. As for the membership card ID of A01111, 10 points stored in the storage column for the current day are added to the 5 points stored in the storage column for the accumulated points to be 15 points and 10 points stored in the storage column are set to zero.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 55A and 55B, a takeover process performed by the control unit 52 when the new member card ID is already registered will be described. As shown in FIG. 55 (a ′), in the point member information DB, A00009 and B00246 member card IDs are registered in association with each other, and the registered card member A01111 is registered. When a handover request including A00009 which is a card ID (old member card ID) and A01111 which is a registered new member card ID is received, the registered member card ID and the new member card ID are stored in the same store ( Here, since it is determined that the membership card ID of the membership card issued at the store A) and the new membership card ID is registered in the point member information DB by the registration determination means, the takeover processing is performed. As shown in FIG. 55 (b ′).

  Specifically, first, the registration unit performs the processing of S360 shown in FIG. 54, and the new member card ID A01111 is registered in association with the registered member card ID A00009. A00009 registered in association with B00246 is deleted while being registered in association with B00246, which is a registered member card ID. Next, the process of S362 is performed by the handover processing means, A01111 is registered instead of A00009, and the accumulated usage amount and accumulated points associated with the registered member card ID are set as the new member card ID. A takeover process is performed in which the accumulated usage amount and the accumulated points associated with each other are added, and the process of S363 is performed by the takeover identification information management unit, and the takeover date (in this case, 9) is associated with A01111. Month 16) is registered, and A00009 is registered as the takeover source ID.

  The point giving process is performed in the same manner as shown in FIG. 55 (c), and the point addition process is performed in the same way as shown in FIG. 55 (d).

[4. Modified example of the present invention]
Finally, a modification of the present invention will be described.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the store is a game hall and the transaction process is a ball lending process has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the store may be a general store that provides products and services. For example, when a store is a convenience store, and a store member of the convenience store registers as a point member, when shopping as a transaction process is performed at each convenience store, points are given according to the shopping amount, By integrating with membership cards of other convenience stores, the points corresponding to the membership cards may be combined and used. In addition, when the store is a game center and the store member of each game center registers as a point member, the game result is obtained when a game that is a transaction process is performed on a mahjong game machine provided in the game center. Points may be assigned according to the number and integrated with the membership cards of other game centers, so that the points corresponding to the membership cards can be used together. That is, the present invention can be applied to any store as long as it is registered as a store member in each store and registered as a point member in the point management device 50.

  In the above embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 1, the example in which the store terminal is the card unit 20 and the kiosk terminal 30 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the store terminal may be the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30. Only one of them may be used.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 1, 6, and 7, the card unit 20 communicates with the point management device 50 via the system management device 40 and the Internet (the first registration request and the member integration request). Although an example of transmission and distribution of display screen) has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the card unit 20 may communicate with the point management device 50 via the system management device 40 and the transfer device 70. Alternatively, the card unit 20 may be configured to be directly connectable to the Internet and communicate with the point management device 50 via the Internet.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the membership card ID and the usage amount transmitted from the card unit 20 are transmitted to the point management device 50 via the system management device 40 and the transfer device 70 has been described. Not limited to this, it may be transmitted to the point management device 50 without going through the system management device 40 and the transfer device 70, or may be sent to the point management device 50 through only one of them. . Alternatively, the first member card ID and the usage amount transmitted from the card unit 20 are temporarily stored in a predetermined storage device, and the storage content of the storage device is transmitted to the point management device 50 via the Internet. You may be made to do.

  In the above embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 1, the example in which the system management device 40 manages the remaining amount management DB and the first member management device 100 manages the first member information DB has been described. The computer having both functions of the system management device 40 and the first member management device 100 may manage both the balance management DB and the first member information DB.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the point management device 50 functions as a web server has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a computer other than the point management device 50 may function as a web server.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the store information providing device is the point management device 50 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the store information providing device is a web server that operates a website that publishes store information. Also good. In this case, when a certain store name is clicked on the web page displaying the store names where the store IDs of a plurality of stores are pasted as link information, link information of the clicked store names The store ID is transmitted as “the store information request including the store specifying information” from the operation terminal to the web server, and the group store information providing means provides the group store information to the operation terminal. . Here, the group store information providing means is a store of all stores (that is, store A, store B, store C, and store X) belonging to the same group (that is, the group ◎◎) as the clicked store (for example, store A). The information may be provided to the operation terminal as group store information, and the store information of the clicked store and other stores belonging to the same group as the clicked store (that is, store B, store C) , And X store) may be provided to the operation terminal as group store information on the web page on which the store name pasted as link information is displayed.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, an example in which the recording medium is a card-type membership card (first membership card 4 and second membership card 5) has been described. The medium may be a coin type or a mobile phone.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, in the membership card (first membership card 4 and second membership card 5), the first member identification information is electrically or non-contacted by a non-contact IC chip and a magnetic stripe. Although an example in which magnetic recording is performed has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first member identification information may be recorded by only one of an IC chip and a magnetic stripe. The contact type may be used instead of the contact type.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, in the membership card (first membership card 4, second membership card 5), the membership card ID and the membership ID number itself are visible as the second membership identification information. The recorded example has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a two-dimensional code (for example, a barcode or QR code), a three-dimensional code, or an optical interference code (for example, a hologram) indicating the member card ID or the member ID may be used. In this case, the code is read by a reader (for example, a camera provided on the mobile phone 7) that reads the code. The member card ID and member ID specified from the code are input as the second member specifying information. That is, as long as the second member specifying information is recorded so as to be visible, the second member specifying information can be indirectly recognized by being read by a reader as well as the second member specifying information can be directly recognized. It may be recognized.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the example in which the member identification information (member card ID) is recorded on the recording medium (member card) has been described. The member identification information may not be recorded, and the first member specifying information and the second member specifying information may be recorded.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2A, the first member ID and the first member card ID are displayed in the display area 4a of the first member card 4 so as to be visible. The ID may not be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, as an example, both the banknote 2 and the coin 3 can be used as money. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and only one of the banknote 2 or the coin 3 is used. It may be usable. The types of money that can be used are not limited to the above. Also, the money may be electronic money that can be used with an electronic money card, a credit amount that can be used with a credit card, a deposit balance that is used with a debit card, etc. good.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the magnitude of the game valuable value and the value of the use value is the card remaining amount or the use amount itself has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the magnitude of the game valuable value and the value of the use value are large. The number may be a remaining number or a score obtained by converting the amount by a predetermined ratio.

  In the above embodiment, the first member card ID and the remaining card amount are recorded on the first recording medium (first member card 4) as the valuable value specifying information that can specify the magnitude of the game valuable value. The example in which the second member card ID and the remaining amount of the card are recorded on the recording medium (second member card 5) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first recording medium includes the first value specifying information as the valuable value specifying information. Only one of the member card ID or the remaining amount of the card may be recorded, and only one of the second member card ID or the remaining amount of the card is recorded as the valuable value specifying information on the second recording medium. You may make it. Further, the valuable value specifying information may be a deposit ID generated in the system management apparatus 40 in accordance with the deposit process to the first recording medium and the second recording medium, and the deposit ID and the remaining card amount are associated with each other. It may be possible to specify the magnitude of game value by managing. Further, the valuable value specifying information recorded on the first recording medium may be the first member ID, and the system management device 40 stores the card remaining amount in association with the first member ID. The remaining card amount can be specified from one member ID, and the first member ID acts as valuable value specifying information.

  In the above embodiment, the second member card ID and the remaining amount of the card are recorded in the second member card 5, and the second member card ID is information for individually identifying the second member card 5 in the card company. And an example in which information including both the second member card ID and the remaining amount of card information acts as the second recording medium identification information while acting as the second recording medium identification information that is the valuable value specifying information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second member card ID is stored in the system management device 40 in association with the second member card ID without recording the remaining card amount on the second member card 5. The remaining card amount can be specified from the second member card ID, and the second member card ID may act as the second recording medium identification information. Further, the second member card ID and the remaining card amount may be recorded in the second member card 5 so that the second member card ID and the remaining card amount may not be stored in association with each other in the system management apparatus 40. The second member card ID recorded on the second member card 5 is information for individually identifying the second member card 5, and the recorded card remaining amount is valuable value specifying information. That is, information including both information of the second member card ID and the remaining amount of the card becomes the second recording medium identification information.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, an example in which the gaming machine is a pachinko machine 10 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the gaming machine may be a slot machine or a gaming medium that uses medals as a gaming medium, for example. As a slot machine that uses pachinko balls as a parrot (registered trademark), pachinko balls that are pachinko balls that are game media enclosed in an untouchable manner, using score data without using pachinko balls or medals It may be a pachinko machine or slot machine that can be played, an image-type pachinko machine in which game areas or pachinko balls are displayed as images, an image-type slot machine in which reels are displayed as images, or the like.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the processing for causing the game to use the amount of money or the value of gaming value is a ball lending process (visitor ball lending process or member card ball lending process) has been described. The process is not limited to the medal lending process for lending the medal, the process of converting the value of the valuable value into a score as a game medium in the image-type pachinko machine or slot machine, and the like. good.

  In the above embodiment, when the ball lending process is performed, a signal relating to the lending of the pachinko balls is exchanged between the card unit 20 and the pachinko machine 10, and the ball payout provided in the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Although the example in which the pachinko balls are paid out and loaned from the device 13 has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the pachinko balls are paid out and loaned from a ball paying device (not shown) provided in the card unit 20. Also good.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the deposit amount is stored in the RAM of the unit control unit 22 of the card unit 20 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the card control unit 20 includes an EEPROM. If there is, the remaining amount of payment may be stored in the EEPROM. The card unit 20 may be of a type that accepts a recording medium for a visitor player from the outside, or may store the balance of payment in an enclosed card.

  In the above embodiment, in the point member information DB shown in FIG. 23 (a), when registering as a point member as attribute information, registration of only gender and date of birth is required, and when a lottery is won, Although the example which asks for registration of a name and an address when exchanging was explained, not only this but registration of all attribute information may be required when registering with a point member.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which points are given based on the usage amount after being registered as a point member in the point member information DB shown in FIG. 23A has been described. The usage amount of a store member who is not registered as a point member in the usage amount DB shown in c) is also stored, and points are awarded based on the stored usage amount when registered as a point member. You may do it.

  In the above embodiment, even when the e-mail address is registered in association with the member card ID in the point member information DB shown in FIG. 23A, the member is displayed in the notification information DB shown in FIG. Although an example in which questionnaire information, event information, and winning information as notification information are stored in association with the card ID has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the member card ID for which an e-mail address is registered is notified. The information may not be stored. In this case, the notification target determination unit determines that the information is not a notification target, and thus notification information is not returned.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23A, an example of managing the summed points by summing up the points corresponding to the member card IDs when the member card IDs are associated with each other. In the second embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), points are individually managed in association with each member card ID, and as shown in S205-2 ′ of FIG. Although an example of summing points when distributing a screen has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and individual points may be managed in the first embodiment, and summed points may be managed in the second embodiment. In the first embodiment and / or the second embodiment, both the individual points and the summed points may be managed. In this case, the usage from the individual points of each store to the individual points of each store is used. Gaso With respectively are subtracted, also used points is subtracted from the sum points.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24A, correspondence information indicating the association between the first member card ID and the first member ID and the association between the second member card ID and the other system member ID. Is the storage content of the encoding information DB transmitted from the encoding information management device 60, and the example has been described in which the encoding information management device communication unit 51a functions as the corresponding information receiving means for receiving the corresponding information. However, the correspondence information receiving unit may be a reading device that reads the correspondence information recorded on the medium, or may be an OCR that reads the correspondence information recorded on the paper. Further, the operator of the point management device 50 may input the corresponding information on the corresponding information input screen displayed on the display 54 or the like. For example, the corresponding information encoded on the second member card 5 for 1000 sheets may be input. In the case of input, the other system member ID and the second member card ID are input only for the first one card, and when the fact that there are 1000 second member cards encoded in that state is entered, Based on the entered other system member ID and second member card ID as a reference, and then according to a predetermined rule (for example, increasing both the other system member ID and the second member card ID by one, etc.) continuously for 1000 sheets It is preferable that the association is performed.

  In the above embodiment, the example of managing the remaining points and the points used in the current month for the group in the group DB shown in FIG. 24B has been described. The number of remaining points and the number of points used in the current month may be managed, or both the total and individual points may be managed.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which each group or each store bears consideration according to the number of product exchange use points stored in the group DB shown in FIG. 24 (b) and the store DB shown in FIG. 24 (c). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the consideration may be borne according to the number of lottery application use points, or the consideration may be borne according to the number of use points this month.

  In the above embodiment, in the setting registration of the new group shown in D03 of FIG. 25 and the additional setting of the group store shown in D05, the store is selected by checking the check box corresponding to the displayed store, The example in which the selected store is registered or added to a new group has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and a store to be registered or added to a new group is directly input. You may make it add.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25 or FIG. 45, when registering a new store as a group store, first the new store is registered at D02 or D02 ′, and then a new group is set at D03. Or although the example which adds a group store by D05 was demonstrated, you may enable it to register as a group store at the time of registration of a new store not only in this, In this case, for example, a new group is set by D03 At this time, the new store can be registered as a group store, and when adding a group store in D05, the new store can be added as a group store.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in D21 of FIG. 27, the example in which the questionnaire information transmitted by the control unit 52 is a URL for accessing the questionnaire has been described. The content itself may be used. In this case, an e-mail including the content itself of the questionnaire is transmitted from the external communication unit 51c connected to the Internet.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), the storage content of the balance management DB and the storage content of the balance management DB are described as being transmitted to the transfer device 70 after the game hall is closed. However, the information is not limited to this, and may be transmitted at a predetermined time or a predetermined interval.

  In the above embodiment, an example is described in which one point is awarded for every 1000 yen spent on the points given to the first member player and the points given to the second member player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and points may be given at different monetary ratios between the former and the latter. For example, 1 point may be given to the first member player for every 1000 yen used, and 1 point may be given to the second member player for every 2000 yen used.

  In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the upper limit value is provided for the points given per day in the point grant process. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the upper limit value may not be provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which points (use points) are given according to the amount of money used today in the point grant processing has been described. You may make it give a visit point. If the takeover process is performed here, the transfer destination is not given one point (that is, a total of 2 points) for each of the takeover member card ID and the takeover member card ID. 1 point of visit point is given only for the member card ID. The upper limit value may be applied only to the use points, or may be applied to the total value of the use points and the store visit points.

  In the above embodiment, in the point grant process, an example of giving points according to the value of use value (use amount) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and points according to game time are given. Also good. In this case, in the balance management DB of the system management device 40, in association with the member card ID, for example, the time when the member card with the member card ID is inserted into the card unit 20 is stored as the game time. In addition, when the stored content of the remaining amount management DB is transmitted to the point management device 50, the control unit 52 may perform a point giving process for giving points according to the game time.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the point grant interval is one day in the point grant process has been described. Shorter intervals (for example, every 6 hours). In this case, in the point member information DB, not only the takeover date but also the takeover time is managed as takeover specifying information.

  In the above embodiment, in the point grant process, the example in which the point grant process is performed in ascending order of the reception ID has been described, but the point grant process may be performed in descending order of the reception ID. In the example shown in FIG. 39 (c), first, 3 points are given according to the amount used today (for example, 3000 yen) corresponding to A01111 which is the takeover destination, and the current day point corresponding to A01111 is stored in the storage field 3 points are stored, and then 9 points are given according to the amount used today (for example, 9000 yen) corresponding to A00009 which is the takeover source ID. The stored 3 points and the assigned 9 points The combined value exceeds 10 points, which is the upper limit of points granted per day. It is stored in the storage field of points.

  In the first embodiment, the takeover specifying information (takeover date, takeover source ID) remains without being erased even after the point grant processing is performed. In the second embodiment, the point grant is performed. Although an example in which the takeover specifying information is deleted after the processing has been described is not limited to this, the takeover specifying information is deleted in the first embodiment, and the takeover specifying information is kept in the second embodiment. May be.

  In the second embodiment, the example in which the takeover date and the takeover source ID are stored as the takeover specifying information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the takeover specifying information is deleted after the point assigning process is performed. In this case, only the takeover source ID may be stored as the takeover specifying information without storing the takeover date.

  In the above embodiment, based on the fact that the point management device 50 has sent the standard report transmission request from the system management device, the standard report shown in D45 of FIG. Although an example of transmission is described, the present invention is not limited to this. A fixed report is created in advance, and the generated fixed report is pointed out based on the fact that a fixed report transmission request is transmitted from the system management apparatus. You may make it transmit with respect to the management apparatus 50. FIG.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, the questionnaire results tabulated by the control unit 52 have been described as being delivered from the transfer device communication unit 51b to the system management device of each game hall. Not limited to this, the questionnaire result may be output on the display 54, or the questionnaire result may be browsed on the web.

  In the above embodiment, except for the screen of D201, each screen shown in FIGS. 9 to 11 is distributed from the point management device 50 to the store terminal (card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30) via the Internet. Although the example has been described, for the card unit 20, these screens may be distributed from the point management device 50 via the system management device 40 and the transfer device 70, and also for the kiosk terminal 30, The screen may be configured to be communicable with the system management device 40, and these screens may be distributed from the point management device 50 via the system management device 40 and the transfer device 70.

  In the above embodiment, except for the screen of D201, each screen shown in FIG. 9 to FIG. 11 is distributed from the point management device 50 to the store terminal (card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30). Although the example of display was demonstrated, not only this but the program for displaying a part or all of these screens is downloaded from the point management apparatus 50, and the said screen is displayed by execution of this program. May be.

  In the above embodiment, each screen shown in FIGS. 3 to 5 has been described as being delivered from the point management device 50 to the information terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7) and displayed on the information terminal. Not limited to this, a program for displaying part or all of these screens may be downloaded from the point management device 50, and the screen may be displayed by executing the program.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in D110 of FIG. 4, the member selects whether the member card to be registered as a point member is the first member card 4 or the second member card 5 in the information terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an input of a member card ID is requested, the input member card ID is transmitted to the point management device 50, and the received member card ID is recorded in the point management device 50. The first member card 4 or the second member card 5 is identified. If it is the first member card 4, the screen shown in D111 and D112, and if it is the second member card 5, the screen shown in D113 and D114 are displayed. You may make it deliver.

  In the above embodiment, for example, as shown in D113 of FIG. 4, when the other system member ID is input as the second member specifying information in the PC 6, the mobile phone 7, or the card unit 20, the last four digits are input. Although the required example has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and input of a number of digits other than the last four digits (for example, the last five digits or more) may be requested. That is, the number of digits of the member ID input as the second member specifying information may be sufficient to eliminate accidental coincidence in the encoding information matching process performed by the point management device 50.

  In the above embodiment, in the card unit 20, the member cards (first member card 4, second member card 5) issued at a store other than the store where the card unit 20 is installed cannot be accepted. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Membership cards issued at other stores can also be accepted, and point cards can be registered for membership cards issued at other stores, and issued at other stores. It is also possible to enable integrated registration between member cards.

  In the above embodiment, the kiosk terminal 30 can accept a membership card (first membership card 4, second membership card 5) issued at a store other than the store where the kiosk terminal 30 is installed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the membership card issued at the own store may be accepted. In this case, the membership card ID and membership ID of the membership card issued at another store may be accepted. Point member registration may be performed by accepting manual input such as, or point member registration may not be performed for member cards issued at other stores.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the card R / W 25 of the card unit 20 has received the insertion of the membership card and reads the membership card ID from the IC chip of the membership card. The member card ID may be read from the IC chip of the member card close to the card R / W 25.

  In the above embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 12, the card reader 33 of the kiosk terminal 30 has received the insertion of the member card and reads the member ID from the magnetic stripe of the member card. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the member ID may be read from the magnetic stripe of the member card slid on the card reader 33.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the member card ID of the member card to be integrated is manually input in the store terminal (the card unit 20, the kiosk terminal 30) has been described. The insertion of the integrated membership card may be accepted and the membership card ID may be read from the IC chip of the membership card. The kiosk terminal 30 accepts the insertion of the integrated membership card and The member ID is read from the magnetic stripe of the card and transmitted to the point management device 50, and the card ID is identified from the member ID by receiving the member card ID specifying process in the point management device 50. Also good. In addition, at the store terminal, for example, the member card inserted in advance is retained and the member card to be inserted next is accepted, or a plurality of card insertion slots are provided, so that a plurality of member cards can be received. It may be acceptable at the same time.

  In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the kiosk terminal 30 can read the magnetic stripes 4c and 5c of the member card (first member card 4 and second member card 5). The IC chips 4b and 5c may be readable, and according to this, the member card ID (first member card ID, second member card ID) can be read from the IC chip. 1 member ID, other system member ID) is transmitted to the point management device 50, and the step of acquiring the member card ID specified in the point management device 50 is not necessary.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in D210 of FIG. 10, in the kiosk terminal 30 that accepts point member registration, a member card ID (first member card ID or second member card ID) is acquired from the point management device, Although an example in which the acquired member card ID is displayed has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the member card ID may not be acquired and displayed.

  In the above embodiment, when the name and address are registered in the point member information DB, as shown in D30 of FIG. 29 and D480-1 of FIG. As shown in D413-1 of FIG. 42, the example in which the screen indicating only that the product has been shipped has been described. However, the registered name and address are displayed on these e-mails or screens. The name and address are requested to be confirmed, and if the name and / or address is changed, the input of the changed name and / or address may be accepted. good.

  In the above embodiment, when a new group is set by the group setting means (display 54 and input device 55), the group store list shown in D450-2 of FIG. In the case where it is performed, the example in which the additional store shown in D450-1 is distributed has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the group store list is also distributed when a group store is added. Anyway.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, in the point management device 50, the point member registration process is performed based on the registration request transmitted from the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the member card ID included in the registration request A is determined based on the reception of the registration request A. Once the registration request B is received within a predetermined time, the attribute information included in the registration request B is registered in association with the registered member card ID, and the registration request B is received within the predetermined time. If the membership card ID is not received, the registration of the membership card ID may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when the member card ID having the same attribute information is extracted in S123 of FIG. 34, if the member card ID is the first member card ID, it is installed in the game hall of the store ID extracted from each member card ID. The first member management device 100 is requested to transmit the name and address, and if it is the second member card ID, each member card ID is displayed on the display 54, and the store extracted by the operator from each member card ID Although the example which inquires the name and address memorize | stored with the 2nd member management apparatus 200 installed in this game hall with respect to the game hall of ID was demonstrated, not only this but the 2nd member management apparatus 200 is used. When the other company to be managed and the card company that manages other components are linked, the point management device 50 sends the name and address to the second member management device 200. It is also possible to request a. The first member management apparatus 100 may not be requested to send the address and name, but the operator may always make an inquiry regardless of whether or not the first member management apparatus 100 is linked.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, the information disclosure request is a combination of a login request including a member card ID, a point use request not including the member card ID, and a group store list request. Although the example has been described, the member card ID included in the login request is stored in the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30) without being limited thereto, and the stored member A point use request including a card ID and a group store list request may be transmitted. In this case, the log-in request is not an information disclosure request, but a point use request transmitted including a member card ID. And the group store list request is an information disclosure request independently.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, an example in which points are updated in the point member information DB (S707, S715) after the points are updated in the store DB or group DB (S706, S714). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the order in which these points are updated may be reversed.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, not only when a confirmation request (login request) is transmitted from a store terminal (card unit 20 or kiosk terminal 30), but also an information terminal (PC 6 or mobile phone 7). Even when a confirmation request is sent from the e-mail, the e-mail address management determination means makes a determination (S221, S231, S241), and it is determined that the e-mail address management determination means manages the e-mail address. Then, the example in which notification information (questionnaire information, event information, winning information) is not returned to the information terminal has been described, but not limited to this, when a confirmation request is transmitted from the information terminal, The notification information is uniformly returned to the information terminal without performing the determination by the e-mail address management determination means. There.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, when it is determined by the e-mail address management determination means that the e-mail address is managed, notification information (questionnaire information, event information, winning information) is uniformly obtained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and notification information that is always returned is set in advance, and the e-mail address management determination unit manages the e-mail address. Even if it is determined that the notification information is set, the notification information that is set to be always returned may be returned. According to this, for example, relatively important information such as winning information is always returned. By setting the notification information as a reply, in addition to the notification information by e-mail, the notification information is also notified at the store terminal. Rukoto can.

  In the above embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 24B and FIG. 46B ′, the example in which the group identification information is a group name has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the group identification information may be a number, It may be a group ID composed of symbols or the like. That is, the group identification information may be information that can identify the group individually.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 24B and 24C, the example in which the region identification information is the region name has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the region identification information is composed of numbers, symbols, and the like. It may be a regional ID. That is, the region identification information may be information that can identify each region individually.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 24B and 24C, the example in which the unit of the region is a prefecture has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the unit of the region is a region wider than the prefecture. (For example, Tohoku, Kanto, etc., South Kanto, Kita Kanto, etc.) or narrower than prefectures (eg, Shinjuku, Shibuya, Tokyo 23, Tama, etc.) In addition, it may be a unique area that is not an administrative division (for example, a mountain or a downtown area).

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the registration of the area name shown in FIG. 27 or the registration of the zip code shown in FIG. 45 is performed at the time of registration of a new store (D2, D2 ′) is not limited to this. These region names and postal codes may be registered when a new group is set or when a group store is added. In this case, the registered region names and postal codes are shown in FIG. ) Or in the store DB shown in FIG. 46 (c ′), it is registered only in the group DB shown in FIG. 24 (b) or FIG. 46 (b ′).

  In the above embodiment, as shown in D112 and D114 in FIG. 4 and D213 and D216 in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to other stores belonging to the area (for example, Tokyo), but also adjacent to the area (for example, Kanagawa Prefecture). , Chiba Prefecture, Saitama Prefecture, Yamanashi Prefecture), group store information that can be recognized by stores may be provided to the operation terminal.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in D112 and D114 in FIG. 4 and D213 and D216 in FIG. 10, stores that are specified from the store specifying information included in the received store information request together with other stores in the group store information (Here, A store or X store) has been described as an example, but not limited thereto, the group store information does not include stores specified from the store specifying information included in the received store information request, Only other stores may be included. In this case, the e-mail including the store information of the store specified from the store specifying information included in the received store information request is compulsorily sent to the e-mail address of the member regardless of the request of the member. It may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the store information regarding the store is the event information of the store has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the store information is, for example, business information such as the location of the store and business hours. It may also be a URL indicating event information or sales information.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30, when an e-mail including event information of a distribution target store is distributed, store IDs of stores other than the distribution target store are stored as the mail distribution store. In this case, an example is described in which an e-mail including event information of the other store is transmitted (S94). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an e-mail including event information of each distribution target store is provided for each distribution target store. May be distributed.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in S133 of FIG. 34, the point management device 50 accepts the point member registration from the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30 even when the point member registration is accepted from the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7. As in the case of the case, the example in which the e-mail address included in the second registration request B is registered in the point member information DB has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When an empty mail is received from the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7, an e-mail address that is the sender of the empty mail may be registered in the point member information DB.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in D214 of FIG. 10, the first registration request A transmitted from the card unit 20 installed in the second game arcade to the point management device 50 is subjected to the encoding information matching process (FIG. In the example described above, the last four digits of the other system member ID for performing S114) of 32 are included. The second member card ID included in the first registration request A is the IC chip 5b of the second member card 5. Since the first registration request A does not include the last four digits of the other system member ID and the first registration request is received, the encoding information matching process is performed. It may not be performed.

  In the modification of the first embodiment described above, the example in which the information that can specify the location is a zip code has been described as shown in FIGS. 46 (b ′) and (c ′). The information that can specify the address may be the address itself. In this case, for example, the address may be plotted on a map, and the other stores may be extracted in the order of a short straight line distance from the store location specified by the store specifying information to the location of the other store. Alternatively, the nearest station of each store may be specified, and the other stores may be extracted in the order of short rail distance from the nearest station of the store specified from the store specifying information to the nearest station of the other store.

  Moreover, in the modification of 1st Embodiment, the information which can specify a location may be the store number provided in order (for example, in order from north to south) according to the location of a store, for example. In this case, the other stores are extracted in ascending order of the absolute value of the difference between the store number of the store specified from the store specifying information and the store number of the other store.

  In addition, in the modification of the first embodiment, each time the group store information is transmitted, these stores are not extracted, but for each store, other stores in the order closer to the store are determined in advance. When the group store information is transmitted, the determined result may be transmitted.

  In the first embodiment described above, an example in which only registered member card IDs are integrated has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an already registered member card ID and an unregistered member card ID are integrated. In this case, the process of S308 shown in FIG. 37 is omitted. In this case, in addition to providing an “integrated registration” button on the menu screen (D151 in FIG. 3 or D251 in FIG. 9) on the operation terminal, a login screen (in FIG. 3) for logging in to the menu screen. D150 or D250 in FIG. 9) may be provided with an “integrated registration” button. On the login screen, an unregistered member card ID (for example, a member card ID of a store B) is input and an “integrated registration” button is entered. Is operated, the input member card ID is transmitted from the operation terminal to the point management device 50, and stores belonging to the same group as the store of the member card ID (that is, store A, store B, and store X) ) Is returned as an integrated candidate store from the point management device 50 to the operation terminal, and registered with the registered member card ID among the member card IDs of the integrated candidate store. When the personal identification number is input member integration request is made, the integration process of the unregistered membership card ID included the in the login request with the membership card ID of the registered that is included in the associative members integration request is made.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in D170 of FIG. 5 and D221 of FIG. 10, an example in which a takeover request including both a registered member card ID (old member card ID) and a new member card ID is transmitted will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first takeover request including the registered member card ID and the second takeover request including the new member card ID may be transmitted separately. The combination of the first takeover request and the second takeover request is the takeover request. That is, if the takeover request includes a new member card ID together with the registered member card ID, both member card IDs may be transmitted together, and both member card IDs are transmitted separately. It may be a thing.

  In the above embodiment, the recording medium is a membership card issued at a store, the recording medium identification information is a membership card ID, and an example of taking over the number of points has been described. Is a credit card, and the recording medium identification information is the card number of the credit card, and may carry over the payment amount by the credit card. Based on the reception of the handover request including the card number and the new card number as the transfer destination, a handover process is performed for associating the payment amount associated with the registered card number with the new card number.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the takeover specifying information is the takeover date and the takeover source ID has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the takeover specifying information may be only the takeover date.

  In said 2nd Embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51-52, store identification information (store ID) is contained in member identification information (member card ID), and store identification means (control part 52) is said member. Although the example which specifies store identification information by extracting store identification information from identification information was demonstrated, it is not restricted to this, For example, in the point management apparatus 50, member identification information which does not contain store identification information, and the said member identification information The store identification information of the store that issued the recording medium may be stored in association with each other, and the store specifying unit may specify the store identification information stored in association with the member identification information. Note that the association between the member identification information and the store identification information may be such that the store identification information is associated with each member identification information, and one store for a plurality of member identification information (for example, what number to what number). It may be associated with identification information. That is, the store specifying means may be any device that can specify the store identification information of the store corresponding to the member identification information.

  In the second embodiment described above, the order of the processes of S334 'and S337', S354 'and S357' in FIG. 53 may be reversed. That is, either the determination by the group determination unit or the determination by the store match determination unit may be performed first.

  In the second embodiment, the example in which the error screen is uniformly distributed when it is determined in S337 ′ and S357 ′ in FIG. 53 that the store IDs match (YES) has been described. For example, when there are three or more member card IDs included in the member integration request, instead of making an error uniformly, only the member card IDs whose store IDs do not match may be registered in association with each other.

  In the second embodiment described above, in S361 ′ of FIG. 53, the store match determination unit corresponds to the member identification information registered in association with any of the plurality of member card IDs included in the received member integration request. Store ID (store ID extracted in S360 ′ here) and the store ID of the store corresponding to the remaining member card ID included in the member integration request (store ID extracted here in S353 ′). It is determined whether or not they match, and the registration unit registers the member card ID in association with each other on the condition that the store match determination unit determines that they do not match (NO). In the example described above, the member card ID is not registered in association with the member card ID.

  That is, the store coincidence determining means includes the store ID of the store corresponding to the member card ID registered in association with any of the plurality of member card IDs included in the received member integration request, and the member integration request. It is determined whether or not the store ID of the store corresponding to the member card ID registered in association with the remaining member card ID matches, and the registering unit determines that they do not match by the store match determining unit Each member card ID may be registered in association with each other on the condition that the membership card ID is matched, and may not be registered in association with each member card ID on the condition that it is determined that they match.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56, in the point member information DB of the point management device 50, for a certain member (here A), the member card ID of the A store of the member A and the member card ID of the B store Are registered in association with each other, and the member card ID of the member A's C store and the member card ID of the D store are registered in association with each other. When the member integration request including the ID and the member card ID of the store C is received, the store match determination means stores the member card of the store B registered in association with the member card ID of the store A included in the member integration request. It is determined whether or not the ID matches the member card ID of the store D registered in association with the member card ID of the remaining store C included in the member integration request. In this example, since it is determined that they do not match, the registration unit registers each member card ID in association with each other.

  In addition, the store coincidence determining unit is configured such that the store ID of each store corresponding to each of the plurality of member card IDs included in the received member integration request and the member card registered in association with each of the plurality of member card IDs It is determined whether or not there is a match among the store IDs of the stores corresponding to the ID, and the registration unit is determined on the condition that the store match determination unit determines that there is no match. While registering the member card IDs in association with each other, it is possible not to register the member card IDs in association with each other on the condition that there is a match.

  Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 56, when a member integration request is received, the membership card ID of store A and the membership card ID of store C included in the membership integration request, and the membership card ID of store A are included. It is determined whether there is a match between the member card ID of the store B registered in association with the member card ID of the store D registered in association with the member card ID of the store C. In this example, since it is determined that there is no match, the registration unit registers each member card ID in association with each other.

  In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, when the total points are used, the number of used points is preferentially subtracted from the points corresponding to the login ID, and the points may be insufficient. In this example, the shortage is subtracted from the point corresponding to the corresponding ID. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The point member may be able to select whether to give priority to the points to be performed, or the point member may arbitrarily specify the points to be subtracted from each point.

  In the second embodiment, the example in which the registered membership card ID and the unregistered membership card ID are integrated and the registered membership card IDs are integrated is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The member card IDs may be integrated. In this case, first, for the first unregistered member card, the member card ID and the initial password or the last four digits of the other system member ID are transmitted as in the case of registration request A when registering a point member. Then, the group store information is received, and then the same contents as the registration request B, and the member card ID of the second unregistered member card and the initial password or the last four digits of the other system member ID What is necessary is just to send an integration request.

  In the second embodiment, in order to process in the same manner as the takeover request sent from the card unit 20 or the kiosk terminal 30, as shown in D170 of FIG. 5, the takeover request sent from the PC 6 or the mobile phone 7 is processed. In the point management device 50 that includes the registered personal identification number and receives the takeover request, the point member information matching process shown in S432 ′ of FIG. 54 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the transfer request transmitted from the mobile phone 7 does not include the registered personal identification number, and the point member information matching process shown in S432 ′ of FIG. 53 is not performed in the point management device 50 that has received the transfer request. You may do it. This is because the registered password has already been verified in S201 of FIG.

  In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, the example in which the determination by the same store determination unit (S437 ′) is performed after the determination by the registration determination unit (S400 ′) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, the determination by the registration determination unit may be performed after the determination by the same store determination unit.

  In the second embodiment described above, as shown in S433 ′ and S437 ′ of FIG. 54, the same store determination unit specifies a store from the registered member card ID and the new member card ID included in the takeover request, and Although the example which determines whether a store corresponds is demonstrated, it is not restricted to this, For example, based on reception of a login request, from a login ID (registered member card ID) included in the login request, a store (for example, A (Store), all member card IDs registered as store members are extracted from the system management device 40 of the specified store, and the new member card ID included in the handover request is received based on the reception of the handover request It may be determined whether or not is one of the extracted membership card IDs. According to this, it is necessary to specify a store from the new membership card ID. There. That is, the same store determination means may be any device that determines whether the registered member card ID and the new member card ID included in the handover request are the member card IDs of the member cards issued at the same store.

  In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, an example in which the takeover date and the takeover source ID are stored as takeover specifying information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the takeover date is used as the takeover specifying information. Only the takeover source ID may be stored without storing, and a flag may be stored as takeover specifying information.

  Finally, “prior art”, “problems to be solved by the invention”, and “effects of the invention” corresponding to the invention described in the above embodiment will be described.

  First, as a first prior art, JP-A-2006-102079 (FIG. 9, paragraphs 0163, 0198, and 0200) is shown. In this prior art 1, a member operates in an integrated management apparatus that manages attribute information and points of a member possessing a member card in which the member ID is recorded in association with a member ID that is member identification information. When receiving the member ID and attribute information transmitted from the information terminal and registering as a mail member, if the received attribute information is already registered, it is associated with the already registered attribute information. The member ID and the received member ID are registered in association with each other, and the points corresponding to the member IDs are integrated.

  However, in the integrated management apparatus shown in the first prior art, a member card that is an example of the recording medium on which the member ID is recorded is lost by a member and is different from the member who picked up the lost member card. Member transmits the member ID of the picked-up member card and the attribute information of the other member from the information terminal to the integrated management apparatus, the attribute information of the other member is stored in the integrated management apparatus. If already registered, the points of the member who lost the membership card and the points of the other member are integrated, so that there is a first problem that the member who lost the membership card suffers a disadvantage.

  Therefore, in the first invention described in the above embodiment, in order to solve the first problem, recording is performed on a recording medium (member card) issued to a member registered as a store member in each store. A registration request including member identification information (member card ID) that can individually identify the member being received is received from the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30) operated by the member. Registration means for registering the member identification information included in the received registration request (control unit 52), and the number of points owned by the member of the member identification information in association with the member identification information registered by the registration means A point management device 50 having a point management means (point member information DB) for managing the member integration request including a plurality of member identification information from the operation terminal Based on the reception, the store specifying means (control unit 52) for specifying store identification information (store ID) that can individually identify each store corresponding to the plurality of member identification information, and the store specifying means The store identification determining means (control unit 52) for determining whether or not the respective store identification information matches with each other, and the plurality of member identification information on the condition that it is determined not to match by the store matching determination means A point management apparatus having member identification information association processing means (control unit 52) for performing member identification information association processing for association was configured. According to this, when the stores corresponding to the plurality of member identification information specified from the plurality of member identification information included in the member integration request match, the plurality of member identification information is not associated, It is possible to reduce the possibility that the member's points that have lost the recording medium are integrated with the points of other members who have picked up the recording medium, and the possibility that the member who has lost the recording medium suffers a disadvantage.

  Further, in the first aspect of the invention, member identification information (member card ID) already registered in the point management means (point member information DB) and member identification information newly registered (not yet registered) are included. Same member determination that determines whether or not there is member identification information associated with the already registered member identification information included in the received member integration request based on the reception of the member integration request Means (control unit 52), on the condition that it is determined by the same member determination means, store identification information (store ID) of the store corresponding to the associated member identification information Store identification information of a store corresponding to the associated member identification information further specified by the store specifying means (control unit 52) and specified by the store specifying means. The store match determination unit (control unit 52) determines whether or not the store identification information of the store corresponding to the newly registered member identification information included in the member integration request matches. A point management device (50) may be used. According to this, the store corresponding to the member identification information registered in association with the already registered member identification information included in the member integration request matches the store corresponding to the newly registered member identification information. Also in this case, since the newly registered member identification information is not associated, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the member who lost the recording medium suffers a disadvantage.

  In the first aspect of the invention, the reception based on the reception of the member integration request including a plurality of member identification information (member card ID) already registered in the point management means (point member information DB). The same member determination means (control unit 52) for determining whether or not there is member identification information associated with any of the plurality of member identification information included in the member integration request. On the condition that it is determined by the means that the store identification information (store ID) of the store corresponding to the associated member identification information is further specified by the store specifying means (control unit 52), the store Corresponds to the store identification information of the store corresponding to the associated member identification information specified by the specifying means and the remaining member identification information included in the member integration request That the shop identification information of the store that may point management device (50), characterized in that whether a to be determined by the store match determining means (the control unit 52) coincides. According to this, the store corresponding to the member identification information associated with any of the plurality of already registered member identification information included in the member integration request, and the remaining of the plurality of member identification information Even when the store corresponding to the member identification information matches, the plurality of member identification information is not associated with each other, so that the possibility that a member who has lost the recording medium suffers a disadvantage can be further reduced.

  In the first invention, the registration request including the member identification information (member card ID) and attribute information of the member is received from the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30). Based on the information, the member management means (point member information DB) for managing the attribute information included in the registration request in association with the member identification information included in the received registration request, and the registration from the operation terminal Attribute information determination means (control unit 52) for determining whether or not the attribute information included in the received registration request is already managed based on the reception of the request. On the condition that it is determined that the information is managed by the means, store identification information (store ID) of the store corresponding to the member identification information included in the registration request, and the member management The store identification means (control unit 52) identifies store identification information of the store corresponding to the member identification information already registered in association with the attribute information already managed by the means, and identified by the store identification means Whether the store identification information of the store corresponding to the member identification information included in the registration request matches the store identification information of the store corresponding to the already registered member identification information. Judgment is made by the judgment means (control unit 52), and the member identification information included in the registration request and the already managed member identification information are extracted on condition that the shop match judgment means judges that they match. The point management device (50) may further include a member identification information extraction unit (control unit 52). According to this, the attribute information included in the registration request is already managed, the store corresponding to the member identification information already registered in association with the managed attribute information, and the member included in the registration request If the store corresponding to the identification information matches, the member identification information included in the registration request and the already registered member identification information are extracted, so the member who picked up the recording medium of another member Can specify the possibility of registering the recording medium of the other member separately from his / her own recording medium.

  In the first aspect of the invention, the point summing unit (control unit 52) for summing the number of points corresponding to each member identification information associated by the member identification information association process, and the point summing unit The point management device (50) may further include point use processing means (control unit 52) that performs processing for allowing the member to use the total number of points to enjoy a predetermined service. . According to this, since the points corresponding to each member identification information registered in association with each other can be added and used, the convenience of the members is improved.

  Furthermore, in the first invention, an information disclosure request (login request) including the member identification information (member card ID) is received from the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30). Based on the same member determination means (control unit 52) for determining whether or not there is member identification information associated with the login member identification information (login ID) which is the received member identification information, and the same member A member-dedicated page dedicated to the member including at least the number of points corresponding to the login member identification information is transmitted to the operation terminal on the condition that it is determined that the determination member does not have the login member identification information. Including at least the total number of points totaled by the point summing means (control unit 52) The members-only page transmission means for transmitting members dedicated pages to the operating terminal (control unit 52), it may be point management apparatus characterized by further having (50). According to this, since the member-dedicated page dedicated to the member is transmitted regardless of the member identification information included in the received information disclosure request, the member-specific page is transmitted. Can be improved.

  Further, in FIG. 19 and paragraphs 0195 to 0197 of the first prior art, a member who has registered as a store member at each store can individually identify the member at his / her own information terminal (PC or mobile phone). When a registration operation is performed by inputting a member ID or the like which is a member identification information, a registration request including the input member ID or the like is transmitted to the integrated management device, and the transmitted information is transmitted in the integrated management device. It is described that the member ID included in the registration request is registered as a mail member.

  However, in the integrated management apparatus shown in the first prior art, a store member who does not own an information terminal or a store member who is not good at operating an information terminal cannot transmit the registration request. There is a second problem that it is impossible to register as an e-mail member, which is an example, and it is not possible to give all store members the opportunity to enjoy the benefits of a point member fairly.

  Therefore, in the second invention described in the above embodiment, in order to solve the second problem, the identification is made from the recording medium (member card) issued to the member registered as a store member in each store. And a point management device 50 having point management means (point member information DB) for managing the number of points owned by the member in association with member identification information (member card ID) capable of individually identifying the member. The first member specifying information capable of specifying the member identification information is magnetically or electrically recorded on the recording medium, and the second member specifying information capable of specifying the member identification information is visible. It is recorded and transmitted from the store terminal when the member accepts the recording medium at the store terminal (card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30) installed in each store. The member specified from the first member specifying information included in the received first registration request based on receiving the first registration request including the first member specifying information read from the received recording medium The identification information is registered in the point management means, and transmitted from the information terminal when the member inputs the second member specifying information and performs a registration operation on the information terminal (PC6, mobile phone 7) possessed by the member. The member identification information specified from the second member specifying information included in the received second registration request is received based on the received second registration request including the input second member specifying information. A point management apparatus having registration means (control unit 52) for registering with the point management means is configured. According to this, in the point management device, when the second registration request is transmitted from the information terminal owned by the member, the membership card ID is registered, and the first registration request is issued from the store terminal installed in the store. Even if it is sent, the membership card ID is registered, so it becomes possible to register the membership card ID as a point member even if it is a store member who does not own an information terminal or a store member who is not good at operating information terminals. , All store members can be given the opportunity to enjoy the benefits of a point member fairly.

  In the second aspect of the invention, in response to the second registration request, an e-mail address acquiring means (control unit 52) acquires the e-mail address of the member who performs the registration operation from the information terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7). ) And the e-mail address acquired by the e-mail address acquisition means are managed in association with the member identification information (member card ID) specified from the second member specifying information included in the received second registration request. Member management means (point member information DB), notification contents notified to the member (questionnaire information, event information, winning information), and information that can identify member identification information of a member to be notified (questionnaire target member) Notification information setting means (display 54 and attribute information of the event target member, member card ID of the elected member) Managed by the member management means in association with the member identification information to be notified specified from the information set by the input device 55, the transfer device communication unit 51b, the control unit 52) and the notification information setting means. E-mail address extracting means (control unit 52) for extracting the e-mail address that is present, and e-mail including the notification information for providing the notification content set by the notification information setting means is extracted by the e-mail address extracting means The confirmation request (login request) including the first member specifying information is received from the electronic mail transmitting means (control unit 52) for transmitting to the electronic mail address and the store terminal (card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30). The member identification information specified from the first member specifying information included in the received confirmation request is based on the notification information setting. Notification target determination means (control unit 52) for determining whether or not the member identification information is the notification target specified from the information set by the stage, and is the member identification information to be notified by the notification target determination means It is good also as a point management device (50) characterized by having further the notice information return means (control part 52) which returns the notice information to the store terminal on the condition that it was judged. According to this, to the point member who registered from the information terminal, the notification information can be quickly notified by e-mail, and the point member who has registered from the store terminal and has no e-mail address registered The notification information can be sent back to the store terminal for notification.

  In the second aspect of the invention, based on the reception of the confirmation request (login request) from the store terminal (card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30), the first member specifying information included in the received confirmation request. E-mail address management determination means (control unit 52) for determining whether or not an e-mail address is managed by the member management means (point member information DB) in association with the specified member identification information (member card ID) The notification information return means (control unit 52) sends the notification information to the store terminal on the condition that the electronic mail address management determination means determines that the electronic mail address is managed. Alternatively, the point management device (50) may be characterized in that no reply is made. According to this, in the point management device, the notification information is not returned to the store terminal for the point member whose e-mail address is registered, so the notification to the point member who has already received the notification information by e-mail. Useless duplicate transmission of information is prevented.

  In the second invention, the first member specifying information and / or the second member specifying information capable of specifying each of a plurality of member identification information (member card ID) from the store terminal (card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30). Stores that can individually identify each store corresponding to each member identification information specified from the plurality of first member specifying information and / or second member specifying information based on receiving a member integration request including a plurality of The identification information (store ID) is specified and a member integration request including a plurality of second member specifying information capable of specifying each of the plurality of member identification information is received from the information terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7). A store specifying means (control unit 52) for specifying store identification information of each store corresponding to each member identification information specified from the plurality of second member specifying information, The plurality of members on the condition that the store match determination means (control unit 52) for determining whether or not the store identification information specified by the means match, and the store match determination means determine that they do not match The point management device (50) may further include member identification information association processing means (control unit 52) for performing member identification information association processing for associating identification information. According to this, when the stores corresponding to the plurality of member identification information specified from the plurality of member identification information included in the member integration request match, the plurality of member identification information is not associated, It is possible to reduce the possibility that the member's points that have lost the recording medium are integrated with the points of other members who have picked up the recording medium, and the possibility that the member who has lost the recording medium suffers a disadvantage.

  In the second invention, group setting means (display 54 and input device 55) for setting a group to which a plurality of stores belong, and a plurality of member identification information (members) from the store terminal (card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30). Each of the first member specifying information and / or the second member specifying information and / or the second member specifying information and / or the second member specifying information and / or the second member specifying information. The store identification information (store ID) capable of individually identifying each store corresponding to each member identification information specified from the member identification information is specified, and a plurality of member identifications are made from the information terminal (PC6, mobile phone 7). Based on receiving a member integration request including a plurality of second member specifying information capable of specifying each piece of information, the information is specified from the plurality of second member specifying information. Store specifying means (control unit 52) for specifying store identification information of each store corresponding to each member identification information, and each store identification information specified by the store specifying means are assigned to the same group set by the group setting means. The group determination means (control unit 52) for determining whether or not the store identification information of the store to which the store belongs, and on the condition that the group determination means has determined that the store identification information of the store belonging to the same group, Member identification information association processing means (control unit 52) for performing member identification information association processing for associating a plurality of member identification information, and corresponding to each member identification information associated by the member identification information association processing The member determines a point summing unit (control unit 52) for summing the number of points and a summed point number summed by the point summing unit. Points Using processing means performs a process for causing the used to receive the service (control unit 52), may be point management apparatus characterized by further having (50). According to this, when the stores corresponding to the plurality of member identification information specified from the plurality of member identification information included in the member integration request match, the plurality of member identification information is not associated, It is possible to reduce the possibility that the member's points that have lost the recording medium are integrated with the points of other members who have picked up the recording medium, and the possibility that the member who has lost the recording medium suffers a disadvantage.

  Furthermore, in the point management system (1) including the point management device (50) according to the second invention and the store terminal (card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30), the store terminal is a plurality of integration targets. Receiving a recording medium (member card), reading the first member specifying information recorded on each received recording medium, and issuing the member integration request including the plurality of read first member specifying information to the point management device It is good also as a point management system characterized by transmitting to. According to this, it is possible to save the trouble of manually inputting member identification information to be integrated at the store terminal.

  Next, as a second prior art, JP-A-2005-296235 (FIG. 7, paragraphs 0061 and 0064) is shown. In this second prior art, attribute information of the member is stored in association with the member identification information of the member registered as a member in each store, and the member of each store in which each member is a member. In the member service providing system provided with a management device that stores the points of each store owned by the member in association with the identification information, the member identification information newly registered after the new member registration is performed and the member identification information When receiving the attribute information of the member carrying the recorded membership card, it is determined whether or not the attribute information (name and e-mail address) matches the already registered attribute information. The member identification information corresponding to the attribute information and the received newly registered member identification information are registered in association with each other to integrate points of each store.

  However, in the member service providing system shown in the second prior art, if the attribute information matches, the points of any store are integrated, so the member service providing system is used for promoting visits between group stores. There was a third problem that the store's desire to do so could not be met.

  Therefore, in the third invention described in the above embodiment, in order to solve the third problem, recording is performed on a recording medium (member card) issued to a member registered as a store member in each store. A registration request including member identification information (member card ID) that can individually identify the member being received is received from the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30) operated by the member. The registration means (control unit 52) for registering the member identification information included in the received registration request and the number of points owned by the member of the member identification information in association with the member identification information registered by the registration means A point management device 50 having a point management means (point member information DB) to be managed, and a group setting means for setting a group to which a plurality of stores belong ( Display 54 and input device 55) and each store corresponding to the plurality of member identification information included in the received member integration request based on receiving the member integration request including the plurality of member identification information from the operation terminal Store specifying means (control unit 52) for specifying store identification information (store ID) that can be individually identified, and each store identification information specified by the store specifying means is assigned to the same group set by the group setting means The group determination means (control unit 52) for determining whether or not the store identification information of the store to which the store belongs, and on the condition that the group determination means has determined that the store identification information of the store belonging to the same group, Member identification information association processing means (control unit 52) for performing member identification information association processing for associating a plurality of member identification information, and the member identification A point summing unit (control unit 52) that sums the number of points corresponding to each member identification information associated by the information correlating process, and the member provides a predetermined service for the total number of points summed by the point summing unit. The point management apparatus which has the point use process means (control part 52) which performs the process for making it use for enjoying was comprised. According to this, only when each store corresponding to each member identification information specified from the plurality of member specifying information included in the member integration request is a group store, the plurality of member specifying included in the member integration request is included. Since a plurality of member identification information specified from the information is registered in association with each other and points corresponding to the plurality of member identification information can be added together and used, it can be used to improve customer attraction at a group store.

  In the third aspect of the invention, the registration means (control unit 52) is determined to be not store identification information (store ID) of stores belonging to the same group by the group determination means (control unit 52). , Each member identification information included in the member integration request including a plurality of member identification information (member card ID) newly registered in the point management means (not registered yet) is registered without being associated with each other. A point management device (50) may be used. According to this, since a plurality of newly registered member identification information included in the member integration request is registered without being associated with each other, it is not necessary to perform the registration operation again, and the convenience of the member is improved.

  In the third aspect of the invention, the registration means (control unit 52) is determined to be not store identification information (store ID) of stores belonging to the same group by the group determination means (control unit 52). The newly registered member included in the member integration request including member identification information (member card ID) newly registered (not yet registered) in the point management means and already registered member identification information The point management apparatus (50) may be characterized in that the identification information is registered without being associated with the already registered member identification information. According to this, when each store corresponding to each member identification information included in the member integration request is not the same group store, the newly registered member identification information included in the member integration request is already registered. Since the registration is performed without being associated with the identification information, the registration operation does not need to be performed again, and the convenience of the member is improved.

  In the third aspect of the invention, a group store list request (login request and group store list request) including the member identification information (member card ID) from the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30). ) Is received, a store specifying means (control unit 52) for specifying store identification information (store ID) of the store corresponding to the member identification information included in the received group store list request, and the store specification Group store specifying means (control unit 52) for specifying each store set by the group setting means (display 54 and input device 55) as a group store of the group to which the store of the store identification information specified by the means belongs, Store list reply means (control unit) for returning a list of stores specified by the group store specifying means to the operation terminal And 2) it may be point management apparatus characterized by further having (50). According to this, the store corresponding to the member identification information included in the group store list request received from the operation terminal operated by the member is identified, and the group store list of the group to which the identified store belongs is returned. Allow members to recognize group stores.

  Furthermore, in the third aspect, the point management is performed based on the fact that a new group is set or a new store is added to the already set group by the group setting means (display 54 and input device 55). Member identification information extraction means (control unit 52) for extracting member identification information of a recording medium (member card) issued at each store belonging to the group, out of member identification information (member card ID) already registered in the apparatus. And store notification means (control unit 52) for performing processing for notifying a member of the member identification information extracted by the member identification information extraction means of a list of stores belonging to the group or the new store, It is good also as a point management device (50) characterized by having further. According to this, when a new group is set or a new store is added to an already set group, the group store is issued to the owner of the recording medium issued at each store belonging to the group. Since the list or the new store is notified, the member can recognize that there is a store that can be newly integrated.

  In the fourth invention described in the above embodiment, in order to solve the third problem, recording is performed on a recording medium (member card) issued to a member who has registered as a store member in each store. A registration request including member identification information (member card ID) that can individually identify the member being received is received from the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30) operated by the member. The registration means (control unit 52) for registering the member identification information included in the received registration request and the number of points owned by the member of the member identification information in association with the member identification information registered by the registration means A point management device (50) having a point management means (point member information DB) for managing, a group setting means for setting a group to which a plurality of stores belong Based on the display 54 and the input device 55) and the reception of the member identification information from the operation terminal, the store identification that can individually identify the stores corresponding to the integrated member identification information that is the received member identification information By the group applicable store determining means (control unit 52) for determining whether or not the information (store ID) is the store identification information of the stores belonging to the group set by the group setting means, and the group applicable store determining means Integrated reception for receiving input of integration target member identification information, which is other member identification information desired to be integrated with the integration source member identification information, on condition that it is determined to be store identification information of a store belonging to a group Integrated reception page transmitting means (control unit 52) for transmitting a page to the operation terminal, and the integrated reception page from the operation terminal Based on the received integration target member identification information, the store identification information of the store corresponding to the received integration target member identification information belongs to the group of stores corresponding to the integration source member identification information The same group store determination means (control unit 52) for determining whether or not the store identification information of the store, and on the condition that the same group store determination means determined that it is store identification information of the same group store, Member identification information association processing means (control unit 52) for performing member identification information association processing for associating the integration source member identification information with the integration target member identification information, and association by the member identification information association processing Point summing means (control unit 52) for summing the number of points corresponding to each member identification information obtained, and summing poi summed by the point summing means The point management apparatus is characterized by further comprising point use processing means (control unit 52) for performing processing for allowing the member to use the number of events to enjoy a predetermined service. According to this, the points are added only to the same group store set as a group by the group setting means, and the members can use the added points. Can be used to improve the number of customers at group stores.

  In the fourth invention, the member identification information association processing means (control unit 52) corresponds to the store identification information (store ID) of the store corresponding to the integration source member identification information and the integration target member identification information. It is good also as a point management device (50) characterized by performing said member identification information matching processing on the condition that it does not correspond with store identification information of a store to do. According to this, it is possible to prevent the number of points owned by the other person from being summed up illegally using the recording medium of the other person picked up at the store where the member is registered as a member.

  In the fourth aspect of the invention, when the member identification information association processing unit (control unit 52) receives the plurality of integration target member identification information input on the integration reception page, The member identification for associating the plurality of integration target member identification information with the integration source member identification information on condition that the store identification information (store ID) of each store corresponding to the integration target member identification information is not the same It is good also as a point management apparatus (50) characterized by performing an information matching process. According to this, even when there are a plurality of integration target member identification information, when the stores corresponding to the plurality of integration target member identification information are the same, the points are not added together. It is possible to prevent the number of points from being summed up illegally.

  Further, in the fourth invention, the same group belonging to the group of stores corresponding to the integrated former member identification information, on the condition that the group corresponding store determination means determines that it is store identification information of a store belonging to the group. The same group store specifying unit (control unit 52) for specifying a store is further included, and the integrated reception page transmitting unit (control unit 52) is information that can recognize the same group store specified by the same group store specifying unit. The point management device (50) may be configured to transmit the integrated reception page including the information to the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30). According to this, since the member can recognize the store where the number of points can be added when adding the points, the convenience of the member can be improved.

  Further, in the fourth invention, the integrated reception page transmitting means (control unit 52) selects a store desired to be integrated among the same group stores specified by the same group store specifying means (control unit 52). The integrated reception page for receiving the input of the integration target member identification information at the selected same group store can be received on the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30). The same group store determination means (control unit 52) transmits the same group selected on the integrated reception page together with the integration target member identification information input on the integrated reception page from the operation terminal. Based on receiving selection information that can specify a store, store identification information (store) corresponding to the received integration target member identification information By determining whether or not D) is the store identification information of the same group store specified from the received selection information, the store identification information of the store corresponding to the integration target member identification information is the integration source The point management device (50) may be characterized in that it is determined whether or not it is store identification information of the same group store belonging to the group of stores corresponding to the member identification information. According to this, the received member identification information is determined by determining whether or not the received member identification information corresponds to the member identification information in the store having a group relationship that can be integrated selected on the integration reception page. It can be determined whether or not the stores corresponding to the same group store.

  In the third invention or the fourth invention, an information disclosure request (login request) including the member identification information (member card ID) from the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30). ) To determine whether there is member identification information associated with the login member identification information (login ID) which is the received member identification information (control unit 52). ) And a member-dedicated page dedicated to the member including at least the number of points corresponding to the login member identification information on the condition that it is determined that the same member determining means does not exist, to the operation terminal, Summed points summed by the point summing means (control unit 52) on the condition that it is determined by the same member judging means The membership dedicated page transmission means (control unit 52) to be transmitted to the operation terminal of the members-only page that contains at least, may be point management apparatus characterized by further having (50). According to this, since the member-dedicated page dedicated to the member is transmitted regardless of the member identification information included in the received information disclosure request, the member-specific page is transmitted. Can be improved.

  Next, as a third prior art, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-890 (FIGS. 6, 9, and 10) is shown. In the third prior art, for each predetermined area, store names of stores belonging to each area and store information (for example, event information) related to the store are stored in association with each other, and the mobile phone operated by the user is stored. A game hall information distribution device is described that, based on reception of information on a region selected by the user from a terminal device, returns a store belonging to the region in a selectable manner and returns store information on the store selected by the user. Has been.

  However, in the game hall information distribution device shown in the third prior art, the user can recognize the store information of the store selected by the user. However, when the store is a group store, As a result, there is a fourth problem in that it is impossible for the user to recognize the existence of other stores, and it is impossible to meet the store's desire to use the amusement hall information distribution apparatus for improving the number of customers at the group stores.

  Therefore, in the fifth invention described in the above embodiment, in order to solve the fourth problem, from the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30) operated by the member, the store Store information related to the store specified from the store specifying information included in the received store information request based on the reception of the store information request (registration request) including the store specifying information (member card ID) A point management device (50) having store information providing means (control unit 52) for providing event information) to the operation terminal, and a group setting means (display 54 and input) for setting a group to which a plurality of stores belong Device 55) and store identification information (store ID) capable of individually identifying stores registered in the store information providing device, and the store When belonging to the loop, based on the store management means (group DB, store DB) for managing the group identification information (group name) that can individually identify the group, and the store information request received, Group identification information determination means (control unit) for determining whether or not the group identification information is associated with the store identification information of the store specified from the store identification information included in the received store information request in the store management means 52) and other store identification information associated with the group identification information in the store management unit on the condition that the group identification information determination unit determines that the group identification information is associated with the group identification information. Group store information providing means (control unit 52) that provides the operation terminal with group store information capable of recognizing other stores When constituted the point management device having a. According to this, when the store specified from the store specifying information included in the store information request received from the operation terminal operated by the member belongs to the group, the group store information is provided to the operation terminal. The presence of other group stores belonging to the group can be recognized by the member, and the store's desire to use the point management device for improving the number of customers at the group store can be met.

  In the fifth invention, from the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30), as the store information request (registration requests A and B), the e-mail address of the member, Member management means (point member) that manages the received e-mail address and member identification information in association with each other based on the reception of the member identification information (member card ID) that can identify the store as the store identification information Information group), and the group store information providing means (control unit 52) is provided on the condition that the group identification information determining means determines that the group identification information (group name) is associated. , Providing store information (event information) of stores of other store identification information (store ID) associated with the group identification information Confirmation information for confirming whether or not the information is desired is provided to the operation terminal as the group store information, and the member management means is information that can specify the store for which the store information is desired to be provided from the operation terminal. And managing the store identification information of the store identified from the received reply information in association with the member identification information based on receiving the reply information (registration request B) including the store information providing means (control The section 52) sets an e-mail address including store information of the store in the store identification information managed in association with the member identification information by the member management means to an e-mail address managed in association with the member identification information. It is good also as a point management apparatus (50) characterized by transmitting with respect to it. According to this, an email containing store information of a store desired by the member among other group stores belonging to the group of stores registered by the member is transmitted to the email address of the member. , Improve the convenience of members.

  In the fifth aspect, the store management means (group DB, store DB) can individually identify the region to which the store location of the store identification information belongs in association with the store identification information (store ID). The group store information providing means (control unit 52) manages store identification information (member card) included in the store information request (registration request A) received by the store management means. The group store information capable of recognizing stores of other store identification information associated with the same region identification information as the region identification information managed in association with the store identification information of the store identified from (ID). It is good also as a point management apparatus (50) provided with respect to the said operation terminal (PC6, the mobile telephone 7, the card unit 20, the kiosk terminal 30). According to this, even when there are many stores belonging to a group, a group store located in the same area as the store specified from the store specifying information included in the store information request received from the operation terminal operated by the member is recognized. Since possible group store information is provided to the operation terminal, the convenience of the member is improved.

  In the fifth aspect, the store management means (group DB, store DB) associates the store identification information (store ID) with information (zip code) that can specify the store location of the store identification information. ), And the group store information providing means (control unit 52) stores the store of the other store identification information associated with the group identification information (group name) in the store management means. The group store information that can be recognized in the order of being located near the location of the store specified from the store specifying information (member card ID) included in the information request (registration request A) is the operation terminal (PC6, mobile phone 7). , The card unit 20, and the kiosk terminal 30) may be provided as a point management device (50). According to this, even when there are many stores belonging to the group, the groups are arranged in the order in which the stores are located closer to the location of the store specified from the store specifying information included in the store information request received from the operation terminal operated by the member. Since the group store information that can recognize the store is provided to the operation terminal, the convenience of the member is improved.

  In the fifth aspect of the invention, the member identification information (member card) already registered by the point management means (point member information DB) from the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30). ID), which is the member identification information of a store different from the store specified from the integration source member identification information, and the integration target member identification information already registered by the point management means Member identification information association processing means (control) for performing member identification information association processing for associating the integration source member identification information with the integration target member identification information based on the reception of the member integration request for integrating The point management device (50) may further include a unit 52). According to this, when a member integration request for integrating the integration source member identification information and the integration target member identification information is received, the store specified from the integration source member identification information and the integration target member identification information are specified. Since the integration is performed only when the store is different, the possibility that the points of the member who lost the recording medium will be integrated with the points of other members who picked up the recording medium is reduced. It is possible to reduce a risk that a member who has lost the medium suffers a disadvantage.

  In the fifth aspect of the invention, the member identification information (member card) already registered by the point management means (point member information DB) from the operation terminal (PC 6, mobile phone 7, card unit 20, kiosk terminal 30). ID), which is member identification information of a store belonging to the same group as the store identified from the integration source member identification information, and which has already been registered by the point management means Member identification information association processing for performing member identification information association processing for associating the integration source member identification information with the integration target member identification information on condition that the member integration request for integrating the target member identification information is received. A processing unit (control unit 52) and a point for adding the points corresponding to each member identification information associated by the member identification information association processing. And a point use processing unit (control unit 52) that performs a process for allowing the member to use the total number of points added by the point summing unit to enjoy a predetermined service; Further, a point management device (50) may be provided. According to this, when a member integration request for integrating the integration source member identification information and the integration target member identification information is received, the store specified from the integration source member identification information and the integration target member identification information are specified. Since the integration is performed only when the store to be operated is a group store, the points corresponding to the member identification information can be added together and used to improve the number of customers at the group store.

  Furthermore, as a fourth prior art, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-141882 (FIGS. 1, 11, 24, 37 to 40, paragraphs 0338, 0390) is shown. In the fourth prior art, a registration request including recording medium identification information (member ID) recorded on a recording medium (member card) issued to a member who has registered as a member in a store (game hall), The member's attribute information is received from an information terminal (PC or mobile phone) operated by the member and registered with the member ID included in the received registration request and associated with the member ID. In addition, an integrated management device that manages the accumulated usage amount and assigns points according to the accumulated usage amount is described. In this integrated management device, when a member loses or damages a membership card and a new membership card (new membership card) is reissued instead of the membership card (old membership card), When a takeover request including the old member ID and the new member ID is received from a member management apparatus provided in the store, a takeover process is performed for associating information associated with the old member ID with the new member ID.

  However, in the integrated management apparatus shown in the fourth prior art, the mail member registration process is performed based on the fact that the registration request is received from the information terminal operated by the member. Since processing is performed based on the reception of the takeover request from the member management device provided in the store, in order to perform the takeover processing, a program accompanying transmission / reception of the takeover request is assembled in the member management device and the integrated management device, There is a fifth problem that it is necessary to provide a device for the transmission / reception, which is costly and low in cost effectiveness.

  Therefore, in the sixth invention described in the above embodiment, in order to solve the fifth problem, a recording medium (member) issued to a member registered as a store member in each store (game hall) A registration request including member identification information (member card ID) that can individually identify the member recorded in the card) from the operation terminal operated by the member, and the member identification included in the received registration request Registration means (control unit 52) for registering information, and point management means (point member information DB) for managing the number of points owned by the member of the member identification information in association with the member identification information registered by the registration means In addition, when a new recording medium is reissued in place of the recording medium on which the registered member identification information that is already registered is recorded, the registered member identification information A point management device (50) having handover processing means (control unit 52) for performing handover processing for associating the number of associated points with new member identification information that is member identification information recorded on the new recording medium The point management apparatus is characterized in that the takeover processing is performed by the takeover processing means based on reception of a takeover request including the new member identification information together with the registered member identification information from the operation terminal. Configured. According to this, since the takeover processing is performed based on the fact that the takeover request is received from the operation terminal operated by the member, the point management device and the member management device provided in the store have a program associated with transmission / reception of the takeover request. Or a device for performing the transmission / reception is not required, and the cost for performing the handover process is reduced.

  In the sixth invention, the handover processing means (control unit 52) manages the number of points associated with the registered member identification information in association with the new member identification information as the handover processing. At the same time, a point management device (50) may be provided which performs a process of adding the points associated with the new member identification information. According to this, even when the number of points is managed in association with the new member identification information, the number of points associated with the registered member identification information is associated with the new member identification information. Therefore, the convenience of the owner who owns the plurality of recording media in which the member identification information is recorded is improved.

  In the sixth aspect of the invention, based on the receipt of the takeover request, the registered member identification information and the new member identification information included in the received takeover request are recorded at the same store (member card ) Whether the member identification information (member card ID) recorded in the same store determination means (control unit 52) for determining whether or not the member identification information is recorded, and whether the new member identification information included in the received takeover request is registered. Registration determination means (control unit 52) for determining whether or not, the takeover processing means (control unit 52) is recorded on a recording medium issued at the same store by the same store determination means. A point tube characterized in that the handover process is performed on the condition that it is determined to be member identification information and is determined not to be registered by the registration determination means. It may be as a device (50). According to this, since the handover process is performed on the member identification information of the recording medium issued at the same store, the handover process is performed on the member identification information of the recording medium issued at another store. There is no fear. In addition, since the handover process is performed for unregistered new member identification information that is not registered in the point management device, the number of points associated with the registered new member identification information may become invalid. In addition, the number of points associated with the registered member identification information of another person is not added to the number of points associated with the registered new member identification information, and the other person is not lost. .

  Also, in the sixth invention, the transaction is generated by transaction processing (ball lending process) at the store using the member identification information (member card ID) and a recording medium (member card) on which the member identification information is recorded. The point collection target information (usage amount) to be collected at a predetermined collection interval (every day), the point collection target information collection means (transfer device communication unit 51b), and the members collected by the point grant target information collection means Point addition processing means (control unit 52) for performing point addition processing for adding points according to the collected point grant target information to the number of points associated with the identification information, and taking over In the processing, after the point addition processing for adding the points according to the point grant target information corresponding to the registered member identification information is performed Passing specification information (takeover date, takeover source ID) that can specify that transfer processing has been performed is stored, and the point addition processing means stores the transfer specification information in association with the new member identification information. The point corresponding to the point granting information corresponding to the registered member identification information and the point corresponding to the new member identification information with respect to the number of points associated with the new member identification information While performing the point addition process at the time of takeover that adds points according to the grant target information, on the condition that the takeover identification information is not stored, for the number of points associated with the new member identification information, Points management device that does not add points according to point grant target information corresponding to the registered member identification information ( 0) it may be. According to this, since the point addition process at the time of takeover is performed on the condition that the takeover identification information is managed, the point assignment corresponding to the registered member identification information is performed regardless of the collection interval of the point grant target information. Of the target information, the points to be added to the points associated with the new member identification information can be reliably added.

  In the sixth invention, in the point addition processing by the point addition processing means (control unit 52), an upper limit value of points to be added to the number of points associated with the member identification information (member card ID) The point addition processing means (control unit 52) further includes a point corresponding to the registered member identification information when performing the take-over point addition process. Condition that the total value of the points according to the grant target information (use amount) and the points according to the point grant target information corresponding to the new member identification information exceeds the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means And a process of adding the upper limit point to the number of points associated with the new member identification information. It may be cement management device (50). According to this, when the total value of the point according to the point grant target information corresponding to the registered member identification information and the point according to the point grant target information corresponding to the new member identification information exceeds the upper limit value Since the upper limit points are added to the points associated with the new member identification information, points exceeding the upper limit are not given to the person who took over, Points can be awarded.

  In the sixth aspect of the invention, a summation condition setting means (control unit 52) for setting a summation condition for summing points corresponding to a plurality of member identification information (member card ID), and the operation terminal ( When the member integration request including the plurality of member identification information is received from the PC 6, the mobile phone 7, the card unit 20, and the kiosk terminal 30), the plurality of member identification information included in the received member integration request is The above-mentioned reception is performed on the condition that the sum condition determination means (control unit 52) for judging whether or not the sum condition set by the sum condition setting means is satisfied, and that the sum condition determination means determines that the sum condition is satisfied. Member identification information association processing means (control unit 52) for performing member identification information association processing for associating each member identification information included in the member integration request; The point summing means for summing the number of points corresponding to each member identification information associated with the identification information associating process (control unit 52), it may be point management apparatus characterized by further having (50). According to this, on the condition that each of the plurality of member identification information satisfies the summation condition, the point summation process for summing up the number of points corresponding to the member identification information is performed, so that each member identification information is recorded. The convenience of the owner who owns the plurality of recorded recording media is improved.

  In the sixth aspect of the invention, the summation condition setting means (control unit 52) is configured to store each member identification information (member card ID) included in the received member integration request on each recording medium (member card). It is good also as a point management device (50) characterized by setting up that the issuing store differs as the total conditions. According to this, since the point summing process is performed only when the issue store of each recording medium in which each member identification information included in the member integration request is recorded is different, the number of points of the member who lost the recording medium It is possible to reduce the possibility of being added to the points of other members who have picked up the recording medium, and to reduce the possibility that a member who has lost the recording medium suffers a disadvantage.

  In the sixth aspect of the invention, the information processing apparatus further includes group setting means (display 54 and input device 55) for setting a group to which a plurality of stores belong, and the summation condition setting means (control unit 52) is configured to receive the received member integration. Setting that the issuing store of each recording medium (member card) recorded with each member identification information (member card ID) included in the request belongs to the same group set by the group setting means as the sum condition A feature point management device (50) may be used. According to this, since the point summing process is performed only when the issuing store of each recording medium in which each member identification information included in the member integration request is recorded belongs to the same group, it corresponds to each member identification information. It can be used by adding the number of points, and can be used to improve the number of customers at group stores.

  Furthermore, in the sixth aspect of the invention, whether there is other registered member identification information registered in association with the registered member identification information included in the received handover request based on the reception of the handover request And further including an association determination unit (control unit 52) for determining whether or not the handover determination unit (control unit 52) performs the handover process on the condition that it is determined by the association determination unit. As the point management device (50), the registration means (control unit 52) registers the new member identification information included in the takeover request in association with the other already registered member identification information. Also good. According to this, if there is other registered member identification information registered in association with the registered member identification information included in the handover request, the new member identification information included in the handover request is transferred to the other registered member identification information. Since it is registered in association with the identification information, there is no need to send a member integration request including the other registered member identification information and new member identification information, and a plurality of recording media on which the member identification information is recorded The convenience of the owner is improved.

FIG. 1 is an overall view showing an example of a point management system including a point management apparatus which is a management apparatus according to the present invention. FIG. 2A is a front view of the first member card, and FIG. 2B is a front view of the second member card. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed on the display of the PC or mobile phone. FIG. 4 is a diagram following FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram following FIG. 3. FIG. 6 is a functional block diagram showing an example of each device installed in the first game hall. FIG. 7 is a functional block diagram showing an example of each device installed in the second game arcade. FIG. 8A is a front view of the card unit and the pachinko machine, and FIG. 8B is a cross-sectional right side view of the card unit. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed on the display of the card unit and the kiosk terminal. FIG. 10 is a diagram following FIG. 9. FIG. 11 is a diagram following FIG. 9. FIG. 12A is a perspective view illustrating an example of a kiosk terminal, and FIG. 12B is a functional block diagram thereof. FIG. 13A is a diagram illustrating an example of the storage contents of the remaining amount management DB stored in the system management device and the transfer device, and FIG. 13B is a storage of the first member information DB stored in the first member management device. FIG. 13C is a diagram illustrating an example of contents stored in the second member information DB stored in the second member management apparatus. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing upon deposit in the card unit. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing using a membership card in a card unit. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when the card return button is operated in the card unit. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of a standard report display screen displayed on the system management apparatus. FIG. 18 is a diagram subsequent to FIG. 17, illustrating an example of an event information transmission screen. FIG. 19 is a diagram subsequent to FIG. 17, illustrating an example of a questionnaire result display screen. FIG. 20 is a diagram subsequent to FIG. 17, illustrating an example of a point status display screen. FIG. 21 is a functional block diagram illustrating an example of each device connected to the point management device. FIG. 22A is a diagram illustrating an example of processing after the game hall is closed, and FIG. 22B is a flowchart illustrating an example of point grant processing performed by the point management device. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of the storage contents of each DB stored in the point management device. (A) is a point member information DB, (b) is a notification information DB, and (c) is a usage amount DB. FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of storage contents of each DB stored in the point management device, where (a) is an encoding information DB, (b) is a group DB, (c) is a store DB, and (d) is a lottery information. DB. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of group setting processing performed by the point management apparatus. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of a questionnaire process performed by the point management device. FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of a questionnaire screen displayed on the display of the PC and the mobile phone. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a lottery process performed by the point management device. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of a winning screen displayed on the display of the PC or mobile phone. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of event information distribution processing performed by the point management apparatus. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of event information mail displayed on the display of the PC and the mobile phone. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of processing performed by the point management apparatus, which is processing according to access from the information terminal. FIG. 33 is a diagram subsequent to FIG. 32, and is mainly processing according to access from the store terminal. FIG. 34 is a diagram subsequent to FIG. 32 or 33, and shows processing in response to reception of a registration request from the operation terminal. FIG. 35 is a diagram subsequent to FIG. 32 or 33, and shows processing in response to reception of a login request from the operation terminal. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of a subroutine executed by the point management apparatus. FIG. 37 is a flowchart subsequent to FIG. 35, and is a flowchart showing an example of member integration processing performed by the point management apparatus. FIG. 38 is a flowchart subsequent to FIG. 35, and is a flowchart showing an example of the handover process performed by the point management apparatus. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of takeover processing performed by the point management apparatus. FIG. 40 is a diagram following FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram following FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed on the display of the operation terminal. FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed on the display of the operation terminal. FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents of a menu screen displayed on the display of the operation terminal. FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating an example of group setting processing performed by the point management apparatus according to the modification of the first embodiment. FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an example of contents stored in the group DB and the store DB stored in the point management apparatus according to the modification of the first embodiment. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed on the display of the PC and the mobile phone according to the modification of the first embodiment. FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example of storage contents of each DB stored in the point management apparatus according to the second embodiment, where (a) is a point member information DB, (b) is a notification information DB, and (c) is a use. It is an amount DB. FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed when integrated registration is received by the PC and the mobile phone according to the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed when integrated registration is received by the card unit and the kiosk terminal according to the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example of a store match determination process performed by the point management apparatus according to the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a diagram following FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart subsequent to FIG. 35, and is a flowchart showing an example of member integration processing performed by the point management apparatus according to the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart subsequent to FIG. 35, and is a flowchart showing an example of the takeover process performed by the point management apparatus according to the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating an example of takeover processing performed by the point management apparatus according to the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a modification of the point member registration process performed by the point management apparatus.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Point management system 4 ... 1st member card 4a ... Display area 4b ... IC chip (1st member card ID, 1st member ID)
4c ... Magnetic stripe (first member ID)
5 ... 2nd member card 5a ... Display area 5b ... IC chip (2nd member card ID, other system member ID)
5c ... Magnetic stripe (other system member ID)
6 ... PC
7 ... Cellular phone 20 ... Card unit 22 ... Control unit 25 ... Card R / W
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 30 ... Kiosk terminal 32 ... Control part 33 ... Card reader 50 ... Point management apparatus 51b ... Communication part for transfer apparatuses 52 ... Control part 53 ... Hard disk 54 ... Display 55 ... Input device

Claims (8)

Manages the number of points owned by each member in association with member identification information that is specified from the recording information of the recording medium issued to the member registered as a store member at each store, and that member can be individually identified A point management system comprising a point management device having point management means for performing
On the recording medium, first member specifying information capable of specifying the member identification information is magnetically or electrically recorded, and second member specifying information capable of specifying the member identification information is recorded in a visible manner. ,
A recording medium accepting unit that is installed in each store, accepts the recording medium, reads the first member identifying information recorded on the accepted recording medium, and first member identifying information read by the recording medium accepting unit A store terminal having a first registration request transmission means for transmitting a first registration request including the first registration request to the point management device,
The point management device
Based on the reception of the first registration request transmitted from the store terminal, the member identification information specified from the first member specifying information included in the received first registration request is registered in the point management means. In addition, in the information terminal possessed by the member, the member includes the input second member specifying information transmitted from the information terminal when the member inputs the second member specifying information and performs a registration operation. Registration means for registering the member identification information specified from the second member specifying information included in the received second registration request in the point management means based on receiving the second registration request;
A group setting means for setting a group to which a plurality of stores belong;
Based on the reception of the second member identification information from the information terminal, it is possible to individually identify stores corresponding to the integration source member identification information which is member identification information identified from the received second member identification information A group corresponding store determination unit that determines whether the store identification information is store identification information of a store belonging to the group set by the group setting unit;
The integration target member identification information, which is other member identification information desired to be integrated with the integration source member identification information, is determined on the condition that it is determined by the group corresponding store determination means that it is the store identification information of the stores belonging to the group. An integrated reception page transmitting means for transmitting an integrated reception page for receiving input of the identifiable second member specifying information to the information terminal;
A store of a store corresponding to the integration target member identification information identified from the received second member identification information based on receiving the second member identification information input on the integration reception page from the information terminal The same group store determination means for determining whether the identification information is store identification information of the same group store belonging to the group of stores corresponding to the integrated former member identification information;
Member identification information association processing for associating the integration source member identification information and the integration target member identification information on the condition that the same group store determination means determines that it is store identification information of the same group store. Member identification information association processing means to perform;
Point summing means for summing the number of points corresponding to each member identification information associated by the member identification information association processing;
The point management system further comprising point use processing means for performing processing for allowing the member to use the total number of points totaled by the point summing means in order to enjoy a predetermined service. The point management system according to claim 1,
The point management device
Login member identification information which is member identification information identified from the second member identification information included in the received information disclosure request based on the reception of the information disclosure request including the second member identification information from the information terminal Same member determination means for determining whether or not there is member identification information associated with
The member-dedicated page dedicated to the member including at least the number of points corresponding to the login member identification information is transmitted to the information terminal on the condition that the same member determining unit determines that the member is not present, and the same member determination is performed. And a member-dedicated page transmission unit that transmits the member-dedicated page including at least the total number of points added by the point summation unit to the information terminal on the condition that it is determined by the means. Point management system characterized by The point management system according to claim 1 or 2,
The point management device
An e-mail address acquiring means for acquiring an e-mail address of a member who performs the registration operation from the information terminal in accordance with the second registration request;
Member management means for managing the email address acquired by the email address acquisition means in association with the member identification information specified from the second member specifying information included in the received second registration request;
Notification information setting means for setting notification contents to be notified to the member and information capable of specifying member identification information of the member to be notified;
An e-mail address extracting means for extracting an e-mail address managed by the member management means in association with the notification target member identification information specified from the information set by the notification information setting means;
An e-mail transmitting unit that transmits an e-mail including notification information for providing the notification content set by the notification information setting unit to the e-mail address extracted by the e-mail address extracting unit;
Based on the reception of the confirmation request including the first member identification information from the store terminal, the member identification information identified from the first member identification information included in the received confirmation request is set by the notification information setting means Notification target determination means for determining whether or not the member identification information to be notified is specified from the information that has been determined;
And a notification information return means for returning the notification information to the store terminal on the condition that the notification target determination means determines that the identification information is member identification information to be notified. Management system. The point management system according to claim 3,
The point management device uses the member management means in association with the member identification information specified from the first member specifying information included in the received confirmation request based on the reception of the confirmation request from the store terminal. An e-mail address management judging means for judging whether or not the e-mail address is managed;
The notification information reply means does not reply the notification information to the store terminal on the condition that the e-mail address management determination means determines that the e-mail address is managed. Management system. Manages the number of points owned by each member in association with member identification information that is specified from the recording information of the recording medium issued to the member registered as a store member at each store, and that member can be individually identified A point management device having point management means for performing
On the recording medium, first member specifying information capable of specifying the member identification information is magnetically or electrically recorded, and second member specifying information capable of specifying the member identification information is recorded in a visible manner. ,
The first registration request including the first member specifying information read from the received recording medium, which is transmitted from the store terminal when the member receives the recording medium at the store terminal installed in each store. Based on the reception, the member identification information specified from the first member specifying information included in the received first registration request is registered in the point management means, and the member is registered in the information terminal possessed by the member. The reception based on receiving the second registration request including the input second member specifying information transmitted from the information terminal by inputting the second member specifying information and performing a registration operation. Registration means for registering member identification information specified from the second member specifying information included in the second registration request in the point management means;
A group setting means for setting a group to which a plurality of stores belong;
Based on the reception of the second member identification information from the information terminal, it is possible to individually identify stores corresponding to the integration source member identification information which is member identification information identified from the received second member identification information A group corresponding store determination unit that determines whether the store identification information is store identification information of a store belonging to the group set by the group setting unit;
The integration target member identification information, which is other member identification information desired to be integrated with the integration source member identification information, is determined on the condition that it is determined by the group corresponding store determination means that it is the store identification information of the stores belonging to the group. An integrated reception page transmitting means for transmitting an integrated reception page for receiving input of the identifiable second member specifying information to the information terminal;
A store of a store corresponding to the integration target member identification information identified from the received second member identification information based on receiving the second member identification information input on the integration reception page from the information terminal The same group store determination means for determining whether the identification information is store identification information of the same group store belonging to the group of stores corresponding to the integrated former member identification information;
Member identification information associating processing for associating the integration source member identification information with the integration target member identification information on condition that the same group store determination means determines that it is store identification information of the same group store. Member identification information association processing means to perform;
Point summing means for summing the number of points corresponding to each member identification information associated by the member identification information association processing;
A point management apparatus, further comprising point use processing means for performing processing for allowing the member to use the total number of points totaled by the point summing means to enjoy a predetermined service. The point management device according to claim 5,
Login member identification information which is member identification information identified from the second member identification information included in the received information disclosure request based on the reception of the information disclosure request including the second member identification information from the information terminal Same member determination means for determining whether or not there is member identification information associated with
The member-dedicated page dedicated to the member including at least the number of points corresponding to the login member identification information is transmitted to the information terminal on the condition that the same member determining unit determines that the member is not present, and the same member determination is performed. And a member-dedicated page transmission unit that transmits the member-dedicated page including at least the total number of points added by the point summation unit to the information terminal on the condition that it is determined by the means. A point management device characterized by this. The point management device according to claim 5 or 6,
An e-mail address acquiring means for acquiring an e-mail address of a member who performs the registration operation from the information terminal in accordance with the second registration request;
Member management means for managing the email address acquired by the email address acquisition means in association with the member identification information specified from the second member specifying information included in the received second registration request;
Notification information setting means for setting notification contents to be notified to the member and information capable of specifying member identification information of the member to be notified;
An e-mail address extracting means for extracting an e-mail address managed by the member management means in association with the notification target member identification information specified from the information set by the notification information setting means;
An e-mail transmitting unit that transmits an e-mail including notification information for providing the notification content set by the notification information setting unit to the e-mail address extracted by the e-mail address extracting unit;
Based on the reception of the confirmation request including the first member identification information from the store terminal, the member identification information identified from the first member identification information included in the received confirmation request is set by the notification information setting means Notification target determination means for determining whether or not the member identification information to be notified is specified from the information that has been determined;
And a notification information return means for returning the notification information to the store terminal on the condition that the notification target determination means determines that the identification information is member identification information to be notified. Management device. The point management device according to claim 7,
Based on the receipt of the confirmation request from the store terminal, the member managing means manages the email address in association with the member identification information identified from the first member identification information included in the received confirmation request. An e-mail address management judging means for judging whether or not
The notification information reply means does not reply the notification information to the store terminal on the condition that the e-mail address management determination means determines that the e-mail address is managed. Management device.

Images